^mA% GIFT or Harold TOieeler TT7J ^ i Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from Microsoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/ahnsmethodoflearOOahnfrich Steiger's German Series. s/rpOi^^/C- AHN'S METHOD OP LEARNING THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. REyi.SED '..'... BY GUSTAVUS FISCHER. FIRST (PRACTICAL) COURSE. Fifth Edition. NEW YORK. E. Steiger. 1873. UMituJ /r Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1 871, by V B. Steiger, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. GIFT OF E. Steigee, New York, Printer and Kectr«tyjier . PREFACE. Ahn's Method of Learning the German Language con- sists of a Practical and a Theoretical Course. The former contains progressive exercises in both languages, beginning with the simplest elementary forms, and in the natural pro- gress of the course gradually expanding with the different forms of inflection and the most important parts of Syntax, till the student may be considered sufficiently familiar with the lan- guage to begin reading German text. The different exercisps are preceded by special vocabularies and as many rules as the student would need to render the exercises without mistakes. The First Part of the Practical Course is preliminary, being 4r intended to give the beginner a general idea of German forms and constructions. The Second Part reviews the preliminary exercises in a more complete and systematic manner; and the Third Part chiefly contains exercises on tenses, moods, re- flexive and compound verbs, conjunctions, prepositions and syntactical idioms. A general vocabulary, appended to the Course, facilitates the rendering of words that have already occurred in previous exercises without being repeated in the special vocabularies. For the gradual acquirement of German handwriting a spe- cial, and — we hope — efficient provision has been made at the close of the Course, designed to accompany the single ex- ercises, but so that the beginner may or may not make use of it, the Course itself being in neither case interfered with. Pronunciation has been treated in a preliminary chapter. The Theoretical Course contains a brief and systematic abstract of grammatical rules, to be studied either separately, or in connection with the Practical Course. Paradigms have been given no more than necessity required, but those given are complete. Either Course will occupy no more than one 968295 — IT — College-Term. In schools a longer time should be devoted to the study of each Course. The Editor has in the First and Second parts of the Prac- tical Course mainly reproduced Ahn's work as it was originally written by him, but the numerous errors and practical incon- gruities and inconveniences have been carefully corrected. Many sentences in the exercises have been rejected, and others- have been introduced whenever it seemed necessary. Many new rules have been added, since in the original work no account was taken of the method of instruction peculiar to our country. Tha Third Part of the Practical Course, the weakest in Ahn's original Method, has been entirely re-written in such a way as Ahn probably would have adopted, had he written for this country and at this day. The stock of words used, has been greatly enlarged, since the small number of words in Ahn's Method by which he builds up and rebuilds all his sentences, are always leading to great practical inconveniences, however desirable it may be to confine first beginners to as few words as possible. With the same view, the whole Theoretical Course, which In no wise comes up to the requirement of this country and of this time, has been entirely written anew, and only the general division of the work into chapters has been retained. In this Theoretical Course the grammatical material has been selected in accordance with the principle that the student should master the leading facts of the language in the directest and plainest way possible, in order to arrive by the shortest road at the reading of text. Due regard has been always paid to ' con- versational language' in the Practical Course, while in the Theoretical Course the preparation of the student for ' reading' has been the main object. We deemed it necessary to add a complete index referring to both Courses, not doubting that this addition will meet the approval of all that shall use the work. An absolute or even relative ^ completeness' cannot be ex- pected in a work of this kind. Indeed, no grammar extant can be considered ' complete. ' No grammarian can do more than select ^ something' out of the inexhaustible store of the living language, -discover the secret and silent laws which have produced the forms of this 'something,' and call a collection of such laws ^ a grammar.' How many details should be thus presented, depends on the tact of the grammarian. But to the ^ end of language' no grammarian has yet come, and in this sense all grammars are (more or less) incomplete. Whether ive have been successful in our selections, whether or not we have omitted many things that ought to have been explained, and explained many things that ought to have been omitted, the reader must decide. Indeed, in this method of ^selection' consists almost the whole art of a grammarian. In the present work many rules will be found which will be in vain looked for in other grammars, and many will not be found which other grammarians are in the habit of presenting. Whatever may be thought of such deviations from the accus- tomed ruts (often regarded as almost sacred with a peculiar superstition), we always had our reasons for either the omission or the addition, which reasons, although they have nowhere been presented, the attentive reader will without diflBculty discover ^between the lines'. But we hope that no essential law of the language will be missed, and that both the teacher and the student will find explicitness in our different statements to be commensurate with the lesser or greater difficulty of the subject. A glance at any of the different chapters, for instance those on adjectives, prepositions, con- junctions and the subjunctive mood, will fully bear out these remarks. The terminology adopted is the one which is uni- versally used in Germany. Nobody will now find fault with such expressions as ^strong and weak verbs or nouns'. All recent German grammarians and lexicographers (we believe without a solitary exception) have adopted these terms*, and * The expressions strong and weak in reference to declension and con- jugation have been introduced by Jacob Grimm in the first edition of his German Grammar (1817). The following ideas have led to the universal adoption of these terms. A strong verb has strength enough in its root to dispense with the help of auxiliary endings in the imperfect (fdjlagen — fd)tug); but the roots of weak verbs have no such power, attaching auxiliary endings for that purpose (lobeil — tobtc). A strong noun or adjective is one which forms distinctive endings, so that it may be declined without the help of an article, and yet show its case, gender and number (gifd^ — gtfd^e^, etc.), whil$ — VI — we consider it greatly reprehensible to substitute for ^technical terms' expressions made by ourselves for whatever reason; not to mention the inconvenience arising from the use, along with our grammars, of German dictionaries in which the familiarity of the reader with such terms is presupposed. The owner of the WORD ought to determine its name. Should we not be greatly astonished, if in an English grammar, written in Germany, our terms ^possessive case, progressive form, POTENTIAL mood, ctc' wcrc ignored, and replaced by terms unintelligible to us? The reading pieces in Ahn's original Method are replaced by other pieces which seemed to us better adapted to the wants of the beginner. We close with the remark that (except the parts of Ahn's original work mentioned above) no use has been made and no authority followed of any existing grammar. We have tried to develop the different laws of the language from the material which during a close study of German literature for almost a quarter of a century, has accumulated under our hands. The form and wording given to our rules and their methodical arrangement are the results of our experience, during an almost equal period, as a teacher of German in College, in schools of both sexes, and as an instructor of private pupils. We doubt not that errors will be detected, and we shall be grateful to have our attention called to them. WEAK nouns and adjectives do not distinguish cases or numbers, and hence must have an auxiliary article or other word to show in what case, number or gender they are placed (bcr gute, beg gutCtt, bem gutCtt, etc.; beg §trtett, bem §trtCtl, etc.). Formerly the strong verbs were improperly called irre- gular or OLD verbs. ^WN Brunswick, April 18th, 18*71. €rVLStavus Fischer. ^v/ The Pronunciation. I. THE ALPHABET. Thr German Alphabet is composed Qf tUe folio wing i^6;l6tters: Written. Printed. Written. Printed. Written. Printed. J e ^* (I e i ^. 3 i 3 1 ^^ D s t u V w Uu .^ x-3^ There are three softened vowels (Umtaute): ii^^'ta o^.^fei) u^^'Uii (2te) (Oe) (Ue) COMPOUND AND DOUBLE CONSONANTS. cli.^^/d^, ck^d, St ^^% ^% sell ^^^fc^, "^~ ff^ff, tz ^ ^. ss — 2 — il. SIMPLE VOWELS, h. Fyery vowel is pronounced uniformly in whatever words of the laiiguage. it wiy; occur. But every vowel-sound has a loBg -and a ,sUor^ pronunciation. ' '2^ ^it(>wels: fpllo\\eri. by .two consonants or a double con sonant are generally pronounced short; followed by one con- sonant they are generally long. 3. 31, a long is pronounced almost like a in father: SSater, laben, grage. Short a has no exact equivalent in English: 3llter, banfen, ®a(Ic. 4. 6, e long is pronounced almost like a in care^ as the first syllables in the words Stebe, geben, @teL Short e is pronounced like e in end^ as: ®ctb, %tii, and the first syllables of benteit and (Snbe. The letter e in final syllables and in inflectional endings has generally the English obscure sound, as the two last syllables in lebeiibe, fanfterer, and the final syllables in 23ater, ®arten, ^Tage. There is no other obscure sound in German but e. 5. ^, X long is pronounced like English ee (tree), as: 5£tger^ 4BibeI, ittir. Short i has the sound of 2 in ill or in: ^rrttjum, ftnben, ^inb. 6. D, long is pronounced like English o in hope: Of en, ober, ^ol, rott). Short has no exact equivalent in English. It keeps a middle between English u in sun and o in hope: fommen, ®otb, joUen. T. U, u long is pronounced like English o in move: Slut, 5«B' Sntber, gut. Short u sounds like u in full or double oo in good: 2}?unb, 2^l)urm, gutter, muBte. 8. ^, I) occurs in modern orthography only in words taken from the Greek language, and is pronounced as German i would be in its place: ®l)ftem, @tt)(. III. SOFTENED VOWELS. 1. %. a long is pronounced as German long e (English a in ocure): ©dbcl, 93dter, Sdi, ftdt^ (or ftete). Short S has exactly the sound of German short c: alter^ ®arten, mu. 2. £), long has no equivalent sound in English; it is pronounced as French eu in feu: bofe, tonen, ®ot^e. Short has no equivalent in English; it is pronounced as French eu in jeune: fonnen, Dotlig, Corner. 3. it, ii long has no equivalent sound in English; it is pro- nounced like French it in rue: Uben, mitbe, ®ltte. Short ii has no equivalent in English and is pronounced like French u in nul: 99?UtIer, ftiirmifd^, tt)iinf(^en. Observation. — In order to pronounce o the mouth must be placed in the position in which o is pronounced; but the vowel e (German) must be sounded. To pronounce ii, we sound the letter t (German), having the mouth in the position to pronounce u (German). IV. DOUBLE VOWELS. They are: aa^ ee, oo. They are sounded like a, e, o long: ®aa(, SJJeet;, JDJoo^. Guard against pronouncing the double vowels ee and oo like English ee and oo. V. DIPHTHONGS. They are: ai, au, et, eu, ciu and the obsolete at) and el). The diphthong ou occurs only in words taken from the French, and is then pronounced like German long u, as: (Sourage, iour, goui^. The diphthongs ot and ot) exist in some proper nouns, and are pronounced like English oi: Soi^enburg, ^ol)m. All diphthongs have only a long sound. 1. 2lt (at) and et are pronounced alike, and sound like English i in wine: ^aifer, Tlai, (eiben, SBeitt. 2. 3lu (au) is pronounced like English ou in house: Saum, laufen, blau. 3. Su (eu) and au are pronounced alike, and have no exact equivalent in English. Their pronunciation comes nearest to English 01 in boil: greunb, @u(e, geuer, @aule, ^dume, ©rduel (©reuel). — 4. — ■ VI. SIGNS OF LENGTHENED VOWELS. 1. Frequently the length of vowels is marked by certain letters, connected with them. These are: l)the consonant ^, 2) the vowel e, 3) the repetition of the same vowel. 2. The letter 1^ as lengthening sign (in which case it, of course, is not pronounced) occurs after all the vowels: ma^Ien, getter, \\^v, woijl U^r; t^re, mWx, 3Ku^te. 3. The letter e as lengthenmg sign occurs only after i. The combination ie is always pronounced like i (German) long: regieren, Steg, Dtel, btefer. - Obs. — But final te in some words taken from foreign languages is pro- nounced like English ia in Virginia: gamttte, 3uUc, 2xixt* The same is the case in regard to the endings ier of national nouns and ten, as: @panter, ©aHier, ^tften. 4. The doubling of vowels takes place with a, e and o, but not with t, u,or the softened vowels and the diphthongs. Obs. — Since very frequently the length of vowels is not indicated at all (see the examples above, No. II.), all these lengthening signs are deemed superfluous, and modern orthography has a tendency to diminish them, and spell words with the simple vowels only. VII. CONSONANTS. 1. 33r b is pronounced as in English, but b final has the sound of p: ab, S8eib, 2;rteb. 2. S, c before e, i, t), a and o is pronounced like ts: Scifar, Sitrone, gl)ltnber, goltbat, geber. Before consonants, the vowels a, o, n, W, and at the end of words it is pronounced like f : Sarnet^af, Socarbe, Sreole^ Sleru^, Surie, giiraffier, *ipic. Obs. — The letter c is'only used in words taken from foreign languages. Many writers have commenced to discard the use of c, if pronounced like I, and substitute the letter f for it. Words taken from the Greek should be al- ways spelled with !: ^rttt!, ®ofrate8. 3. SI), cf), in the beginning of words, occurs only in words taken from foreign languages^ and is generally pronounced like kj as: 6t)or, Stjrtft, (5t)ara!tcr. But before i it has the German — 5 — aspirate sound (see below): g^ina, Sl)irurg. In words taken from the French, it is pronounced like sh^ when it has this pronunciation in French: g^ef, (5l}au[fee, St)arlatan. In the middle or at the end of the word its pronunciation is twofold, depending on the preceding letter. Neither has an equivalent in English. It has a guttural sound after a, o, u, an: "^adj, mac^en, 80^, poijcn.^ndj, fuc^en, anij, rauc^en. It has an aspirate sound after any other letter or diphthong: Sled), ftedien, ^dijm, riecfien, St^t, mdd^tig, mo(J)te, p^ttg, rdudjern, eud), 3}idbcf)en, tt)el(f)er, 3io^^en. &}^ or d^f is generally pronounced like x (ks): ffiad^^, \cij^, T^nij^r Sii(l)fe. But if ^ or f belongs to an inflectional ending, or the i) belongs to a different radical in which the following ^ or f is not contained, the d) has either the aspirate or guttural sound: be^ ©ui^^ (genitive of 33u(^), 1^0(^ft (superlative ofijod)), mi)^ (superlative of na^e), n)acl)fam (from toai^en and fam),na(i)'' fe^en (from nac^ and fe^cn). 4. 5), b at the end of words is pronounced like t: 2txh, Stub, iDilb, bdb. 5. ®, g at the beginning of a syllable is pronounced like g in good: ge{)en, grog, SBagen, legen. At the end and the middle of syllables the pronunciation is not fully settled. After t and tc all give it the aspirate pro- nunciation of d): fettg, ©teg, ftegte. After n at the end of words it has the pronunciation of k: ®efang, lang, $Rtng. After other letters some pronounce it invariably like g in good, while others give it the pronunciation of (^, either aspirate or guttural ac- cording to the previous letter. Both pronunciations have equally good authority: S^ag, 2Beg, Icgt, ragt, beugt, fdugt, 3Sogt, 2:rug. Obs. — Some pronounce g, if between two vowels, with a sound between 6) and g (hard). This pronunciation is inelegant and has no good authority. In ©egen. 9f^egen, ttiagen, the g ought to be pronounced exactly as in good. It is best for beginners to pronounce g in all instances as g in good, except when it is final after it or i. The student is then sure to have always an un- objectionable pronunciation. If tig is not final it has the pronunciation of English ng in singer, bringer or springer, not as ng in longer, stronger or finger, as: gttiger, lauge, 9Kenge, Sunglttig, fatigen. — 6 — g in words taken from the French is pronounced, as it would be at the same place in that language: hard in Ooutjerneur, soft in (Courage (softer than sh), 6. $, 1^ at the beginning of words is pronounced like h in hill: ^aii^^ l^art, l^eben. In the beginning of syllables not initial, the aspiration is less perceptible: 9tetf)e, rau!)er. In the middle or at the end of syllables t) is a sign of lengthening the preced- ing vowel, and is not pronounced: 4Ba^n, frii!), mel)r. T. Q, I is pronounced like the English consonant y in yet: Sa\)x, Qod), jung. 8. S, ! is pronounced as in English, but is never mute: Snie, Snabc. In place of doubling f, the double consonant d is used, which is pronounced like k in bake^ and always indicates that the previous vowel is short: baden, ®ti:(f, 3lder, Slid. 9. ®, f, ^, The long f is used in the beginning and middle of syllables; at the end of syllables the short ^ only is used. The capital © and long f are always pronounced like English z in zeal; short ^ has always the sound of hissing s m hats: ©ommer, ateife, §aufer, §au^, lo^. ff always has the hissing sound of ss in passing: SBaffer, iriffen, mliffen. This double letter can never stand at the begin- ning and at the end of words (except when Roman type is used). ^ has the hissing sound of ss: gug, glu^, flieBen, gro^. If Roman type is used, § is generally written 55; Fuss, Fluss, etc. ®(^, fd) is pronounced like sh in shoe: @{f)atten, ©d^ule, Jtf^, fd)Iafen, fdinjer, fi^reieu. ®t, ft, and @p, fp in the middle and at the end of syllables are pronounced as in English, but in the beginning of syllables they sound like sht, shp: beft, laften, 9Be^pe, Stein, fprtngen, t)er^ fte!)en. 10. 5t^, tt) is not pronounced like English th^ but like simple t: Zi)at, xotij, mnt\), Qnt\)nm. 11. 3?, t) has the sound of/. But in words, taken from foreign languages, it is pronounced like English v: 33ater, t)iel, t)erfte^en, t)or; but SSenu^, 33incent. Some pronounce t) like Eng- lish V in the word gretiel. 12. SB, tt) is pronounced like English v: S3e(t, SBurjef, moCen, 13. 3' 5 sounds like ts, never like English z: ^a% ja^m, J3 has the same sound (ts), but is only used after a short vowel: ®li(5, 9iu^en, fe1§en, VIII. ACCENTUATION AND SYLLABICATION. 1. In German as well as in Enghsh words^ the principal accent is placed on the radical syllable. The stress imparted ' by the accent, is stronger m German than in Enghsh. 2. The secondary accent is more frequently applied m German than in English. Entirely without accent (obscure) are only those prefixes and endings which contain the vowel e. Thus the w^ord ar'beitfam has its principal accent on the first syllable, and each of the other two syllables has a secondary accent. On the other hand the word Derlet'jenbere has only one accent, which is on the second syllable, the first syllable being a prefix, and the third, fourth and fifth syllables inflectional endings, all of which are pronounced with the obscure sound. 3. Compound nouns have their principal accent on the radical syllable of the first component, as: -3iJng'Ung^^3lIter. Verbs compounded with prepositions have their principal ac- cent generally on the preposition, as: an'fangen. For other compound words the rules are more complicated, and should be learned by practice. 4. The syllables of German words are not divided accord- ing to English principles. Except in compound words, no re- gard is paid to the derivation of a word. Single consonants in the middle of a word belong to the following, not to the pre- ceding vowel, and of more than one succeeding consonants the first is joined with the preceding and the next, with the following vowel. Thus we divide: le-gen, ^du^er, Ite^ben, although the consonants g, f, b belong in respect to derivation to the first syllables. — 8 — PART I. 1. Singular, id) bin, I am; bu bift, thou art; er ifc he is; fie \% she is; Plural, XOXX fittb, we are; i^r feib, you are; fie finb, they are. ®Ut, good; grog, great, large, big; fleiit, little, small; retd), rich; arm, poor; jung, young; alt, old; miibe, tired; !ran!, ill, sick» ^6) bin gro^. ®u btft f(etn, (Sr tft alt. @te ift gut, 9Blr finb jung. Q\)x f etb xtxi), @tc finb arm. ©in ii^ gro^ ? Sift bu mlibe? ^'ft er fran!? .^ft fie iung? @inb xoxt reic^? @eib t^r arm? ©inb fie a(t? \^ ' "2. . ' ■' ^ ' / v.- ' ""-' I am little. Thou art young. We are tired. They are rich. Art tliou sick? You are poor. Is she old? Are you sick ? Are they good ? ^e is tall (g ro^): Am I poor ? @tarf, strong; treu, faithful; faut, idle, lazy; fletgtg, diligent; bofe, wicked, naughty; traurig, sad; gtiicflid^, happy; l^bfltc^, polite. Sift bu bofe? 3^d^ bin ni(^t bofe. @r ift traurig. Sir finb nid)t ftarf. ©inb fie treu? Sift bunii^t gliicflic^? ^\)X \t\\i nirf)t fteigig. @ie ift nirf)t faul. ^'ft er nid)t miibe ? Wix finb n\6)i arm. @inb fieni^tfjoflid)? 3:)u bift ni(i)t franl. 4. I am not tall. They are idle. She is not ill. We are not happy. He is not short (tiein). Are you not tired? They are — 9 — not rich. Is he not diligent ? Thou art not strong. They are . not happy. He is not polite. Are they not faithful ? Is she not rich? He is not wicked. 5. Masculine nouns: bcr S5ater, the father; ber @arten, the garden. Feminine nouns: bte 9Jlutter, the mother; bie @tabt, the town, city. Neuter nmns: bag ^iub, the child; ba6 §aug, the house. ^d)on, beautiful, fine; tag, long; ^od), high; neu,new; unb,.and; fel)r, very. 3:)er 3Sater ift gut. Die Whxiitx ift traurig. ©a^ Stub tft faul. !Der ©arten ift mrf)t fef)r lang. ®ie @tabt ift gro^ unb retd). ©a^ , §au^ ift nirf)t fiod). -3ft ber ®arten f(i)ou? 5ft ber SSater fran!? 3 ft ba^ ^inb mcf)t flei^tg? ^\i ha^ ^m^ neu? ®er SSaterunb bte a)?utter finb gtiicEa^ Obs. — All German substantives begin with a capital letter. — When two or more substantives follow each other, the article must be repeated before each, unless they are all of the same gender. — The article (ber, bie, bag) is different for the three genders. — The gender of nouns denoting persons is al- most always masculine for males, and feminine for females. — Objects not be- ing persons are either masculine, or feminme, or neuter. i , m i The house is not new. The mother and (the)* child are ill. The town is very beautiful. The child is not naughty. The father is very old. The house and (the) garden are very large. Is the mother not happy ? The house is not very old. » Is the garden not very fine ? The houseis very small. . LX^ . ^^"^^^ iiMasc. Diefer ^aum, this tree. ''*-'^'-''^*^ ■ Demonstratives: } Fern. biefe '^xau, this woman. % ( Neut. biefeg ?^f erb, this horse. 'Der 9)lann, the man; ber iBercj, the inoun tain; bte S3lume, the flower; ba« genfter, the window; pffen^ open; gufriebert, contented, satisfied, pleased; . ober, or. <-■■>:' y .. , . i tu-vv./O Cv v ' - - *' "^ ^ • ■ ■,,.. • A ^'-^y' * A parenthesis by \^hich one or more words are enclosed, means that such words are not used in the language from which the translation is made, and that they must be translated, A bracket enclosing a word denotes that the word is employed in the language only from which the translation is^* made. Such words must be omUud in translating. ,n / ' ' Qui ^■' '^ h-^^t^ ^^^^^^fM^\ — 10 — ^Ciefer Tlam tft fe^r arm. Diefe« genfter tft fcf)r {)0(^. Dicfc Slume tft fd^on. T)k\t^ *?ferb ift jung unb ftarf. ^^ft biefe grau glucflicf)? ©iefer 33ater unb biefe DJiutter ftnb ni(f)t jufrieben. ©iefer :93aum ift fe^r grop. 2)iefc grau tft arm unb frattf. T)iefe^ Ititb ift fe^r bofe. !©iefer Wlann ift nid)t ^dflicf). Sift bu traurig pber frattf? 8. This woman is tired. This mountain is not high. Is this child good or naughty? This man is not satisfied. This child is not very diligent. Is this garden small or large ? Art thou not contented ? This window is not open. Is this house old or new ? This tree is very fine. Is this man rich or poor ? This town is very dull (latign^eilig). 9. Masc. Fern. Neut. Indefinite article: etll, I meii I bein, Fossessives: | P^^"' etne, em, a; meine, - mtxn, betne, bein, my; thy. 2)er 53ruber, the brother; bie @ci)n)efter, the sister; bie geber, the pen; ba8 ^ud), the book; bcv greuiib, the friend; ^arl, Charles; ?uife, Louisa; tt)0, where; l^ter, here; nod), still, yet; aber, but. aWein Sruber ift traurig. 3Keine @(^tt)efter ift franf. Tltiti >8nd) ift fc^on. Q]t bein ®arten grop ? 3ft beine geber gut? ^ft bein ^^ferb flein? .tart ift uoc^ tin ^inb. Berlin ift eine (Stabt. Suifc ift lueine 2cf)tt)efter. T)ein 33ruber ift meiu greunb. T)m\ 33ater ift nidjt I}ier. ffio ift meiu Sitd} ? 3=ft ntein ^nd) ntc^t ^ier ? Sit beine tWutter nod) franf? ^d) bin noc^ itic^t ntitbe, aber bein ^Bruber uttb beine @d)tDefter finb fe^r ntitbe. 10. Charles is my brother. This child is my sister. Thou art my ft^end. Thy garden is very large. Where is thy mother ? A Mend is faithful. Is this child thy brother ? This horse is still young. Where is my pen ? Thy pen is here. Louisa is J still a child. Thy brother is idle . My friend is very diligent. --'U"^.'*^ %-€«/<*,.*-' — 11 - IL - ,. , i Ma»c. Fem. yeut. ( unfer, Possessives: ■{ euer, uttfcre, euerc, unfcr, euer, i^r, our; your; their. S)er @o^n, the son; bie 2^0(i)ter, the daught er; t>k X^iivt, the door; tmmer, always. Obs»— The third person plur. of the English possessive (their), and the second person plur. of the personal pronoun (you) are translated by the same word t{)r. Whether in a given sentence i^r is a possessive or a personal pro- noun must be determined by the connection. The personal pronouns bu and its plural i^r, and the corresponding pos- sessive beirx and euer are used to address near relatives, intimate friends and children. ®u and betu refer to one person, t^r and euer to more than one. Other persons less intimately connected, are addressed by the third per- son plural of the personal pronoun (®te) and the same person of the possessive (3^r), which are then written with a capital initial: @te fiub, you are (lit- erally they are); 3^r greuub, your friend (literally their friend). It makes here no difference whether one person is addressed or more than one. . Thus the German iljr (3t)r) may have three meanings: you, your, their. For a fourth meaning {her) see No. 25. Unfer ©arten tft gro^. Unfere Mniitx ift ftant Unfer ^ferb ift fd)on. ©iefer 9Kann tft unfer SSater. guer Sruber tft ^ier. kaxl ift euer ^ruber unb guife euere @(J)n)efter. Suer §aug ift gro^. 3)iefer aJtann unb btefe gran finb fe^r traurtg; i^r ®of)n ift intmer fran!. ^art unb guife finb glitdlidt); i^re abutter ift gufrie^ ben. ^l)x fe1b traurig; ift euer SSater no^ franf ? -3ft ^\)x ®o^n flei^ig? 3ft ^l)re Joditer jufrieben ? So ift 3^r «itd)? 3^re 2:i)itre ift immer offen. @inb @ie ntein greunb ? ©inb @ie nod^ aufrieben ? 12. Our father is good. Our mother is little. Our house is great. Thy father is our friend. Your town is beautiful. Your garden is large. Your horse is small. Charles and Louisa are sad ; their mother is sick. This man and this woman are happy; their friend is here. Your son is not al- ways diligent. Is your child sick ? Is Charles not your friend ? Where is your sister? They are not here; they are sick. You are tired, and your sister is sad. Are you not sick ? i.^'vv-^/W'l^^ 12 — 13. ^lein, little, small; fletner, smaller; alt, old; alter, older; grog, great; grower, greater; jung, young; jiinger, younger; fietgig, diligent; fteigtger, more diligent. DWi^ttd^, useful; ungtMItd^, unhappy; ber §unb, the dog; bie ^a^c, the cat; bie ©onne, the sun; ber 9}ionb, the moon; al6, than, as. Obs. — In forming the comparative of an adjective, the radical vowel a generally changes into d; into o; and u into u. All comparatives, without exception, are formed by adding er to the positive. .3Ketn 53ruber tft alter ate i^. Qd) bin junger ate ntetn ^^reunb. ^arl tft groBcr dte gutfe. 35tefer 9JJann tft groBer ate xoix. ©er §unb ift treuer ate bie Sa^e. !J)a6 ^ferb ift fd)oner unb nit^(id)er ate ber §unb. ©iefe^ Sinb ift flei^iger dte bu. ®ie ftnb glitdlic^er ate S^x :^ruber. ' Sari ift ftdrfer ate 16). SBir finb 3ufriebener ate tl^r. guife ift ^of(id)er ate beine @d^tt)efter. ^'ft Q\}v S3ritber Jitnger ate (2ie ? Sr ift alter, aber Ileiner ate id) unb ©ie. (Sr ift um glitcf(i(^er ate @ie,. aber (Sie finb tranriger ate er. 14. My brother is more diligent than thou. Thou art not younger than he. He is taller and stronger than I. Your son is younger than this child. The moon is smaller than the sun. Art thou older than I ? This dog is finer than this cat. Your sister is politer than you. I am more contented than thou. You are richer than we. We are more unhappy than you. This dog is more useftil than your horse. Is your sister older than my mother ? 15. @ut, good; beffer, better; l^oc^, high; l^ii^er, higher; 3)a« ©If en, the iron; bag iBtet, the lead; ber ©tal^I, the steel; btc Srbe, the earth; fd^toer, heavy; l^art, hard; tl)euer, dear; fo, so, as; ju, too. i — 13 — Obs. — Demonstrative and all other adjective pronouns are placed in tbe gender of the nouns to which they refer. As in the second part of a comparison is translated by al^; in the first part by fo» 2)iein ^itd) ift f(J)oner ate j;ene^, 3Jieine gebcr tft beffer a{6 btefe. ©er Stal)I ift {)drter ate ba^ gifen. J)iefer Serg ift i)o^er ate jener. ©ie ta^e ift nic^t fo treu ate ber §unb. 3)a^ -Slei ift nirf)t fo ^art ate ba§ (Sifen. ^ft 3{)r §au^ nicf)t grower ate iene^ ? 3=ft ba^ Sleitfjeurer ate ba^gifen? 3:)er ^Konb ift n\d)t fo grog ate bic @rbe. !©iefe^ Sinb ift fteigiger ate iene^. Qznt grau ift (irmer a(^ biefe. Unfer ®arten ift nii^t fo lang unb fc^on al^ biefer. 16. -V (The) lead is heavier than (the) iron. This tree is not so high as that. /Is this book not better than that ? Our garden is smaller than this one. / This house is higher than that one. (The) iron is more useful than (the) lead. CI am not so old as he. (The) lead is not so dear as (the) steel, n Our town is larger and finer than this (bne. -fWe are not so rich as this man, but we are more contented than he. Singular, id) 'ijobt, I have; \in lja% thou hast; tXf fte Ijat, he, she has;- PluraL tt)tr ^aben, we have; xljv Ijabt, @te l^aben, you have; fte ^aben, they have. !5)tc U^r, the watch; bo8 3Jieffer, the knife; ^t&jt, right; Uttrcd^t, wrong; §einrtc^, Henry; l[?ubtr)tg, Lewis; fiir, for; aud^, also; tt)arutn, why.— I am right, lam wrong, tc^ Ijabe ^t^t, i(!^ ^abt Unre(^t (not x&j bin 9ie(^t or Unred^t), Si) f)abe 9ted)t. ©u ^aft Unrcc^t. Qd) ^abe ein «udt). !Du ^aft eine geber. aWein ^ruber ^at eine Ut)r. SBir ^aben ein §)au^. ^i^v ^abt ein ^ferb. ^art nnb giiife ^aben eine ^a^e. |)aft bn eine ©dimefter? |)at biefer aWann eine JEo^ter? ^aht xijx ein tinb? ©iefe Uf)r ift fiir nteine ajjntter. ©iefe geber ift fitr Sari. §aben ©ie notf) ^^re aKntter? Sarnm ^aft bn mein 2»effer? Qd) ^abe bein aJZeffer nid)t. — u — 18. , Charles, hast thou my pen ? M^ouisa, hast thou my book ? Henry has thy pen, and Lewis has thy book.*^-^hou art right. My son is wrong. We hav€ a book and a pen.^^ave you also a horse and a watch ? This knife is for Henry /v Is this watch for thy mother ? Has your friend a knife ?>^Charles and Lewis have a horse. "^Has your father still a sister ?X Is this flower for my daughter ? K Are you right or wrong? >^ Have you my ( I have not your pen. pen?^j(] 19. Past Partidplee: gelauft, bought; toerfauft, sold; gefuttbett, found; tocrlo* ten, lost; genommen, taken; gefe^en, seen. Obs. — In all principal sentences the past participle is detached from the auxiliary and placed at the end of the sentence. — 9f^od) ntd^t (not iitd^t tioc^), not yet. ^6) I)abe mein Suc^ Derloren. §)aft bu mein SJJeffer gefunben? -3(1) l)abe bein 3}2e[fer md)! gefunben. 3Bo ift meine geber? §abt t^r meine geber ? SBir ^aben beine geber ntrf)t. 3JJein 23ater ^at biefe^ ^^ferb getanft. SBtr ^ben nnfer ^au^ t)erfauft. SBo l^aft bu meine U^r gef nnben ? aBarnm ^aben @te meine U^r genommen ? ^i) ^abe ^^xt 3J?ntter unb ^^xt S(f)tt)efter gefe^en. SBarnm ^t 3I)r SSater biefe^ §an^ nii^t gefanft ? §at bein ©ruber meine geber ge^ nommen ? @r ^at beine geber nii^t genommen. §)aben Sie meine U^r nod) ni(^t gefunben ? 20. ^ Where hast thou found this book ? Have you lost your pen ? Has your father bought this horse ?-^ Why have you sold your watch ? Why have you not taken my pen ? My brother has found thy knife.'T We have seen thy mother. iTl have not yet seen this woman. X Charles and Lewis have lost their mother; they are very sad. 21. Nominative. Accusative. Objective. 2)er SSater, ben 35ater, the father; biefer iBater, btefcn '^a\n, this father. p^ -. 15 — 2)er ^onig, the king; ber §ut, the hat; ber @tocf, the stick, the cane; bcr ©rief, the letter; oft, often; fd)On, already. Past Participles: gefci^rieben^ written; erftalten, received. Obs. — The direct object is placed in the accusative case. The accusative in the neuter and feminine is the same as the nominative. — If the article or pronoun belongs to two coordinate nouns of different genders, the article and pronoun must be repeated in German before every noun: ber Bater unb bte Wbxittx, the father and mother. ^c^ {)abe ben Sontg gefetjen. §aft bu ben -Srtef er^alten? SKeine ©ditnefter ^i ben Srief norf) m6)i geftf)rieben, §einnc^ ^at ben @tO(f Derloren. aJiein SSater ^at btefen ®arten nnb biefe^ §au§ getanft. SSo ^abt i^r btefen $nnb nnb biefe Sa^e gefnnben ? ^6) ^abe bie[en 3)iann fd)on oft gefe^en, 2Barnm ^aben @te biefen §nt genommen? SBtr ^ben biefen Srief gefnnben. §at bein Srnber btefen ©tod tjertoren? 22, ?^ We have sold the house and the garden. Have you bought this dog and this horse ^ I have seen the man and woman, the son and daughter. I have not written this letter. Where have you found this book and cane?/^ Has thy brother bought this tree ? This letter is for this man. Hast thou lost this hat? /-Hast thou not taken this book and pen ? ?^ Hast thou already seen the king? I have not yet seen the king. 23. Norn, etn ©arten, ) ^ crc^r-A^r. -^^- inein §unb, [ _„ .„ S)eriBoge1, the bird; ber ®tu^t, the chair; bcr Stif (5^, the table; ber iBIeiftift, the pencil; ber ^adjhax, the neighbor; fro^, Dergniigt, glad. • Obs. — ^The accusative masculine sing, of all adjective pronouns (See No. 9, 11, 15) is formed by the ending en. The e of this ending is genltally dropped in unfer and euer (unfern, euem).— The preposition fiir requires the next noun in the accusative. ^ 3Wetn53rnberift fe^r fro^; er ^at einen SSo^el. '|)aft bn etnen 53rtef er^alten? Qd) ^abe meinen ^nt Derloren. §aben@ie nteinen ^nnb ftfjon gefe^en? SBir ^aben etnen Stfc^ nnb @tu{)t gefanft. — 16 — SDlein ©ruber ^at betnen (Stod genommcn. 2Co ^aft bu beinen ©let* ftift gefauft? SBtr ^aben imfern SSater unb unfere SKutter t)er(oren. 3rf) ^abe O^ren ©rief nid)t er^alten. §at bein ©ruber unfem ®ar^ Un unb unfer ^au^ fdE)on gefe^en? Uufer 5lac^bar ^at ben Sontg gejeJ)en. §aft bu biefen aSoge( gefauft ober ienen? 24. ~ We have lost our dog. This man has lost a son and a daughter. Where have you found my pencil ? Have you al- ready seen my brother and mother ? \1 have bought a hat for my sister. Our neighbor has found thy knife and cane. Where hast thou bought this table ? Thy brother has taken my chair. -^ Have you written a letter ? We have found this stick and that one. -We have not seen your pen. • I have written this letter for my father. 25. Norn, kin, feine, fetn, [ , . ., il)r, i^re, i^r, [ , Acms. fetnen, feine, fetn, j ^^'^' '^^- i^ren, t^re, if)r, j ^®^- ;fen, read (past participle); gefannt, known; ber £)n!e(, the uncle; bie 2^ante, the aunt; ber gtnger!)ut, the thimble; bie @d)eere, the scissors; grau, . wife, woman. 3Kein grennb ift traurig; fein 33ater unb feine SJiutter finb frant. 3Keine 3:ante ift gufrieben; i^r @o^n unb t^re Xodjttx finb fel)r fleiBtg. ^einricf) ^at feinen tod, feine U^r unb fein SJieffer t)er== ioren. guife ^at i^ren i^tnger^nt, i^re geber unb i^r ©uc^ t)er(oren. gner Dntel ^at fein §au^ unb feinen ©arten Derfauft. 'Dtefe gran {)at i^ren SDJann unb i^r Sinb t)erIoren. S)iefe Stoc^ter Ijat einen ©rief fiir if)re 3)Zntter gef{f)rteben. Sari ^at feinen SSater nicftt ge=^ !annt. S)ie Zantt Ijat beinen unb ntetnen ©rief gelefen. 26. ^ The father has lost his son. The mother has lost her daughter. My uncle has sold his watch. v'Our aunt has sold her scissors. Henry has found his pencil. Louisa has found her thimble. '^ I have seen this man and his son, this woman and her daughter. My mother has lost her pen and her knife. — lY — ""^ My brother has taken his hat. I have seen your aunt; has she still her horse ? This man is very sad; he has lost his wife. Charles has written a letter for his father, ^.x; My aunt has bought this book for her son. 2t. Nominative, tie SD^Utter, the mother; biefe 3}iutter, this mother; Genitive. ber SJiutter, of the mother; biefer Mviiitx, of this mother. S)ie '^(i^'ii, the maid-servant; bie ^ontgtn, the queen; bte 9^a(f)bartn, the (female) neighbor. Past Participles : atigefommen, arrived; abgeretft, departed. 3)ie ajjutter ber ^ontgin ift angefommen. 3)er SSater ber Slac^* barin ift abgereift. Q6) ^abe ben ®arten ber 3:ante gefet)en. $aben ©ie ben Sleiftift ber ©(^wefter gefunben ? ®iefe grau ift bie ©c^rne* fter ber 5yfa(f)barin. T)tefer Sftann ift ber ©ruber ber SKagb. !ba^ ^inb biefer grau ift tmmer !ranf . 28. The hat of the mother is beautiful. The sister of the queen is not beautiful. Is the father of the servant arrived ? Are you the brother of the (female) neighbor ? I am the sister of this woman. Hast thou taken the chair of the sister ? Have you seen the horse of the aunt ? We have known the father of this servant. The pencil of this woman is too small. '29. Masc. Norn, ber Skater, the father; biefer SSater, this father; Gm. be« 35aterg, of the father; hk'it^ iBater^, of this father; Neuter. Nom. ba^ ^tnb, the child; biefer ^tnb, this child; Gen, beg ^inbeg, of the child; btejeg ^inbe§, of this child. 2)er @cf)u^mac^er, the shoemaker; ber @c!^netber, the tailor; ber ©artner, the gardener; ber ^aufmaun, the merchant; ber^lrjt, the physician; baS 3il^^^^/ the room; bag '^oii, the people; ber §errf(^er, the ruler. Obs. — All masculine and neuter nouns ending in er, et, en take 8 in the genitive singular. All other neuter and most of the other masculine nouns, not ending in e, take e§ or g in the genitive. Feminine nouns are indeclinable in the singular. S)ie 5Kagb be§ ©(^neiber^ ift franf. !Der(So^n be^ 9lacf)bar^ ift noc^ fe^r jimg. £)ie S3Iume be§ ©artner^ ift fef)r fd)on. ©er ®ar* — 18 -- ten beS ^dntge ift fct)r grog. !Der S5nig ift bcr ^errfdjer be§ SSolfee. ®ie grau be^ Slrjte^ ift tmmer jufrieben. ^i) Ijabt ben ®arten be^ Dnfel^ gefet)en. 2Bir ^aben ba^ "ipferb be^ Saufmann^ gefauft. §aft bu ben Sletftift be^ Sruber^ genommen ? 2Bo ift bie 2)?agb beg ©dfjul^mac^er^? S)ie J^ure be^ 3^^^^^^ ^f^ immer offen, Die Zoijkv biefeg aKanne^ ift abgereift. SBir ^beit bie 2)iutter biefe^ ^inbeg gefannt. ©er ®arten biefe^ §aufeg ift Hein. 30. ' This man is the brother of the gardener. This woman is the sister of the shoemaker. This child is the son of the tailor. The door of the house is not open, -sd have seen the son and daughter of the physician. We have seen the horse of the merchant. >^The servant of the neighbor is the sister of this gardener. Why is the door of this room open ? ^ We have known the son of this merchant. The dog of the neighbor is faithful. ^ The mother of this child is arrived. 31. Mm, ein S5ater, etne SJlutter, ein ^inb; Gen. eineg 35aterg, enter 3}iutter, etneg ^inbcs. S)er ^egetifci)trm, the umbrella; baS gebermeffer, the penknife; geftenx, yester- day. Obs.— The pronouns tnein, bcttt, fetn, i^r, unfer, euer, are declined like ein, eine, ein; jener (that) is declined like biefer. ®tnb ®ie ber ©o^n eine^ Sltjteg? Qi) bin ber ®o^n eineg ^aufmanng. §aben @ie bag §aug nteineg 9ia(f)barg gelanft? !l)er 53ruber beineg §reunbeg ift geftern ange!ommen. ©o ift ber 9tegem f(i)irm beineg Onfete ? f)aft bn bag 3^^^^^ meiner (£rf)iDefter ge^ fel^en? ffiir l^aben ben ^rief beiner SIMter gelefen. SKein Dnfel ^t ba^ §aug 3^reg 23aterg gefauft. Qi) l^abe ber ©tod Qljxt^ ^ruberg t)erioren. 3)er ®arten unferg ?larf)barg ift fcl^r gro^. Unfere SOJagb ift bie Softer eureg ©cirtnerg. SBo ift ber 9tegen* f^imt unfercr DJJutter ? ^arl {)at ben ginger^ut feiner ©(^mefter ge* nomnten. ?uife ^t bag ^^^benneffer t^rer 2^ante genommen. !Die 3Jiutter ieneg Sinbeg ift franl. 2)er @o^n iener grau f)at mein SUieffer gefunben. »i/ t-'Wwlx^V-JtA.^ — 19 — 32. I have found the hat of the child. Are you the servant of my uncle ? I am the servant of your tailor. The penknife of thy brother is very good. The pen of thy sister is not good. The house of our aunt is large. Henry has lost the letter of his father. Louisa has found the pen of her brother.— Is the garden of our uncle as fine as this one? (See No. 15.) We have found the hat of your neighbor's son (the hat of the son of your neighbor). Lewis has read the letter of his Mend, Louisa has bought a flower for a child of her sister. 33. N(m. ber 33ruber, the brother; Dat. bent 33ruber, to the brother; Nbrn, bo8 ^uc^, the book; bie ©c^tDCfter, the sister; Dat. bem ^ud)e, to the book; ber ©(^ttJefter, to the sister. SYNOPSIS. Nbm, ber, bte, \)a9, btefer, btcfc, bte|e6; Gen. be§, ber, be§, btejeS, biefer, btefeS; Dcft. bem, ber, bem, btefem, btefer, btefem; Ace. ben, bie, t>a^, biejen, biefe, biefeS. ®el^brt, belongs. Past Participles: gelte^Ctt, lent; gegeben, given; gefd^ttft, sent; t)erfprod^en, promised; gegeigt, shown. S)le greunbtn, the (female) friend. Obs. 1. — The dative singular of nouns ending in er, el, en takes no end- ing. The dative singular of nouns that take eS or § in the genitive has the ending e, but this ending may be always dropped. 2. The dative generally precedes the accusative. 3. The English emphatic form of the verb, formed by the auxiliary to do must always be rendered by the common form in German, without any auxiliary: Does he belong (belongs he), ge^ort er? He does not belong (he be- longs not), er gel^ort nici^t. ©tefe^ ^am ge^art bem Dn!et mcine^ 9lad^bar^. Qcmv ®arten ge^ort ber 2:ante tnelne^ i^teunbe^. S^ ^cibe bem 3Sater einen ©rief , . gefi^rieben. @ie ^at ber greunbtn i^rer ©d^mefter eine ©lume gegc^ * V ben. Sari ()at ber (gf^efter fein gebermeffer getief)en. §aft bu bem arjte meiu ^n^ gefc^tdt? Qd) ^abe btefem Stube einen 3Soget tierfpro^en, §einric^ ^at biefer gran nnfern 9f?egen[(^irm gelte^en. ■— 20 — guifc ijat btefem SJJanne unfern ®arten gejcigt. 3d) ^be metne geber bem greimbe meine^ ^ruber^ gegeben. ^k\t^ SSvi6) ge^ort meinem 33ater nic^t. 84. This hat belongs to the gardener. This house belongs to the mother of my friend. I have written to my uncle and aunt. My sister has lent her thimble to the friend (fem. ) of your brother, f My uncle has sent a watch to the son of your neighbor (fem.). Have you given a ohair to this child? Have you lent an umbrella to this woman? t^Does this garden belong to the king ? No, it belongs to the sister of the king.-/ We have sold our horse to the friend of our uncle. yI)oes this knife belong to this or that servant ? 35. iVom. etn 33ud), a book; eine J^ber, a pen; Bat einem iSud^c, to a book; einer geber, to a pen. 3)crS5etter, ber (£ouftn, the cousin, bie iBafe, bie (Soufme, the (female) cousia; ^malie, Anielia; bie (Sdrtnertn, the (female) gardener or the gardener's wife. a^bttofr/f^tE'^' ( ein Suc^ mnne« Skater.; : book ^f ^y^ re^' [ ein ««* nteiner 3«utter. SYNOPSIS. iVom. etn, eine, etn, ntetn, metne, ntetn, nnfer, nnjt're, nnfer; Ge7h etneg, etner, etne^, meine§, tnetner, metne§, unfere^, unferer, unfereg; Bat. einem, etiter, einem, meinem, meiner, meinem, nnferem, unjerer, mtferem; Ace. einen, eine, ein, meinen, meine, mein, nnferen, nnjere, nnfev.* ©iefer ®arten ge^ort einem ©^u^macEier. S)iefe^ 3)?effer -ge^ort einer DJiagb. 8uife I)at meinem 23ater einen ^rief gefc^rteben. ^einrid^ I)at meiner ajfutter eine -93Inme gegeben. -3d) l^abe 3^^^^^ Dnfel mein ^ferb gette^en. @ie Ijahm unferer Xante Qi)X §an^ t)erfanft. ^ar( ijat feinem grennbe- etn Sud) geft^tcft. 3lmalie ^at i^rer grennbin einen ginger^nt gelte^en, ®iefer 2)?ann Ijat enrer ^Jfac^barin einen 93oge[ gefd}t(ft. f)aft bn meinem 3Sater btefe Uf)r gegeben? §abt i^r nnferer Safe einen Sleiftift gette^en? Sine 5Uiagb meiner 9D?ntter ijat tf)ren gingerl)nt t)erIoren. * The e of the ending is generally dropped in unfer0, unferm, unfern. =- 21 — -. I have lent my pen to a friend of my brother's. Hast thou given thy cat to a friend (fern.) of my sister's ?.Wd have given the letter to a servant of the physician's. Have you sent this flower to our gardener ? This garden belongs to my cousin (masc. and fem.).vThis umbrella does not belong to your brother. Does this pen belong to thy brother or to thy sister? Has Henry written to his father or to his mother ?-^Has Louisa written to her uncle or aunt? Have you seen the gardener's wife? Afl have not seen her, but I have seen her brother. 37. 3(^ fptei^e, I speak, or I am speaking, or I do speak; tt)tr fpre(i)en> we speak, (yr we are speaking, t6 tDerbe t)on meinem @o^ne getiebt, I am loved by my son. ^6) ^abe ba6 ®u(^ be§ 3lrjte§ gefe^en. §aben ©te btefe^ S3ucl^ Don bent 2lr5te er^atten? 3Btr ^aben ben ©arten nnfer^ 9?a(^bar^ gefanft. |)aben ©ie btefen ®arten t)on 3=^rem 9?ad^bar gefanft? 3=tf) fjabe btefe U^r t)on ntetnent DnM er^alten. §etnrt(^ l^at einen Srief t)on feinent 3Sater nnb fetner 9Jintter erl)alten. ^^ f^rec^e t)on bem Sontge nnb ber ^ontgin. 3Btr fjjtec^en t)on 3*^rein ^rnber nnb ^\)Xix @(^tt)e[ter, t)on biefent aJJanne nnb btefer gran. @)Dred^en (gte t)on ntetnem SSetter ober ntetner -^afe? $etnrt(^ n)trb t)on feinem SSater nnb feiner 3Jintter geltebt. K I have received this horse from my friend. I have bought this cat of thy sister. Louisa has received an umbrella from — 22 — y her uncle and a watch from her aunt. I speak of this dog and of this cat, of this bird and of this flower. We are speaking of your cousin (masc. and fern.). *^ Amelia is loved by her uncle and aunt.T^Our (fern.) gardener has received a letter from her son and daughter. r Henry is the son of this shoemaker and Louisa is the daughter of this tailor. @d^oii, beautiful; fd^oncr, more beautiful; ber fc^onfle, the most beautiful; gut, good; beffer, better; ber beftc, the best; l^od^, high; ^o^er, higher; ber l^o^jte, the highest. 2)a8 2^]^ier, the aniifial; ber Lottie, the lion; ber 2^tger, the tiger; baSSJietaH, the metal; baS @tlber, the silver; bag ®olb, the gold. Obs. — The superlative is formed by adding jle or efte, and softening the radical vowel, that is changing a into o, o into 5 and u into ii. T)k tafec tft ntd^t fo ftarf at^ ber §unb. !iDer 8oh)e tft ftarfer ate ber Jtger. ®er gome ift ba« ftiirffte Zijkx. SWetn 3la6)bav tft rei(^er ate @ie; er tft ber ret(^fte ajjann ber ©tabt. !Da^ ®oIb tft f(f)tt)erer ate ba^ ©tiber. !Da§ (Stfett tft ttii^Itd^er ate ba§ ©ttber. ®a^ gtfett tft ba§ nitfelt^fte aWetatl. gutfe tft fi^oner ate gimalte; abet §etnrtd^ tft ha^ fdE)onfte Stub, gubtntg tft jitnger ate bu; er ift ber iitngfte @o{)n unfer^ 9iad)bar^. ^art ift alter ate id); er ift ber attefte @o^n ttteine^ Dn!ete. !Der §)unb tft fe^r treu. S5er §itnb tft ba^ treufte ST^ter. ®tefe§ SSni) tft beffer ate Jene^. !Du btft ber befte greuitb ittehte^ Srubere. ®a^ §au^ btefe^ ^aufmatttte^ tft bag ^d(^fte ber ©tabt. @ie tft bie bofefte grau ber ©tabt. 40. Louisa is very beautiful; she is more beautiful than her sister, but the most beautiful child is Amelia. This tailor is the happiest man in (of the) town, i* Henry is more diligent than Lewis, but Charles is the most diligent son of your friend. He is the oldest, but also the most wicked man in town, j You are not so poor as my cousin, but the poorest man is my father. My chair is too high; this one is higher; but the highest chair belongs to my mother. |vYour pen is very good; my pen is better; but the best pen is that (bie) of my father J — 23 — 41. INTERROGATIVE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. Nam. XOtX, who? Dat XOtm, to whom ? Don VOtVa, of whom, from whom ? Ace. totn, whom ? fiir Wen, for whom ? Nrnn. and Ace. toag, what ? S$,it; ettt)ag, something, anything; ntd^t^, nothing, not— anything; 3emanb, somebody, anybody; S^iemanb, nobody, not— anybody; ta, there. Obs. — The personal pronoun of the third person has three genders: er, he; fie, she; e^, it. If the English i^ refers to ^Am^/s, masculine in German, it is not translated by eS, but by er; if it refers to things of feminine gender, it is translated by fie; if to neuters by e6: the chair — it is high, ber @tuf)I — er ift^od); the flower — it is beautiful, tie ^Inme— fie ift fd)on; the book — it is useful, ba^ 33uc^— e ^ ift niiytc^. SBcr ift ba? d^ ift ber ©c^neiber; e^ ift ^einric^. SBer ift {ener Wlann? (S^ ift ber ©(^u^mai^er; e^ ift ber ©o^n be^ 2lrjte«. aSer {)at biefen ^rief gefd)rieben? SBem ge^ort biefer^unb? (Sr ge^ort uuferm ^Jad^bar. SBem ge^ort biefe U^r? @ie ge^ort tneiner @d}tDefter. 9Bem l)aben @ie ben §ut gegeben ? 3Son iDem ^aben @ie biefe Slume ertjalten ? SSBen {)aben @ie gefet)en? 2Ba§ ^aben ©ie t)erIoren? ^(^ I]abe nicf)t^ Derloren. §aben @ie tttoa^ gefun^ ben ? So ift Q^v .93ruber ? (Sr ift mi)t ^ier. -3ft 3=emanb ba? 5)iiemanb ift ba. §at .^emanb meiue geber genommen? ^iemanb f)at fie genommen. 42. Who is there? It is my tailor; it is Charles. Who is that woman? She is the wife of the shoemaker; she is the servant of the neighbor. To whom have you lent your knife ? To the son of the gardener. J^To whom has your brother sold his dog? To the sister of my friend. From whom hast thou received this bird? From the father of this woman. y What have you bought? I have not bought anything (bought nothing). Of whom do you speak ? I am' speaking of your cousin. -^Has anybody read my letter? Nobody has read your letter. Have you seen anything ? I have seen your watch. It is here. For — 24 — whom have you sent this chair ? It belongs to your father. To whom does that pen belong ? It belongs to my gardener (fem.).<^ Whom have you sent? -I have sQnt my maid-servant. Where is my pen? ^-It is not here; it is there. 43. INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. Nam. Xozl&jZX, XOti&it, rt)e(c^e§, which or what; Dai. tt)eld)'em, Xot\( Where is the man ^ *r*"wh(}ni I have seen at the house of thy father ? The man with whom (at whose house) we have dined, is departed. Hast thou found the man for whom I have bought this watch ? Have you found the man to whom you have lent your watch ? A Have you seen the umbrella which my mother has bought ? Hast thou found the pear which thy brother has lost ? We have seen the horse which your uncle has sold. Where is the thimble which you have found? I have taken the pencil which my cousin has bought^ Henry has eaten the apple which his broth'er has received. Have you seen the woman of whom we speak?' •'Have you read the letter which I have written? Have you found the boy to whom this penknife belongs ? Where is the pen with which you have written this letter? 4. The man with whom you have (finb) arrived, is departed./ Your brother is the most diligent man that I have ever seen.y The highest house^that i s in this ci tj^ belongs to m y father. ' * ~~II 4t. Masc, Fern. Neuter (!) Neuter (2) CORRELATIVES. berjenige, ber (njeld^er) ber, tt)e(d)er (ber) btejentge, bie (toeld^e) bie, tt)et(^e (bie) bagjentge, ba§ (metci^eS) bag, tvhije^ (ba^) bagjeuige, tt)a§ ha^, tt)a8 he who she who that which - the one that that which (what). — 21 — !S)erj[enige, ben, the one whom (which); bcrjettige (bet), mit bcm, the one with whom; ber (bie, \ia^) meiltcS S3ruber8, that (the one) of my brother. Obs. — (1) The English that which, if it may be replaced by the one that, must be rendered by the masculine berjemge, bet etc*, if it refers to things masculine in German. Referring to things feminine, it must be translated by the feminine btejentge, bte etc.: that (the letter) which we have written, berje* nige (ber53rief), ben tDir gefd^rteben Ijaben,— (2) The second form of the neuter (ba^ienige, tx)a§; 'tid^, lt)ag; or xoa^ alone) is used, if the English that which may be replaced by what, and not by the one tJuU, so that it refers to things "in general": That which (what) you have said, is true, baS, lt)a§ (baSjientge, toad or toag alone) @ie gefagt ^aben, ift X0Qi\)x. ©erjenige (ber), tDet^er (ber) jufrieben ift, ift retd^* !J)tefer gin- ger^ut ift beffer at^ ber nteiner ®(|tt)efter* ®iefe U^r ift fleiner ate bte beine^ :93ruber§, £)iefe^ §au^ ift f(f)oner ate ba^ unfer^ ^ai)^ bar§* ^6) ^abe nteinen f)ut dertoren unb ben tneine^ SSetter^* SBir l^aben beine i^eber gefunben unb bie beine^ grennbe^. ^einrid) ^at mein 3^^^^^ gefefjen unb ba^ nteinen Dnfete* |)aft bu nteinen ©tod genomnten ober ben nteinen 4Brnber^ ? S)a^ ift nid^t beine S3(ume, ba^ ift bie nteiner 3Jtntter* §aben @ie mein 3D?effer ober ba§ be^ ©drtner^ ? ©^rec^en @ie t)on nteinent ©o^ne ober Don bent be§3lrjte^? ®a^ "ipferb, melc^e^ toir gefauft ^aben, ift Jitnger, ate ba§ ^|re^ SSater^. SKeine 3Kutter ift nict)t biejenige, bie biefen §nt gefauft f)at. ©iefer S3rief ift nic^t ber, ben xi) gefc^rieben ^abe* ©iefe U^r ift bie, tt)eltf)e i^ gefunben l^abe* S03a^ itfl gelefen l^abe, ift fe^r tranrig. !j)er, mit bem irf) gefprod^en ^abe, ift meiit greunb. '©a^, tr)a6 't^u meinem 3Sater oerfproi^en {)aft, ift nod^ nid^t ange^ !ommen* ®iefe^ ^ferb ift t^eurer, al^ ba^ienige, xodijt^ n)ir ge= lauft {)aben, ©iefer ©ta^t ift ni^t garter, ate ber, ben bein SSater gef(i)idt {)at. ©iefe U^r ift ni^t beffer ate bie, tt)eld^e ic^ beiner ©d^tDefter geliel^en ^be* 48, ^ He who is rich, is not always contented. Are you (a looman) the one that has taken this umbrella ? She who has written this letter, is not in this town. \ My brother is not the one to whom this watch belongs. That horse is not that which we have bought. >*his pencil is not that which I have found. This table is the one which your joiner has made. This flower ^ — 2S — is that which your sister has sent/\ This steel is harder than that which your father has sent. That which you have written, is sad. * What your father has sent is here. That which we have read of your brother is very sad. The room of my neighbor is larger and higher than that of my friend. This umbrella is finer than that which we have bought. Have you taken my pen or that of my sister ? This is not your pencil; it is that of my brother.*^ I speak of my book and of that of your friend. Louisa has lost her thimble and that of her mother. Thou hast eaten my apple and that of my cousin, u My watch is better than that of my cousin (fem.). I have received your letter and that of your brother. He whom you have sent, has shown this letter to my father. KMj son is not the one for whom you have made that coat^^ This man is the one of whom we have spoken.j^This steel is harder than that of thy friend. \ 49. Mm. §einrt(^, Henry; ?uife, Louisa; 2)eutfd^Iattb, Germany; Gen. Qexnxm \ Henry '^^ ^"^'^^^ | 1.0^^' ^^«tf*^^«^«' ^^ Germany; JDat, §emn(^, to Henry; ![?uifen, to Louisa; ©eutfd^tanb, to Germany; Ace ^Z\nxx(i)f Henry; 2m\t or ^uifeu^Louisa; 2)eutf(i^lanb, Germany. SBUl^elin, WiUiam; ^pauim^ Spain; 3ol^ann, John; 3tatten, Italy; (Smilie, Emily; ^reu^en, Prussia; Sol^anne, Jane; Sfluglanb, Russia; grantretd^, France; SSteit, Vienna; gel^t, goes; lt)ol)nt, lives; 5Ste ^etgt betlt ^Better ? what is your cousin's name ? what is your cousin called ? S)er §Ut §etnrtd)g or §etnrid^8 §Ut, the hat of Henry, Henry's hat. ^bltt, Cologne; ^riiffel, Brussels; !Bt)on, Lyons; §au^tftabt, capital; ^atfer, emperor; \)t\^t, is called. Obs. — (1) Proper names of all descriptions take §, never e6, in thegeni- U tive; those of females in e take n§. — The dative of proper names never takes U e, but is generally like the nominative; those of females in e take ii. ij (2) Proper names may be declined with the definite article, especially I in the dative without a preceding preposition (bent §etnrt(^, to Henry). If so i declined they do not take any ending (be§ §etnrt(^, ber ?mfe). (3) Instead of the genitive of proper names denoting places, the prepo- sition t)on with the dative is more frequent: ber ^onig uon ^veugen, the king of Prussia (rarely: ber ^ontg $reu§enS). — 29 — (4) The English preposition to ox for before names of places if depending on verbs of motion, is translated by na(^ with the dative. At before names of places is translated by in with the dative. — Names of countries and cities are of neuter gender. 3)Jetn Sruber ^eipt ^einrti^ unb meine ©(^mefter ^ei^t 8uife, ©er abater 3Sin}e(m^ ift angefommcu. 3^ie SJiutter gutfen^ i[t abge^ reift l^ubmig^ Cnfcl ift fet)r reid), (Sutilien^ §ut ift fef)r \i)m. §aben Sie biefeu §unb Don ^einrii^ ober Don gerbinanb er^Iten ? 9lmalte ^at bent .^o^ann i^re geber geltef)en. -^art ^at ber (Smilie cine ©tnme gegeben. . ®et)ort biefer ®arten bent SnbiDig ober ber Caroline ? SBo ift 3BiIf)eIm? gr ift tnit tarl nnb 3fofe^3^ an^ge^ gangen. SSSo^nt S^r Dnfel in «rnffel ober in ^ari^? ®e^t 3^r SSetter nacf) SBien ober nacf) 53erlin? -3ft 'ipari^ grower ate St)on? 3ft 3^^^ grennb Don So(n ober Don :93erlin ? SBie ^ei^t bein SftadE)^ bar? (Sr l^ei^t ®ant|)fon. SBie ^et^t bie §anptftabt Don grant reid)? 3Ber ift ^onig Don ^ren^en? 2Bie |ei^t bie fionigin Don gngtanb? Berlin ift bie gro^te ©tabt (city) Don ©entfc^tanb, ^eter^bnrg ift bie §anptftabt be^ taifer^ Don ^Rn^lanb. !Der tonig Don @panien ift ein @oI)n SSictor Smannete* §aft bn Smilien meine U^r gelie^en ? . ^i) ^abe eine ©Inme Don 3lmalien erf)alten* 50. "^ My cousin's name is John. The daughter of our gardener (fern.) is called Jane. Art thou^ Charles's or Ferdinand's brother ? Where are Henry and Lewis ? They are in John's room; they are gone out with William. (^Have you lent your pen to Henry? Who has given this flower to Louisa? We have received a letter of Lewis; he is at Cologne. The sister of Charles is very small. ^Caroline's hat is too large. My uncle hves in Vienna, and my cousin John in Paris. My friend Reiley goes to Berlin; his brother William is arrived from Holmdel. Have you seen John and Jane ?'^''*-" My garden is larger than that of Emily. Louisa has (ift) gone out with Jane. A-Henry has (ift) departed for Brussels with his friend Joseph. What is your son's name ? VWhat is the capital of Italy called? -^rWho is the king of Spain ?Jk Victor Emanuel is the father of the king of Spain. PART n. 51. Plural. Norn, btc %x\&\t, the tables; Gen. ber %\\i)t, of the tables; Dat. ben S^ift^en, to the tables; Ace. bte %\\^t, the tables. Nom. 2)ie @tabt SBertin (not »on ^Berlin or ^Berling), the city of Berlin; Gen, ber @tabt ^Berlin, of the city of Berlin etc. Obs. — Most of the nouns that form their genitive in eS, and many fem- inine nouns of one syllable, take the ending e for the plural. The radical vowels a, Q, U and au of such nouns are changed in the plural into a, o, it, du. The dative plural of all words ends in tt» ®te greunbe tneine^ 3Sater§ finb angelommen* !Die ®o^ne un[er^ 9^acf)bar§ finb fe^r pei^ig* ®te ©tiil^Ie, xodi^t xoxx gefauft ^aben, finb fe^r fd)on, §aben ®ie bie ©tcibte SBien nnb Berlin gefe^en? Sari ^at bie §iite SBil^elm^ nnb gerbinanb^ gefnnben, 2rtein 33ater l^at bie 53riefe -3I)re^ £)n!ete ni(^t er^alten^ J)ie ^ferbe finb nii|^ tidier ate bie §nnbe, ®ic $Kdgbe enre^ 5Rarf)bar§ finb fe^r flei^ig. S)ie aierjte in biefer®tabt finb fe^r rei(^. SBem ^aben @ie bie ©tode meine^ Srnber^ gegeb.en? ©ie |)an^3tftabte ber Sonige t)on ©a^fen (Saxony) nnb ©aient (Bavaria) finb feljr fd^on. ^Diefer ©arten gefjort ben ©o^nen meine^ 5yjacf)bar^. 52. Thy brother has bought the dogs of my neighbor. The friends of Charles are ill. Have you seen the horses of our uncle William ? The cities of Cologne and Strasbourg (®tra^^ bnrg) belong to the king of Prussia. )^ Where are the hats of my sister Emily ? I have given your umbrella to the maid- servants. ^ Tour brother is gone out with the sons of our neighbor (fem.).>* I speak of Henry's and William's friends. ^ To whom have you sold the trees of my brother? 31 — 53. S)er3o^»; the tooth; ber 9fttng, the ring; ber gu6, the foot; .btc @an6, the goose; bie §anb, the hand; -^ber ^^urm, the tower, steeple; ber @d^ul^, the shoe; tDarm, warm; fait, cold; ber @trUttH)f, the stocking; tt)t\% white. Past Participles : gebrad^t, brought; getool^nt, resided; erobert, conquered. Plural (of all genders). N(m. biefe, these; jene, those; totidjt, which (what) or who; Gen. btefer, of these; jeiier, of those; tnelc^er, of which (what), of whom; Dot. btefen, to these; ' Jenett, to those; ireld^en, to which (what), to whom; Ace. biefe, these; jeite, those; tceld^e, which (what), whom. Obs. 1.— The plurals of the possessives are mctne, fetne, tl^rc (her), uitfere, eure, i^rc (their), 3^re (your), being for all genders alike. They all are de- clined like the plural biefe* All pronominal adjectives are placed in the plural, if their governing nouns are of this number: her shoes, tl^rc @c!^ul)e; our friends, imfere greutlbe; their tables, il^re S^ifd^e; your tables, ^l^rc Xi\(i)t (eure Sifd^e), 2, The relative Itjeld^er is placed in the plural (tt)etd^c, etc.) if the an- tecedent (No. 45, Obs. 1) is in that number: ble Xx\djt, toti^t @ie ge!auft l^aben, the tables which (that) you have bought. S)eine 3^^^^ f^^^ f^^^ ^^^% 3Jieine f^it^c finb fe^r fatt. 3^re ^anbe finb tDarm. §at ber ©c^u^mai^er metne @(^u^e gebrad^t? SBer ^t meine ©triimpfe genommen ? 3Bo l^aben @te biefe ®dnfc gefauft? §)aben @ie meine ^dume f(^on gefel}en? 3Son todd)tn Sdumen fprec^en @ie (do you speak) ? 3Son ben S3dnnten, tnet(^e i^ t)on bent ©drtner ber Sonigin ge!anft l^abe. Unfere grennbe finb fc^on abgereift SBer ^t biefe Sriefe gef^rieben? SKein SSater ijat feine ^ferbe nnb §nnbe t)erfauft. 9D?ein 5yja(f)bar l^at Sriefe uon feinen @bl)nen er^alten, tne^e in -Berlin finb. §at .^entanb nteine * 9f{inge gefnnben ? 9^iemanb l^at beine Otinge gefef en. Sarf toivb t)on feinen grennben geliebt. * Charles and Henry have lost their canes. The shoemaker has not made your shoes. Where have you bought these tables and chairs ? yt'rom whom have you received these pen- cils ? My feet are very small. My sister has lost her thimbles. I have received these letters from my friends, l These steeples < 1 — 32 — are higher than those. These animals are very fine. These servants are very lazy. AHave you already seen our hats and our rings ? Your hands are very white. I have found these rings in my uncle's garden. What steeples of Paris have you seen from those mountains ?)C Of what cities do you speak? I am speaking of the cities wnich the king of Prussia has con- quered in France. My sons to whom you have sold your horses, are departed for Berlin.ylThe cities in which we have resided, are Berlin, Vienna, and Cologne. 55. • Sing. Norn, oHer, atte, alleg, aH. Plur, " atte; Gen. atter; Dat ollen; Ace. aUe. \ \cLtAjdtiu.Jic S)a§ ^tnb, the chUd; ^ \i(i% S)orf, the vniage; ! '^ ba« 33ild), the book; ^ ba3 iBlatt, the leaf; bag §au§, the house; - 'tid^ !t!o(^, the hole; ba§ 5BolE, the people; .^ ba6 §u^n, the chicken; ' bag ®(ag, the glass; ^ bag i8ttb, the picture; ^ ' bag ^anb, the ribbon; , bag ^alb, the calf; '- bag ?anb, the country; ber SSurm, the worm; ^- bag ^leib, the dress; ber SSalb, the forest; - bag @d^Io6,* the castle; *- ber Mdxm, the man, the husband. Obs. — All these nouns ar« exceptions from the general rule, and form their plurals by adding tx, softening the radical vowel. Substantives ending in t^um follow the same rule, as: ^rrtl^um, ^rrt^iitner (mistake). The dative plur. adds lu S)ieie §aufer finb f^o^er a(§ {ene. Qzwt ^anber finb fd^oner al§ btefe. ©etne Silver finb nit^tt(f)er ate bte ^iicf)er 8mfen^. !Die[e 3)Zutter ^at il}re ^inber t)erIoren. ®er ^onig I)at feine Si^foffer Derfauft. 23on mem ^aben ®ie btefe ®(afer er^Iten? 9Ber ^at btefe Sfeiber gemai^t? ©iefer WtOiXm ift fe^r alt; er ^at alle fetne 3^^^^ t)erIoren. ©iefe aSolfer finb mtf)t glittf lic^. §einric^ unb SBtIt)eIm ^aben alle t^re <93itrf)er t)erIoren. 3lIIe eure Sriefe finb angefommen. ®er 33ater ift tntt alien fetnen Sinbern abgereift, ©tefe S)drfer finb fe^r fd^on. 33on tcelc^en ©orfern fpred^en @te ? f)aben ©ie ben Stnbern be^ 5lad)bar§ etnen 9Soge( gegeben ? S23cr ^at atle biefe goiter in meinen 2:ifd) gema(i)t ? * Final % if an ending is added to it, changes into ff , whenever the vowel preceding it is short. I -~ 88 — 56. K Where are your children? My children are gone out. Who has bought all these ribbons ? Henrietta has lost all her books. We have seen all your houses. txnr SEinte unb ©leiftifte. ®eben@tc^ mir (Snppt unb ©emilfe. |)ter ift SBem unb SBafjer, unb ba ift ^affee unb Wifi). ^aben @te and) ^ucfer? SBir fjaben ajieffer unb ©abein, Slaffen unb ©Ictfer gefauft. ® er ©drtner ^at 8utfen ^irfdjen unb JBtumen gegeben. §aben @te fd^on Saffee getrunfen? 2Jian finbet in jenem §aufe (Spiegel, 9tegenf(J)irnte, -Sdnber, ginger^iite unb Dtabeln. Wfltim greunbin {)at tjon i^rem Dnfet ®rnen unb ^flaumen erf)alten. Sir l^aben gotoen, STiger, ^a^en unb §unbe gefe^en. ^n biefer @tabt finb ®rf)neiber unb ©c^u^mad^er, tueld^e fe^r reid^ finb. 3BoIten @ie (Snppt ober ®emUfe ? ®eben @te mir gefdlligft gteifcf) unb ©rot. 62. -j- Will jou [have] some wine or some beer, some milk or some water ? Give me, if you please, some soup, vegetables, meat, and bread. Where does one find (finds one) ink and pens ? Have you children ?^ Has 3^our father bought trees or flowers ? My brother has books and friends, .^^ere is cofiee and sugar. My neigbor has birds, dogs, and horses. jsWe are speaking of towns and villages, of houses and gardens. What have you done ?v. We have done our lessons; we have written letters. We have eaten apples and plums, and we have drunk some wine and beer.SlDo you want these spoons or those ? Have you sold any wine to my brothers ? XHave you bought any cherries of my brothers? 63. SBenig, little, few; ha^ Obfi, tie gru(^t, the fruit; t)tel, much; tjtele, many; bag @elb, the money; genug, enough; ber ^feffer, the pepper; nte^r, more; bag ^(lih the salt; tt>entger, less, fewer; ber ®enf, the mustard; tt)te? how? ber S^lenfd), man (pi. bie 9}Jenf(i|cn). Obs. — (1) There is and there are are often translated by eg gtbt (literally: it gives), instead of eg tft and eg jtnb, both for singular and plural nouns. Both expressions differ only slightly. Tiie noun, following eg gtbt, is placed in the accusative, and the pronoun eg in this connection can never be omit- j ted. — (2) SKenig, tX)eniger, Uiel may be left imdeclined in most instances; J — 37 — but mtljV is never declined.— (3) The English man is rendered either 'Sflanxi or SD^enfd). The word iD^atttt is confined to the adult male sex, while 3iRenfd) means a human being in general. |)einrid^ l^at Diet ®elb; er ^at me^r ®etb aUxdj. ®eben ©iemir ein iDenig gleifdj. Qd) t)abe genug ^rot. ©u ^aft ju Dtel ©alj unb ^feffer. SBir ^aben meniger Dbft al^ i^r. guife t)at mentger gebern a(^ §enriette* Sari l)at me^r 3lufgaben gema(i)t al^ gubiDig. §aft bit fo t)te{ ®etb ate mein ^ruber? g^ gtbt tt)enig SKenfc^en, mldjz jufrieben finb* ®eben @ie §enrietten ni(f)t 3U t)iel @enf! 3Kein ^ruber ^at ju Dtel SBein getruuten. ©iefer SJJann I)at Diele 53(umen. 2Ste t)ie(e $unbe \)at Qi^v SSater? g^ gibt biefe^ S^afjr tDeutg Strf(^en, aber t)tel ^flaumen. 3)2ein greunb ^at biefe SBod^e me^r ©riefe erl)a(ten ate \d). §at bein SSater fo Dtete Suiter ate mein Dnfet ? ®eben @ie mtr gefattigft ein menig 3:inte. SBoIIen ©ie no^ (any) mel^r? 3^cf) ^abe genug. '®ibt e^ nid)tt)iel ®emiife in biefent 8anbe ? 64. -i^ There is much fruit this year. Our gardener has many- trees and flowers. -/-Will you have a little meat or some' vegetables ? Have you mustard enough ?4^ 1 have salt and pepper enough. Our neighbor has much money; he is very rich. Give a littlef wine to thfs woman, -f This man has few friends, but he has many dogs and cats. There are many birds in this forest. 4- How many physicians are there in your town ? Have you as many apples and pears as we ? -HWe have not so many as youj but we have more plums and cherries than you. Charles has fewer friends than Henry vf-This tree has fewer leaves than that one. There are (finb) too many chairs in this room.^-Is (gibt) there more than one physician in this town ?.j. How few men are there that are contented ! 65. 3)a§ @tM, the piece; *bag S)u1^enb, the dozen; bte glafd^e, the bottle; ber ^orb, the basket; bte Xaffe, the cup; bte I^etnlt)anb, thehnen; t Little is translated by ftein, if it is opposed to great or large; but by tDeuig, if opposed to much. X — 38 — '^'Qa% $funb, the pound; \i(i^ S^afd^Ctttud^^the pocket-handkerchief; tie ©tte, the yard, ell; *ber §anbfd^u^, the glove; ^'tid^ ^aar, the pah-; baS Sotl^, the (half) ounce; Jl ber 3^^^ *li^ i^cl^J ber ^dfe, the cheese; 'iiCi^ §emb, the shirt; ber ©d^itlten, the ham. bie §algbtnbe, the cravat; Obs.— The words ^funb, Sotl^, $aar, ©ui^enb, %Vi% 3ott and some other masculine and neuter nouns, when used as units of measurement, weight and computation are not declined. The preposition of, following any noun denot- ing measure, etc. is not expressed in German. 2)ieine abutter I)at ber §enriette brei ^mx §anbf(J)u^e, \t6)^ ^aar @trum|)fe, gtoet ©u^enb ^emben unb einen iorb Sirfd^en ge- fd^idt Qn biefem goffer finb je^n @IIen Seimuanb, t)ter Safc^en^ titd^er unb fei^^ §atebinben, ^ein Sruber ^at jmet *i|3aar @cf)u^e unb ein ^^aar ©tiefel getauft. SBir ^aben bem greunbe unfer^ DuM^ 3it)an3tg ^fimb 3i^tfer unb jetju gtafc^en SBetn gef(f)i(ft. ®eben @ie ntir ein ©titd ^df e, etue gtafd^e 53ier unb ein trenig @enf. Q^ l)abe tm ®Ia§ 2Beiu getrunfen unb tin ®titcE ©djinten gegeffen. aSir ^aben bei unferer greunbin eine 2:affe taffee getrunfen. ®eben ®ie mir ein ®(a^ Saffer unb ein @tii(f 3^^^^- SK^ine ©dE)n)efter \)cA ixotx ^funb ^irfc^en unb zxw ^^funb "ipflaumen getauft. 2Bir ^aben ein ©u^enb ©tU^Ie bei bem 3:ifd()(er unfer^ Dn!ete gefauft. ^i) f)abe Don bem ®drtner einen ^orb :93Iumen er^dten. ©iefeg §au^ ift stDanjig gu^ ^o(^. 66. ^- The shoemaker has made a pair of shoes for Louisa and two pair of boots for William. We have drunk two glasses of wine and three glasses of beer. ^ Give me a bottle of water and aj little meat and bread. Will you have a piece of ham or cheese ? } -rMy aunt has bought a dozen of cravats^ two dozen of shirts, I and ten pair of gloves and stockings. How many shirts have! you? '^ 1 have three dozen.J^ This linen is very fine; how manyj yards have you bought ? I have bought twenty yards. Thal^ (ba6) is not enough for ten shirts. ---My uncle has given to Henry a penknife, twenty pens, two cravats, and a pair of 'gloves, r Ferdinand has bought a pound of plums, six ounced of coffee, and two yards of ribbon. \WilJ you have a cup ol — 39 — coffee or a glass of wine ? Give me, if you please, of water*- My brother is six feet three inchy^s high. WjO^XjJrt^^' ^ I 6Y. 3eber, {ebe, jebee, every, each; bie ^uget, the bullet; fd^ted^t, bad; bie greutibin, the (female) friend; pbfd}, pretty; ber l^e^rer, the teacher; ' tobt, dead; bcr SBeg, the way, the road; berii^mt, renowned; ber ©ncjlcinber, the Englishman; tt)etfe, wise; ba^ li^ebeu, the life; golben, golden, gold (adj,); *ba§ @(^i(ffal, the fate; filbern, silver (adj.); ha^ Tl'dbdjtn, the girl; fuq, short, brief; ha^ X% that is. Obs. 1. — Predicative adjectives take no endings of declension: ber Tlann ift gut. 2. Adjectives not predicative (that is connected with a noun expressed or understood) must take certain endings of declension either according to the WEAK or according to the strong scheme of declension. 3. The STRONG scheme of declension is the one by which the definite ar- ticle and the determinatives (biefer, jener, jeber, treld^er) are declined. It consists of the endings er, e, eg, em, en. 4. The WEAK scheme consists of the endings e and en only: e for the nominative sing, of all genders and the accusative sing, feminine and neuter; en for all the other cases. 5. The WEAK declension is used whenever any adjective is preceded by the definite article, or by a determina-tive (biefer, etc.). -r Nom. Sing, ber(btefcr) gute 9Jiann; ba§ (btefeg) gute ^inb; Gen. " beg (btefeg) guten 9Jlanne«, etc. \ Mm, Plur. bie guten Wlaxmtx, etc. I HP^h greunb Derloren. ^'n Jeber @tabt gibt e^ ettien Sltjt. [Set] gute §etnrtd) ift Irani [®ie] Keine (So|3^te ift fe^r pbfd). ®a^ arme fiinb ^at feine 2Jfutter t)ertoren. ®a^ ift ber ^oc^fte Saum in nnfenn (Sarten. gifette ift bie flei^igfte tjonf nnfern 9}?agben. ©ie^ fer retire Snglcinber n)o^nt bei^neinem Dntet. SJBo I)aben @ie biefe gotbene 9^abel gefnnben ? 2Bem ge^ort biefe^ gro^e §an^ nnb jener fd)one ©arten ? |)einrid) ift ntit [bent] fleinen ^arl an^gegangen. Wix ^aben geftern bei ber gnten ©milie ^irf(^en gegeffen. SBer tt3ol)nt in biefem fd)onen ©t^Ioffe? SBie \)tx^i biefe f(i)one ©Inme? t Of after superlatives may be expressed by the genitive or the preposi- tion uou. — 40 — So ^abcn ®ie biefen fd^tet^ten aBein unb biefeS fc^Ie(f)te Srot gefauft? . ®er l^otue unb ber S^iger finb bie ftdrfften SE^iere, ®a^ finb bie glit* •*r Iid)ften S^age meine^ \?eben^. ®eben ©ie biefem armen 3)ianne ein 'n)emg SSein! S)er 3Sater biefe^ !(einen aWdbd^en^ ift tobt. T)a^ ift ba^ @d)i(f fal jebe^ gro^en 93?anne^. ®ie fi^onen ©orfer jene^ 2anbe^ finb berii^mt. (Sr l)at meutem greuube bie befteu 3^^^^^' i^^ feinem ^aufe gegeben. ©ie ®ol)ne ber meifeften SSdter finb oft bumm (dull). 68. >^ Not every king is great and wise. Every year has twelve months^ and every week seven days. We have seen books and pictures in each room. ^ The diligent scholar is loved by every teacher. The new house of my brother is sold. I have read the long letter of your friend. \ He has spoken of the sad fate of this young man. The father of (the) little Henry is dead. The daughter of this old woman is sick. '^ Give this flower to my young friend (male and female). Which hat have you taken ?^ I have taken my white hat. Which watch and which ring have you sold ? We have sold the silver watch and the gold ringX The short roads are not always the best.* Are there any lions and tigers in the cold countries of the earth ? The dresses of these young girls are too long. >(rhe fates of the greatest men are often sad.'^ I have resided in the best houses of the city. 69. ^etn, feine, fein, no (adj.); !ein greunb, no friend; these are, bag (bieg jinb); the business, bag ©efc^aft. Obs. 1. — If adjectives are preceded by the nominative sing, or the neutei accusative sing, of ein, fein or of any possessive (tnein, beln, uufer, etc.), they are declined after the strong declension, and take the endings of Diefct, btefe, biefc^: mein guter 55ater, unfer guteg ^inb. 2. If adjectives are preceded by any other case of etn, !ein, mein, et€, they are declined after the weak declension: metneg gnten ^aterg, etc. Unfer ©artner ift ein gnter 9)iann. @nre ©iirtne'rin ift eine gnt gran, gmilie ift ein fel)r gnte^ Sinb. SBir I)aben einen gnten 9?at( unb eine gnte a)Mter. §einric^ t)at ein fc^one^ "iPferb unb etnej * Adjectives whosQ nouns are understood, must be translated as if ti nouns were expressed. — 41 — f(^anen §unb. gitife I)at gro^e S'd^m, aber ein^ ffetne |)anb unb einen tleinen gu^. gerbinanb ift mtt ntetnem iitngeren Sruber au^ge* gangen. ^enriette ift mtt meiner atteren @d)tDefter abgereift ®eben 8te bieje^ Srot einem armen ^inbe! S)tefe^ ^^ebernteffer ge^ort einem {ungeu Wlannt, ber bei unferm 9lact)bar tno^nt. Submig ift ber @o^n eine^ rei(i)en ^aufmann^. Sffiir l^aben feinen guten SBein unb tein gute^ Srot. SEer ijat meine filberne U^r unb meinen golbenen 9?ing genommen ? SBir l^aben unfern beften greunb t)er(oreu, Sure Heinen Siuber finb fe^r gut. S^ gibt biefe^ Qa^v feine guten 0r*= fcf)en. ayjein Dufel ^at feine fd^onften ^ferbe t)erfauft. Sift bu mit beinen neuen ©tiefeln jufrieben?- §aft bu fd^on don unfern guten ^flaumen gegeffen ? Qd) ^abe ein beffere^ *iPferb unb einen grd^eren §unb, ate @ie. Sart ift ein ^iibf^erer tnabe afe ^einrid^. '^Charles is a good boy. Emily is a pretty girl. That is a happy mother. That is a very good wine. Where is my little Henry, my good Louisa? We have a very rich uncle. William has an old father^^ Irbnis a useful metal H^ The dog is aVfaith- ful animal. I have received a new umbrella and a gold watch. My neighbor has done much business (plural in German) this year. -f-Oive this bottle of wine to a poor man or to a poor woman. I have no friend in this town.4rHave you ng good pens for this child ?'Y*Our best friends are dead. This joiner makes no goodv^aii:^.>^hese are the tables and books of our youngest children^A horse is a more useful animal than a dog. Thou hast written a longer letter than I. n. ^iBortreffUcf), excellent; *^ ber gteig, the diligence; X0% red; bie @tatue, the statue; xUeben^tDtirbig, amiable; \ha^ 35ergnugcn, the pleasure; ber 99Zarmor, the marble; \)a^ ^^apm, the paper; bie @efal)r, the danger; v gerettet (past part.), saved. Obs.— If the adjective is not preceded by an article or any other deter- minative word, it is inflected after the strong declension. §ier ift guter @cE)infen, gute ©uppe unb gute§ <93rob, ^aben ©ie gute^ 'ipapier unb. gute Jtnte? mix ^aben f(^tedf)ten 3Bein unb gute^ SBaffer getrunfen. Unfer ©artner ijat t)ortreff(icf)e^ Dbft — 42 — Unferc 9Kagb f)at guten ®enf, aber f(f)(e^ten ^feffer gefauft. ©biiarb l^at gute greunbe unb uu^tid^e 53ud)er. ajjein Onfel f)at fi^one ®dr^ ten unb gro^e §aufer. (guer 9ta(f)bar ijat treue §unbe. .^o^ann, gebcn ®ie mtr etn ®Ia^ 2Baffer ! SBoHen @te fatted ober marme^ aSaffer ? 2Keinc ©^mefter ^at ein ^aar pbf^e §anbfd)u^e gefauft. ^art^ unb gonbon [tub f^one @tabte. ^einrtd^ |at ein *ipaar neue ©c^u^e*er^alten, Siebe ©t^mefter ! Qii) ^abe beinen -Srief nttt gro^em ajergnugen gefefen. tart ^at feme Slufgabe mtt rotter SEtnte ge* fd^rieben. 12. -Jr Have you any good mustard ? We have good bread and good meat. Your gardener has very fine flowers. These children have fine dresses. vWe have faithful friends, amiable brothers, and useful books. Give me some better cheese and better bread. VAt (bet) this merchant's one finds pretty gloves, fine penknives, and good pens. Iron and silver are very use- ful metals. -iYou have always excellent wine. My brother is not gone out, he has too much business (plur.). Henry has bought good paper and good ink. > We speak of good cofibe, of excellent fruit, and new dresses. You have done your lesson with great diligence. TPoor friend, how little money have you made !• This statue is made of white marble. ^^He has saved the life of his friend with great danger. 6-\iu>-^^'^" Y3. S)er, bte, ha^ erfte, the first; . ber, tie, \>a^ te^tc, the last; ber, bte^ ba^ gtuette, the second; unartig, naughty; htv, bte, bo§ brttte, the third; ber S^^eit, the part; ber, bie, bog toierte, the fourth; ^ ber iBanb, the volume; bcr, bit, bag ^imanjtgfte, the twentieth;^ nur, only; bie Piaffe, the class. 2)er tineotetfte ? what day of the month ? what (in order) ? * ber erfte 3anuar, the first of January; ber SJionat 9Jlai, the month of May. Obs.— (1) The ordinals from 2 to 20 add te to the cardinals; from twenty upwards they add fte. They decline weak, if preceded by the definite article (2) Names of the months and the days of the week are masculine. * If an ordinal numeral is expected in the answer. 1 — 43 — ©er iunge 3Jiann ift fe^r flei^ig; er ift ber erfte in ber 0affe. f arl ift ber smeite; |)einricf) ift ber britte; G'o^ann ift ber oierte; [ber] Heine Sil^efm ift ber fiinfte; $an( ift ber fei^^te ; gran? (Francis) ift ber aii)te; (Suftat) ift ber neunte; [ber]nnartige Sbnarb ift ber elfte unb [berjfanle gnbtnig ber te^te. 3^^i *ft ^^^ fitnfte 2:^eil Don ge^n. gunf ift ber t)ierte ZijAl Don ^tDanjig, ©n S:ag ift ber fiebente 2:^eU einer SBoc^e.. !Den mieoielften ^aben mir (is it) ^eute? SBir ^aben ^ente ben breije^nten ober ben Diergefjnten. Q^t e^ nid)t ber jman^igfte? SJiein 3Sater ift ben britten 5Iftai abgereift, nnb ben jetin^ ttn T)e5ember angefommen. §aben @ie ben erften nnb jmeiten S3anb ? ^c^ ):}aU nnr ben erften. U. -f' Louisa is the first in the class; Pauline is the second; (the) little Josephine is the third; Emily is the fifth; (the) pretty Sophy (©opfiie) is the ninth; Jane is the fifteenth; (the) naughty Caro- line is the last. Three is the sixth part of eighteen. A week is the fqjarth part of a month; and a month is the twelfth part of a year .4- What day of the month is it (have we) ? It is to- day the eleventh or the twelfth.-*' We (are) departed on the second of May and. arrived on the sixteenth. Which volume have you taken ? Have you taken the third and the fourth ? ; I have only taken the third. fcc. bcinc, ) tc. beintge, Y V, e, e«, ) lb. S)er, {hit, ba6) meinc, ) ber etc. 1 ber^ (bte, ha^) meintge, >■ mine; ber etc. beintge, [- thine; meiner, nteine, meine^, ) beiner, ber feine, etc., his; ber tl}re, etc., hers; ber unfere, unfrige, etc», ours; ber eure, etc., (3l)re, 3^rige), yours; ber i^rc, etc., theirs. > @d)tDer; difficult (hard), heavy; letd^t, easy (not difficult), light (not heavy); ber (bag) $?o{)n (sing.), the wages (plur.). Obs.— (1) Mine, thine, etc., if used predicatively (after bin, btjl, i% ftnb) are rendered by ntetn, bein, etc., without article and ending: S)0§ §au8 ift metn, bie §aufer finb metn, the house is mine, the houses are mine.— (2) 2)er meine, meintge; ber beine, etc., are used, if a noun, previously men- tioned is understood: S)etn §aug ift groger, al8 ha^ meinc (mcinigc) or al8 meineS, These expressions are also used predicatively, but with peculiar — 44 — meanings (which may be orally indicated by the teacher). — (3) S)cr tlicinc, bcr meimge, etc. decline weak: Gen. be« mcinen (meintgen); Plur. biemetnen (meinigen), etc. 2Jieiner, beiner, etc., decline strong: Qen. meineS; DaU meinem; Plur, meine. X)iefe^Sucf) ift mem* S)tefe fj^bernfinb nidfitbetn. ©iefeU^rift unfer, S)ein 33ater ift grower al^ ber metnigc. 3Keine 3Jiutter ift fleiner al^ W beine. Unfer S3urf) ift niifelic^er al^ ba^ O^rige. 93?ein (So^n ift nid^t fo alt aB ber bcinige. (Suer ^ferb ift iiinger al6 ba^ unfere. Unfere <©itd)er finb nUl^Iid)er at^ bie eurigen. SJiein 33ater l^at feine U^r Derloren; ^einrii^ ^at au^ bie feinige tierloren. ajJeine ®(i)tt)efter ^at bie i^re t)er!auft. 2)?ein 9Sater ^at beineu Srief unb ben meineu gelefen. 3)?eine iante l)at i^ren ®arten unb ben nnfrigen t)er!auft. ^ai bein 53ruber meinen Stocf ober feinen genommen? §at \?uife meinen gingert)ut ober it)ren gefnnben ? X)etne Slufgaben finb leic^ter al^ bie meinigen. 3)iefe Sdume finb ^o^er at^ bie unferen. ^n unferer ©tabt finb me^r Slergte ate in enrer. Sarte Si(b ift gut; aber beine^ (bein^) ift tDortrefflid). a)Zein Sruber ift grower, ate beiner. Unfere 3lufgabe ift fcfimerer ate eure. (^r ^at meinem ©ruber me^r 2lepfet gegeben, ate beinem. SBir geben unferer aJiagb l^o^eren 8o{)n, ate it)r ber eurigen. 76. '^TDMs basket is mine; these gloves are ours. The city is ours. My thimble is as fine as yours. Your umbrella is not so large as mine. My son is more diligent than thine. My friend has sold his house and mine. My sister has eaten her apple and thine. -fHas Louisa taken my pen or hers; my pencil or hers ? Henry has read my books and yours. Youi sisters are younger than ours. We speak of our friend and of yourSvA^ Is my room smaller than thine ? I have promised % book to your son and to mine, to your daughter and to mine^ I speak of my tasks and of thine. This castle belongs to mj uncle and to yours. VWhat wages are higher^ yours or mine Are your last lessons harder or easier than ours ? Are th] bullets heavier or lighter than his ? Emily's room is prettie] than mine, but mine is larger than hers. -^ Are the wages oj the Englishman higher than thine or those of the Italian ? <^ — 45 — Singular. Flural, Nbm. er, he; jie, she; c^, it; ftc, they; Ace. x\)n, him; jte, her; e«, it; fte, them. 3a, yes; nein, no (answering particle). _^§^ For the use of the gender see No. 41. |)aben ©ie meinen @to(J? ^^a, id) ^abe t^n. ^aben @ie meittc Uf)r? 9^ein, id) ^abe fie ni^t. §aben @ie mein aWeffer ? ^^^ ^cibc e^ nid}t. §aben ®ie meine ©c^u^e ? .^a; i(^ ^abe fie. S3o tft mein |)unb ? 3(| ^abe i^n nid)t gefe^en. SBer f)at meine geber genommen ? J)ein -Srnber ^at fie genommen. SBo ^aft bn biefe^ Jafc^entnd) ge^ fnnben? Qd) t)abe e^ in 3^^^^^ 3*^^^^ gefnnben. j)iefe 33oge( finb fe^r fdjbn. 2Son tnem ^aft bn fie er^alten ? ®eine ©d^lrefter ift feljr flei^ig; meine 9JJntter liebt fie fe^r. §aben @ie meinen D^eim gefannt? Qd) ^be i^n nid)t gefannt. ©ie^ ift ein nii^Iic^e^ ^nd); ^aben @ie e^ fd)on getefen? SBo ift mein ginger^nt? Qd) f^aht if)n Q\}xtv ®d)tDefter gegeben; fie ijat i^n t)ertoren. §at ^^emanb meine ®abel genommen ? Sari ^t fie genommen. 2Bem f)at ber ©artner atle biefe -33Inmen gefd)i(lt? @r ^at fie ^'^rer 3JJntter ge- fd)i(f t. §aben ®ie biefe U^r fiir Qf}xm Srnber gefanft ? 9^ein, id) l)aht fie nidjt fitr i^n gefanft. §aben ©ie eine fitr -3^re ©^mefter gefanft? 5Jtcin, id) ^be feine U^r fitr fie gefanft. 78. H Has the tailor brought my coat ? Yes, he has brought it. Hast thou already done thy lesson ? I have not yet done it. Have you seen my new room ?f No, I have not yet seen it. Where hast thou bought these pretty rings ? I have bought them in- Paris. I have received a letter from my aunt, have you read it?'^^Have you already seen the king ?^ I. have not yet seen him. You have a good pen; give it to my sister. Where are your gloves ? I have lent them to your aunt. Where is your umbrella? Give it to this child, f My aunt is dead; did you know her ? What books have you there ? Have you read them? Where is thy dog? My father has sold it. Have you received any letters for your father ? No, I have received no letters for him. '*Have you bought these books for your mother ? No, I have not bought them for her. — 46 — T9. Ferfect Thnse: \6) bin getoefen, I have been; bu bift getDefen, thou hast been; er ift gemejen, he has been; mx finb gen)efen, we have been; tl^r feib getrefen, you have been; fie finb getnejen, they have been. 2)er §crr, the gentleman; ber SJJorgen, the morning; bag grantein, the (unmarried) .lady; ein ^alber, eine l^albe, ein l^albeg, bie !^ame, the lady (married or half a, one half of; unmarried); 'llC^toiertel, quarter, (one) fourth of; gnfammen, together; einmal, once; l)eute, to-day; " gttJeimal, twice; gliidltc^, happy, successful; breimat, three times; lange (adv. of time), long, a long Diermal, four times; time; mentals, nie, never Obs.— (1) The nouns §err, grau, grdutein are used as titles and ad- dresses (Mr., Sir, Madam, Mrs., Miss). Mr. and Sir are translated by §err; Mrs. by ^vaVi;Madam by the French SDZabante, if a married lady is addressed. In the address of an unmarried lady grcinlein is used. Miss is translated by grantein. — (2) If §err is used before the names of persons spoken o/", it is de- clined with or without the article; in the plural the article must always be used, and mostly in the genitive singular.— (3) §err takes in all cases of the singular n, and in all cases of the plural en. — (4) The words §err, gran, grdnletn are used idiomatically, if relatives or friends of the person addressed are spoken of without mentioning their names: 3^r §err greunb (your friend) ; 3br §err 33ater, ^rnber, @ol)n; 3^re gran Tlntttv; ^l^r grdntetn ©cf)n)efter, (5) Of after fractions is generally not translated, the following noun, if the numerator of the fraction is more than one, being placed in the plural : brei tjtertel (SUen (but bret titertel $fnnb. See No. 65). S3er ift l^ier gewefen? §err aJiotl ift I)ter gct^efen; cr ijat biefe^ SSnd) gebra^t.. Sift bu hti bem Sc^u^mac^er gewefen? ^cf) bin l^eute bet S\}xtm @rf)U^macf)er gelDefen; er l}at Qi)vt ©ttefet |d)on g^ mac^t. SBo feib tt)r btefen 9Jiorgen gemefen? 933ir finb bei unfern greunbe ^art geirefen, mefc^er fetjr franf ift. J)tefer §err ift bn Qa\}Xt in SBien geiDefen, unb feine Sriiber finb fe{)r fange in Sonftan tinopel gemefen. ©u biftntc^t fteifeig gemefen, bu ^aft betne Slufgabc no^ ni(^t get|tad)t. 3^^ ^in geftern bei grau 9?ober gemefen; fie eine fe^r tieben^tuitrbige !Dame. Sf^ grdufein gmifie oft in biefc sStabt gewefen ? @ie ift fd^on breimal I)ier geujefen. ^aben ©i — 47 ^ $erm (Bd)oU gefannt? Qi\ {)abe i^n in ©erltn ge!annt; njtr ftnb oft 3uf ammen au§gegangcn. SBte tange finb ®te in aJZabrib gemefen ? 3=d^ bin nur ein t)albe^ ^^^^l^^ ^^ geiDcfen, aber ii) bin brei t)iertel ^abre in ^ari^, nnb ein biertel 3^^^^^ in 2Bien gemefen. §aben ®ie bie ^erren JloUd f(J)on gefe^en? S'a, 2)?abame, ic^ ^abe fie geftem bei einem meiner grennbe gefe^en. Q\t meine ajjntter t)ier gemefen ? 9iein, [mein] grdulein; id) l)abe Qf)xt gran 3Kntter nic^t gefe£)en; aber Q1)v §err aSater nnb O^r §err Srnber finb btefen ajjorgen ein* mat ^ier gemefen, ^^ Has [there] been anybody in my room ? Yes, your son has l3een there. ^ Has the tailor been here?^^No, he has not yet been here. Hast thou been at the joiner's ? No, I have not yet been there. We have many flowers; we have been in the garden of Mr. NoUet.-f^ Have you also been at Mr. Moll's? My brother has never been more contented than to-day; he ^ has received from his uncle a beautiful gold watch, and half a dozen pocket-handkerchiefs. 3^How long have you been in Paris ?-)-^Ve have been there six months. These gentlemen have done much business (plur.); they have been very success- ful. Are Messrs. N. already departed for Cologne ? -j-^hey are departed this morning with their uncle; I have seen them at Mrs. Sicard's. ) Has Miss Louisa been here to-day? No, Madam, your sister has not been here; I have seen her three quarters of an hour ago at your brother's [house]. Give me half a yard of (Don) this linen. Have you ever known my father ?-t' Yes, I have seen him three or four times at your sister's. 81. Imperfect Tense: xdj trar, I was; bu iDarft, thou wast; er wax, he was; ton ttjaren, we were; tl^r rt)aret, you were; fte iDaren, they were. S^ematg, formerly; bie <^ule, the school; at«, when. Obs. — When a clause begins with cl8, when, the verb is placed at the end of the clause. — 48 — SBo tDarft bu biefen SDJorgcn? Q6) war 6cl mcinem SSetter, todi)tt t)on granffurt angefommen ift. 3Kem ©ruber unb id) tDaren bd beu nem 2Sater. Qijxt Zank toax fd)on abgereift. ^err aJioH mar e^e* mate \tijv reic^; er {)at feit 3e^n ^a{)ren t)iel t)er{oren. 5Baren @tc no(^ ni^t bet $errn 3)iab(t) ? ^d^ bin geftern ba gettjefen, aber er tear au^gegangen. SBie alt mar -3^r §err ©ruber, a(^ er in ^bln wax? (5r mar neunje^n ober jmanjig 3'a^re alt. SBir maren nid)t jufammen; er mar in Soln unb ii) mar in ^Diiffelborf. DJieine @c!^meftern maren fange in ©ritffel bei §errn SloUet. SBarum finb ®ie geftern nic^t gefommen? ^d) mar geftern !ranf. 3Baren biefc §)erren immer fo reid^ ? §aben Sie immer fo mU greunbe ge^abt ? Sarft bu biefen 2)Zorgen in [berj ®(f)ule? Qd) bin ^eute ni(f)t in [ber] @(^u(e gemefen. ^d) mar in [ber] Stabt, al^ @ie geftern bei meinem SSater maren. 82. y I was formerly much happier; I was young and strong. Wast thou always as contented as to-day? My father was formerly very rich. My sisters were very ill yesterday. . How old were you when you were in France ? I was fifteen years and six months old. 4Was my room open when I was in school ? No, but the windows were open. This girl was much prettier when she was young. John and William were always your friends. Were you not at my brother's when you were in town ? Ll have known your father when you were still a child. 83. Iipperfed Tense: td^ l^atte, I had; " bu ^atteft, thou hadst; er ^atte, he had; tt)tr f)atten, we had; il^r Ijattet, you had; |te l^atten, they had. 2)ic (Sltern, the parents; je^t, now; ber eine, the one; ber anbere, the other. Ohs. — (Sin and anber, when not followed by a noun, decline weak or STRONG, according to the rules for ordinary adjectives. ®u ^atteft geftern einen neuen §ut; ^aft bui^n terloren? ^ex §ut, ben id) geftern ^atte, ge^ort mcinem ©ruber. Qijx |attet mU -~ 49 — fjreunbc, ate i^r noc^ {ung tt)aret; »arum l^abt il^r fcftt fo ttjemge ? aBir ^aben me^r greunbe af^ i^r. SWein Dnfet l^at allc ^ferbe, bte er e^emal^ ^atte, t)erfauft. ^6) ^atte jmei ©c^tDeftern; bic eine xoav in SSien, bte anbere.tn Serlin; {)aft bu fie ge!onnt? Qi) l^abe bte* jemge gefanitt, bte in Berlin war; l^atte fie nid^t jtt)et Sorfiter? fatten @te ntt^t dier |)dufer in ber ©tabt? @ie ^aben 9?e(^t; aber icf) t)abe jiuei bon btefen |)aufern oerlauft; i^ ^atte itt bem eiiten ge^ mo^nt, unb meitt ©ruber in bem anbern. 84. ^ I had formerly little money; but I am now richer than you. You were (had in German. See No. 17) wrong, my dear friend; but your brothers were right. Nobody had any money for my brother when he was in Cologne. Did you have (had you) your lessons when you were yesterday in school ? No, I was sick; but my brother had all his lessons. Hadst thou still thy parents when thou wast in Boston ? Where had you your books when you were in the house of your sister ? JrMy brother had them in his room. We had few friends when we were in Berlin, but we had many when we were in Cologne . Where are the little dogs which Miss Emily had when she was at your mother^s ? She has sold the one, and the other is dead. How many servants had you when you were in France ? What had you in your hands when you were in your room?^I had a piece of sugar in the one hand, and two little bullets in the other. 85. Nbm. x6), I; bit, thou; er, he; . jtc, she; e8, it; Vat. tntr, tome; hiv, to thee; il^m, to him; tl^r, to her; t^m, to it. Infinitives: laufen, to buy; tl^un^f to do; Derfaufen, to seU; mad^en^f to make, to do; geben, to give; lefcn, to read; lei^en, to lend; fe^cn, to see; fd^retben, to write. SBad^fam, watchful; bic Qdt, the time; Suft l)aben, to have a mind; bic @iitc, the kindness. *bcr Xtfaltx, the dollar; '^6) !ann, I can; bu faniifl, thou canst; cr tatin, he can; ttjir lotntcn, we can; t^r !onnt, you can; fte fonncn, they can. In/in.: fonncn, to be able. t 2}2ad)cn and t^Uti are thus distinguished in German: t^un is to act for any purpose; madden, to act for the productiou of a work, — 60 — Ob8.~(1) All German infinitives end inn (mostly in en).— (2) English infinitives with to must generally be rendered by German infinitives with gu. If the English infinitives lose their sign to, the German corresponding infini- tive is generally employed without ju: ic^ fann lefen, lean read; x^ l^abe gu t^un, / have to do. — (3) The German infinitive is placed last in the ordinary sentence, but so that it precedes the past participle, if there is one. (4) The English objective case (me, thee, him, etc.) must be translated by the German dative, if we may supply the preposition to : Give me (to me) your pen, geben @ie mix 3^re geber. — (5) Personal pronouns in the accusa- tive or dative (without prepositions), must generally be placed before the accusative or dative of substantives, and before all other adjuncts of the verb. ^annft bu mir bicfe^ 48u^ let^en ? Qd) fann bir biefe^ SSmi) ntc^t Ieif)en; e^ gel^ort metnem 3Setter |)einri(f). SSJer tann btefen Srief tefen? Qd) fann i^n lefen; er ift fe^r gnt gefdirieben, SBir fonnen biefen 2Korgen nt(f)t fc^reiben, SBarnm fdnnt i^r ntc^t ]d)xeu ben ? SBir ^aben feme Jinte, fonnen ©ie meinem Srnber Qijxt Uf)r lei^en ? Sd) fann t^m melne U^r ni(f)t leif)en, id) i^aU fie bem^errn ©. Derfanft. |)aben @te nteiner (3(f)tt)efter etne geber gegeben? Qd) f)abe xi)x feme geber gegeben, §aben ®ie Snft, biefen §nnb ^n f anfen ? Qd) l^abe feine 8nft i^n jn f anfen; er ift nid)t tnadifam. §at Qi)x Srnber l^ente nirf)t^ ^n t^nn ? ®r ^at brei ©riefe ^n f^reiben. Sir ^aben no^ jmei 3lnfgaben jn mad)en. Qd) ^atte geftern t>a^ SSergniigen, Qljx grdntein (3cf)mefter jn fe^en. ^aben @ie ^tit, biefen ©rief jn lefen ? 3^(1) ^abe je^t feine ^dt, i^n jn lefen, Sonnen @ie mir einen SRegenfdjirm geben? Qd) fann Ql^ncn f einen geben, id) l^abe nnr einen. Q\jx §err Srnber ^t bie ®iite, mir ben feinigen jn tei^en. ©inb ®ie geftern bei meiner Zantt gemefen ? 9^ein, ic^ toax geftern nxd)t bei i^r; ic^ ^atte jn diele ®efd)afte. 86. "^ Can you do that exercise? Yes, lean (do it); but my brother cannot (can it not do). Will you (S&oUtn @ie) lend me* your penknife ? I cannot lend thee my penknife; my sister has taken it.V Have you given a pen to my cousin ? Yes, I have given him one. Hast thou sold thy dog to my sister ? I have not sold her my dog. Canst thou not lend me twenty dollars? I cannot do it to-day. yWe can read this book. These gentle- men cannot write their letters; they have no paper. Hasi 1 V^' 51 thou a mind to buy a pair of boots ? Has your brother a mind to sell his ring ? Had you the kindness to give a glass of water to this poor man? My friend had the pleasure to see his parents. -^I had no time to read all these letters. My father had the kindness to buy me a gold watch. Hast thou seen it ? I have not yet seen itrf-Have you beeii with Ferdinand to-day? I have been with him this morning. SI. Nam. tt)tr, we; i\)X (@te), you; ftc, they; Bat. un«, to us; eu(^ (^l^nen), to you; il^nen, to them. ' Qtijtn, to go; fein, to be; tommen, to come; ttjenn, if; trinfeu, to drink; untro^t, unwell; nton, one; effen, to eat; t^a^ Ungtiirf, the misfortune; l^abett, to have; ba§ ^aar, the pair, the couple. xdj toxU, I will; bu tnttljt, thou wilt; er tDtU, he wiH; toir itJoltett, we will; i^r ttjollt, you will; jte tt)otten, the/ will. Inf.: ttJotten, to be willing. Obs. — Clauses introduced by tnentl require the verb to be placed last in the clause; the same as in relative sentences (No. 45). Sitlft bu tntt mir ge^en? Qii) fann nt^t mit bir gefjen, id) ^abe feine 3^it. 3^^^ ^iH ^i^ ^in fc^oite^ Sud^ lei^en, menn bu flei^ig bift lann bein -©ruber l^eute ni(f)t fommen? (5r i)at feine guft 3U fommen; er ift untDol)!. 3Bir molten {el|t unfere 2lufgaben madden. SBoIfen @te etn ®Ia^ SBetn trinfen? 9^ein, aber ic^ wilt etn Stitd gleifc^ ober ^cife effen. 2BoHen ®te ein mentg @enf unb ©alj ? ^onnen @te nn^ biejen Sanb tei^en? Qd) faun 3^^nen biefen -53anb nii^t (ei^en, mein ^ruber tt)il( t|n ^aben. 2J?an lann nt(f)t ungludftrfier fein, al^ biefer junge 3Jiann; er ^at feine gitern unb feine Srilber nnb ©ii)n)e[tern t)erIoren. 2Ber toiU biefen 2tpfel ? Qd) voiU t^n l^aben. SBa^ iDoUt i^r ie^t t{)nn? SBir luoHen ein /i^aar ^riefe f(f)retben. Qd) tDill end} eincn Sorb Sir[d)en geben, inenn it)r flei^ig fein tuoKt, SBollen ©ie bie ®itte I)aben, mir eine 92abel gu geben ? ^c^ Ijcibe je^t teine, id) tann S'^nen feine geben. §aben ®ie ^tit, mit un^ gu ge^en ? Qd) ^abe feine 3^^^, mit 3^1)^^^ gn ge^cn. 88. T What hast thou to do? I have nothing to do. Wilt thou read this book ? Yes, I will read it. How is (SBa« mai}t) thy — 52 — brother ? He is unwell, he cannot come.-h Where can one buy these fine penknives ? One can buy them at our neighbor's. Will you give us a little ink? Can your sister lend us her pen- knife ?4^^hat do these gentlemen want (what will these etc. ) ? These ladies will buy an umbrella. One cannot be more un- happy than I [am], one cannot have more misfortune than I. Give us something to drink. fWhat will you [have] ? Will you have wine or water ? Have I not lent you my cane ? No, you have not lent it to me. Where are your brothers ? I have sold them my dog. f-These men are very rich; all these houses be- long to them. 89. cr- 7 r» ^ ^:^ ( to Hic; v;^ ( to thee; Singular. Dot. mxt, \ ^^ j^yg^jf. txx, -j ^^ ^^^^^^^. j tl^m, t^r, t^m, to him, to her, to it; I \\6)f to himself, to herself, to itself, to one's self. Ace, mic^^j^^^^if. btdl, {thyself; S t^n, jte, t%, him. her, it; ] ftc^, himself, herself, itself, one's self. Plural. i>«*. UnS, j^^^^Vselves; ■ «'«^' ] to youkelves; J tl^nen, to them (3^nen, to you); ( jlC^, to themselves, (to yourselves, to yourself). Ace. \m^f j us; 1 ourselves; ^^' 1 yourselves; ' fte, them {Bit, you); " ftd), themselves, (your selves, yourself). Infinitives. Past Participles. Y Soben, to praise; ^'jd)lagen, to beat, to strike; getobt, praised; gefc^tagen, beaten, struck; * ix)a)d)en, to wash; gemajd^eit, washed; ^Derle^en, to hurt; Derle^t, hurt; fptelen, to play; gefptett, played; "* erlauben (with dat.), to permit, to aUow; erlaubt, permitted, allowed; < bert^eibigen, to defend; Oert^eibtgt, defended; ♦ bcjd)utbtgen, to accuse; ' befd)ulbtgt, accused; / entfc^ulbtgen, to excuse; entfd)ulbtgt, excused; lianbetn, to act; gel^anbelt, acted; f retten, to save; gerettet, saved; jprei^eii, to speak, to talk; gefprod^en, spoken, talked; id)netbcii, to cut; gej(i)mtten, cut; Vau^fel^en, to expose; au§gefe^t, exposed; \n %^t nel)meu (with Ace.) , to take care of; in ^'d^t genommen, taken care oi 1 — 53 — 2)er 5lbt)ocat, the lawyer; baS ®t\dj\d, the ability; bcr 2Jlut^, the courage; bte (geife, the^soapi'ber @taub, the dust; bic %xmtt, the army; ber iBerbat^t/ the suspicion; toorftc^tig, cautious; unt)or|td)ttg, incautious; ^angene^m, pleasant; unangeuel)m, unpleasant;* \o, thus; ba (conjunction), since; ttjeil, because. Obs — (1) SBeit and ba (since) require the following verb to be at the end of the clause (No. 45). — (2) Adjectives are generally preceded by their qualify- ing words or adjuncts: S^ tft mir angcnel^m, it is pleasant to me. f £)er Se^rer f)at bii) gclobt, totii bu flei^tg gewefen bift. !Cetn ©ruber ift ein bbfer Sndbe; er ijat itiid^ gcftern gefd^Iagcn, |)aft bu bic^ frf)ou gemajd)ett? Qii) ^abe midf) uod) ui^t gett)afdf)eu; aber §eiuri^ ^at \id) \d}on fcit eiuer ©tuub'e geiDufc^eu. Qd) ^be ntic^ l^eute mit einem ajieffer tJerie^t. Sari f)at ficfi aud) gefdiuitteu; cr ijdt mit feiuem gebermeffer gefpielt. SBoHeu @ie uu^ crtaubeu, in 3{)rem ®arteu ju fpielen ? ^d) toxU e^ cuc^ eriauben, tomn iijv bte ©lumen in Sl^t nef)men iDoIIt. Sarum feib i^r l^eute nti^t au^ge* gangen ? SBir tDoIten un^ in 2ld)t ne^men, iceil tt)ir franf getDefen finb, (5^ ift leid^t, fidf) in 3)[d)t ju ne^men, menu man Dorfiditig ift. !Diefer 2lbDocat ^t bid) mit gro^em ©efi^icf t)ertt)eibigt. ®u l^aft Unred^t, bic^ ju t)ert^eibigen, ba bi^ no^ 3iiemanb befd^ulbigt ^at. S^ ift Unrec^t, fid) ^u t)ert^eibigen, iDenn man nic^t befd^ulbigt ift. @ie lonnett fic^ nid)t entjc^utbigen, [meine] ^erren; 5yiiemanb !ann fid| entfd)ittbigen, ber fo ge^anbelt l^at. (S^ fann ^'^nen nid)t fd)tDer fein, tt)eurer greunb, fid^ ju entfd)ulbigen, ba ®ie t)ot(ig (perfectly) 9?ed)t l)aben. ®^ ift meiner ©^mefter fe^r unangene^m, fid^ in biefer ©cfa^r 5u fet)en. 90. ^It is very pleasant to me, to hear you speak thus. It is easy for (to) you to accuse me if I cannot defend myself. Hast thou hurt thyself, when thou wast in my room? I have not hurt myself, but William has hurt himself with his fork. ' How can you permit yourself to hurt the trees in my garden ? Thou art right to take care of thyself, since thou hast been sick. These boys have struck me to-day; but thy brother has de- fended me with great courage.. William's father has beaten us, because we have played in his garden. Children, I cannot praise you to-day, because you have not done your lessons. (My) gentlemen, you have not been wise; to excuse one's self if one — 54 — is not accused, is incautious. Charles had cut himself when he was in your garden. Will you give me some soap and water ? r will wash myself, and clean myself of the dust. Why have you not been in school, children? t We have already excused ourselves with (bei) the teacher. Our army is lost, it cannot save itself. These men have exposed themselves to a great danger .-7~^You have exposed yourselves to (a) grave (f corner) sus- picion, since you have taken what does not belong to you. ©ogen (past part, gefagt), to say, to cinen iBefucf) mac^en, to pay a visit; tell; fold^er, \oldjt, fold^eg (strong declen- {ci)ic!en, to send; sion), such; gtauben (past. part, geglaubt), to be- fcinblid), hostile; lieve; bort, there (at that place) ; tDiffcn, to know; bie iBe!anntfd}aft, acquaintance; • terfprec^en, to promise; ber getnb, the enemy; ' fiird^ten (past. part, gefitrd^tet), to be ha% that (conjunction); afraid; Wit^, tDag, all that, everything that; *fi6) tt)etgern (past part, getreigert), to ^idj% tt)a§, nothing that, refuse) ; Inf. ntiiffen: id} mug, I must; bu utugt, thou must; er mug, he must; toit miiffeu, we must; il^r miigt, you must; fie miiffeu, they must. I have been in New York for a year, id} bin [f d^ u] j e i t eiuem ^atjV in ^m 3)or!. Obs, — (1) Clauses, introduced by t)a% require the verb to be at the end of the clause (No. 45) . — (2) The indefinite pronoun man is only used in the nominative, and is translated by one, by the indefinite /7eop^ or by ihei/: Tlan mug fagen, one (they) must say. Often man may be rendered by an English passive construction: man gtaubt, U is bdieved. — (3) The accusative of personal pronouns generaUy precedes the dative. Sonnen ®te Httr fagen, IDO |)err SUioH tt)of)nt? Qfi) tarn [e^]' Q^mn nirf)t fagen. 2BoHen ®te mir btefc geber (ei^en ? Qd) tarn fie 3^nen ni^t let^en, fie ge^ort mir nic^t. Qd) mug l^eute bem graulein ©♦ einen ^efutf) mad)en; fie ift geftern mit i^rer Ttnttcv an^ gefommen. 2)?ugt bu fci)on ge^en? 9Bo finb meineSc^u^e? ^at ber ®d)U^ma^er fie noif) nid)t gebrad^t? 9Jein, er mU fie bit in etner ©tunbe f(J)t(f en. SBte !annft bu [e^] toiffen ? dv f)at [e^] mir ge^ fagt. S)ein SSruber mug nodt) feine ?lufgaben madden. Sir muffen t — 56 — Sitter t^uttr tt)a6 unfcm dittxn unb gel^rcm ongenel^m tft. Q^x mii^t meinen SSetter befu^en; er tft feit brei SBodjen frant §einric^ unb Sil^efm miiffen t)iele Sud^er f)aben- 2}ian mug mcf)t au^ge^en, menu mart fran! ift, 2JJait mug fii) mc|t t)ert^eibigen, tt)eun man nt(^t bef(^ulblgt ift. @te mitffen ntd)! 3111^^ glauben, ma^ man ^'^nen fagt. @te mitffeu fid^ ni(f)t foti^er ©efa^r au^f el^eu. 3)ian glaubt, bag bte 'ipreugeu bte fetnbttd^e 3lrmee gef(i)Iagen l^abeu* Tlan fagt, ba^ ber getnb ftd^ ntd)t (auger i^ert^eibtgeu faun. 3Jiau glaubt mcf)t, bag bu bie^ SSvLii) gefcfjrieben l^aft. ©te mitffeu \\^ tu Sldjt ue^men, iDeuu @te tu metueu ®arteu ge^eu toolleu. @ie mitffeu tDiffeu, bag QijV greuub Sari fic^ gemeigert l^at, mtr jeue SitdEier gu fdiideu. S33arum l^aft bu bid) geiDetgert, uac^ SBteu ju get)eu? .^c^ ^abe mt^ ni^t gemetgert, ua^ SBieu gu gel^eu; aber tc^ mug fitr(i)teu, bag t^ bort feiue ©efd^cifte mad^eu fauu, SBtr ijahcn uu^ gemetgert, btr uufer §au^ ju t)erfaufeu, toeil e^ fiir btd^ gu grog ift. Sir fiub fdjou feit t)ier SBodjeu iu ber @tabt, aber Sftiemaub ijat uu^ eiueu 48efu(^ ge^^ ma^t. 92. v_„ rt^ My friend had the kindness to send me a basket of cherries. You have not yet sent me my book. Who has taken my pen ? I cannot tell (it) thee. This penknife belongs to my brother; thou must give it to him. Charles will not lend me his um- brella, -^hy will he not lend it to thee ? One must not pay visits if one is unwell. One must promise nothing that one cannot do. One must never praise one's self, 'hi can promise you a great pleasure if you will make the acquaintance of my friend; you must pay him a visit. I cannot believe (it) that you have such suspicionX, It is said that you have been for two years in this country. I t has been sa id that you have re^^ fused to pay a visit to your sick brother rf- We have not refused to write this letter, but we must be cautious in this affair (®e= fd)aft). Must we not be afraid that our friends have lost all (that) they have ? -fWe will do nothing that can be unpleasant to you, but you must have the kindness to do what you have promised to us. ^^ — 56 — PART nL 93. Present Indicative. Sing. 1. '\6) lobe, I praise, I am praising, I do praise; 2. (bu lobeft),* bu lobft, thou praisest, etc.; 3. (er lobct), er lobt, he praises; Plural. \. Xoxt lob en, we praise; 2. (i^r lobet), i^r lobt, you praise; 3. fie loben, they praise. Imperative. Sing. lobe (bu), praise (thou) ; Plural. lobt (il)r), praise (you) ; loben ®ie, praise (you) [for polite conversation]. gtnben, to find; tt)unfd)en, to wish, to desire; ' fud^en (with ace), to seek, to look for; arbeiten, to work, to labor; iDOl^nen, to dwell, reside, live; ba^ Xuc^, the cloth; bringen, to bring; bte ©trage, the street; bebauern, to regret, to pity; ber iBuc^pnbler, the bookseller; * banen, to build; 3ebermann, every body; reiten, to ride; fdjarf, sharp; taDeln, to censure, to blame; QCinj, whole, Ob9. — 1. The e in the endings of the 2d and 3d pers. sing, and 2d plural is always used if the infinitive ends in ben or ten (finben, arbeiten). In verbs with infinitives in ein and em (tabein, bebauem) the e of the ending is dropped in all persons, except the 1st pers. sing. 2. The demonstrative pronoun ^Aa^, used without a noun, and referring to something mentioned before, or pointed at, is rendered by the neuter baQ or*^ bteS (instead of biejeg). 3. Mixed fractions are placed wholly before the following noun: glDei unb ^ine Oiertel 3J^eiIe, two miles and a quarter. 3Ba§ fud^en (Sie ? 3d) fucf)e nteine geber. ajJein 53ruber fu^t fcinert ^(eiftift, SBir fudjen unfern §unb. ©iefc Sinber fatten t^re Sitc^er. 2Bo faufen ®te Qi)X ^apkv? SBtr tatfen unfer papier * The forms enclosed in parentheses are obsolete. — 5Y ~ bei bem Su(^^dnbler. Qii) finbe metnett ©tod ttt(f)t. SBer l^at meinen ©tod genommen? Qd) glaube, ba§ Qijv ^ruber tf)tt ge* nommen ^at* 3^(1) Uebe bie[en ^naben niijt; er ift immer unartig. ©u tiebft betnen ge^rer, ®ott liebt bie guten 3)ienf(f)en. ®ute ^tn=» ber (ieben i^re ©Item* 3ft e^ toa^r, baB 3^r Onfel fein $au§ oer^ fauft? SBie t^euer derfaufen ®te bic (a) gtle t)ou btefem Stuc^e? 3(^ t)er!aufe bie (a) (Slle btefe^ Zndjt^ gu (at) t)ier 3:^alern, ©a^ ift fe^r t^euer. ginbeft in mtf)t, §einri^, ba^ ba^ fe^r t^euer ift? Sa, id) finbe e^ fe^r t^euen 2Bir t)erfaufen aber t)iet t)on biefem Xndjt. ^ebermann finbet e^ fd^on, @(^iden ®ie mir bret unb eine ^albe glle! SBiffen @ie, too id) wo^ne? 3a, ©ie n)of)ueu tit ber teteftra^e, Qd) ntu^ tDitnfrf)en, ba^ @ie ftc^ ein tDenig itt %d)t ne^men. SBarum tabdt i^r eure greunbe? S^ filrc^te, ba^ i^r nie 3emanb (obt. Wdn greunb ^aii arbeitet ben ganjen Zaq; er ift ein fe^r flei^iger Snabe* fringe ntir meinen ©tod, SBil^elm; id) it)itl an^ge^en. Sei^en ©ie mir ' gefdiligft 3^^ S^^^^'J^^ff^^' ! b^^^ ^aft bn e^, aber fdineibe bid) ni^t; e^ ift fdiarf. 94. What are you doing? I am reading the book which your brother has lent me. You read too much. Why do you not write? I have already written three letters. My cousins never write. You always blame your cousins; you must not blame them. What art thou doing ? I am doing my exercise^ -^What is thy sister doing?! She is working. V'l^an you tell me where Mr. N. lives? He lives in (the) William street. Dost thou live with (bei) thy uncle? No, I do not live with him. We regret that thy father is sick. Do you know, that your uncle is building a new house? Where is your little brother? I believe that he is playing in the garden. I am afraid that thou playest too much, my son; thou must play less and work more. Has your brother found my watch ? He finds all (that) he seeks. I can not excuse you if you are acting thus/ '^ Write this letter for me, if you please. Tell my brother that he must go to Yienna with thee. Do not excuse thyself 1 I believe what thou sayest to me. My father wishes that thou ridest to the village, and buyest there ten pounds of — 68 ->- sugar and twenty yards of linen. How much coffee hare you bought ? Three pounds and three quarters. 95. Imperfect Indicative. \6) tobtc, I praised, I did praise, was praising; bu lobteft, thou praisedst, etc. ; er lobte, he praised; tt)ir lobten, we praised; t^r lobtet, you praised; fte lobten, they praised. SBefiid^en, to visit; antmorten, (with dat.), to answer; toerfuc^en, to attempt, to try, to en- fenbett, to send; tbbten, tokill; [deavor; fennen*, to know; beabftd^tigen, to intend; lernen, to learn; tjerlaffen, to quit, to leave; begleiteit, to accompany; \\6) begeben, to proceed, to betake amuftrcn, to amuse; one's self; ber ^erfu^, the attempt; benfen, to think; ber ^ob, the death; ftd^ befc^dfttgen, to occupy one's self; \i'\t 5lbjtd^t, the intention, design; brennen, to burn; v bie 5Serftdr!uitg, the reinforcement; reben, to speak; bie SfJeife, the journey; bemer!en,to perceive; bie 2lntunft, the arrival; ]^inretd)en, to be sufficient; bag @elb, the money; l^elfen, (with dat.), to help; bie SBo^nung, the residence; au^fii^ren, to accomplish; ber ^Bote, the messenger; ertrarteu, to expect; \iCi% iDSetter, the weather; anjetgen, to announce; ' tt)d^retib, ** while. Obs«— 1. The imperfect ending is ete in regular verbs ending in ben, ten, gnen and d)nen (id^ rebete, arbeitete, t% regnete), except fenben and tt)en= ben, which generally form fanbte, wanbte. 2. The imperfects of bringen and benfenare brad)te and bac^te; of brennen, brannte; lennen, fannte; nennen, nannte; rennen, rannte. 3. SBotten forms regularly n^ollte; !bnnen makes fonnte, and ntiiffen, mugte, both without softening the vowel. 3d) trottte is translated by / was willing, I intended, I was going to, I wished; id) tDOttte ntd^t, / was unwilling, I did not choose; td^ mugte, I was obliged t6\ \&\ fonnte, I could. 4. If conjunctions that throw the verb to the end of the clause(ba§, a\%, tt)enn, ba, meit, ird^renb etc.) precede their principal sentences, the verb of the latter is placed before its subject: x6) g e ^ e , trenn er fommt, I go if he comes, hjenn er fommt, g el^ e id^ , if he comes, I go. * ^ennen (to know) means *to have an acquaintance with somebody or something' ; hjiffen, (to know) means 'to have a knowledge of something.' ** SSdl^renb requires the verb to be at the end of the clause. I — • 59 — 6. In this instance (Obs. 4) the principal sentence is often preceded by the adverb fo, which in that position cannot be expressed in English: 2Senn cr fommt, fo ge^eid). 6. Feminine nouns consisting of more than one syllable, except those in futlft and tiife^ take en in all cases of the plural, without softening the radical vowel. For feminine nouns in el and cr see p. 33. ^d) tDar in bem ®arten, afe bein Sruber un6 befucf)te. 211^ SSooti) abradant gtncoln tobtete, voax id) in ©eutf^Ianb. Qi) tt)unfrf)te betnen S3ruber in 2Bien ju fe^en, ba td^ i^n in Berlin nic^t fe^en fonnte. S)a i^ alle^ ©elb t)ertoren ^atte, beab(i(^ti9te ic^ meine U^r gu Derfaufen. S)a id) ^axU t)erlaffen innate, fo tuollte id) nti^ nad^ So(n begeben, ^ SBir ntad)ten feinen SSerfnd) nad) ber ©tabt jn gef)en, tt)ei( e^ ben ganjen !Iag regnete* SBeil Sliemanb fiir beinen 33rn* ber rebete, fo t)erfu^ten tviv [e^], i^n ju t)ert^eibigen. SBir fpielten in bem ®arten, ma^renb bein ^rnber in feincm 3'^^^^^ arbeitete* S2BciI)renb mx M bir f^^eiften, brannte nnfer §an^. 2lfe iDir hid) nic^t im §anfe bemerften, bad^ten xoix, ba^ bn bid) im ®arten beft^ciftigteft ffienn bu bid) n)eigerft un^ beine 2Ibfid)ten gn fagen, fo fbnnen toir bir nid)t ^elfen* X)a^ bein :33ritber in nnferer @tabt too^nte, fonnte id) nicbt n)iffen. I did not attempt to proceed to Paris since my money was not sufficient for the journey?^ We did not expect the arrival of thy brother, since it rained the whole day. Since my brother refused to help me, I could not accomplish my designs. f- Since my friends were afraid to come to (gii) us, we were obliged to visit them. We were expecting the arrival of your brother, when a messenger brought us your letter that announced his death. We could not yesterday come to town, because the weather was bad. Just (®erabe) because he was wrong, I did not answef him. / Why did you not send your son, if you could not come to town ? If you thought so of him, you did not know the man. My brother was learning his lesson while I accompanied Charles into the garden. A While our house was burning, I amused myself with my friend William. -JL That Henry did not choose to come, I could not — 60 know. Since Mr. Davis was going to sell the house in which I lived, I was obliged to look for another residence. When we perceived the designs of the enemy, we sent reinforcements into the village. 9T. Future Indicative, x6) IDCrbe loben, I shaU or will praise; 1 am going to praise; bu trirft (oben, thou wilt praise; er tuirb loben, he will praise; voxt roerben toben, we shall praise; i^r ttjerbet loben, you will praise; fie ttjevben loben, they will praise. %6)i 2^age, a week; ber 2)tener, the man-servant; toierje^n S^oge, a fortnight; mitnel^men, to take along; bt«*, till, until; in ^ttjet bis bret 2^a= ontommen, to arrive; gen, in two or three days; abretfen, to depart; nod) etnmat,' once more; l^oren, to hear; ttJteber, again; regnen, to rain; ntorgen, to-morrow; bauern, to last; mbgtid), possible bleiben, to remain; ber ^rteg, the war; > erjud^en, to request; bte ^ngelegenl^ett, the affair; * tjerlieren, to lose. Obs. — (1) The FUTURE is formed by the verb tt)erben as auxiliary, and the infinitive of the verb without ju. This infinitive in simple sentences must be placed at the end of the clause. The verb merben, not followed by an infinitive, denotes to become: jte tnerben greunbe, they 6ecowe friends. — (2) ShaU in the 2. and 3. pers. sing, and plur. is translated by the verb foUen, which is irregular in the pres. indicative sing.: id) foil, bu follfi, er fott. Shall in questions is translated by foUeu even in the first person : shall I come, foE id) fomnten ? — (3) If I will etc. means to he willing, to intend, it should be translated by t(^ tDttt. — (4) The interrogative adverb when is translated by toann. ^d) trerbe btefen 2lbenb ba§ aSergttitgen l^aben, meinen DnM ju fc^en. Qi) tDerbe bir btefen pbfd)en 9{tng geben, xotxm bu flei^tg fein tnirft. §etnri(^ itiirb mir ^eute ein ^aar fd^one §anbfrf)u^e !au* fen. Seine ©(^tuefter n^irb jufrieben fein, XQtxm fie i|re 2Iufgabe ge* g, if it is used as a conjunction has the verb at the end of the clause. — 61 — marf)t f)at. aSenn tt)ir in 9?. fein trerben, toerben tt)ir Die! aSergniigcn ^aben. 2Bann merben @ie mid} befudjen ? Q^ glaube, ba^ irir @ie morgen befud)en iDerben. 2)fetne «^ruber tcerben ^eute ober morgen aud) fommen, g^ mirb meinem 23ater fe^r Dtel ^erguiigen mad)en (give), fie noc^ einmal ju fe^en. SBann merben @ie -3^rem greunbc kaii fdjreiben ? 3^ tDerbe il)m in ad)t bi^ t)ier5et)u Slagen fd)reiben. Solleu ®ie bie ®iite ^aben, mir ba^ Sud) ju f^iden, tt)eid)e^ @ie mir t)er)pro^en ^aben? Qd) merbe e^ Q^nm ()eute fd)iden, grdulein* 3)2ein !t)ienern)irb e^ 3^nen bringen. 3^r greunb fd)eint (seems) arm ju merben. ©oH id^ 3{)neu je^t ^elfen, ober foH id^ im ®arten arbeiten, bi^ @ie fertig (done) fein tnerben? ©a bn bid) morgen nad^ aSien begeben trirft, fo erfud)e id) bi(^, meinen ©o^n mitjune^^ men. ^(eiben @ie in ^Berlin, bi^ idj bort anfommen tt)erbe ? 98. Will you go with us ? I do not believe that my father will allow (it to) me. Has the shoemaker brought my boots ?^ No, he will bring them to you this evening. What shall we do now ? We will go to town together (together to town). Will you have the kindness to lend me your horse ? I shall lend it to you with much pleasure. We shall play to-day in the garden of our uncle; he will allow us. This man is becoming rich. I hear that thou art going to depart for Germany; wilt thou not take along thy children? Mr. Nollet has (is) arrived who desires to speak with you. Tell him that I will not see him. My father will arrive here in [a] short time; will you visit him? Excuse me, I must depart in three or four hours. It will not be possible for (to) me to see him. Since the war will last longer than we expected, it will be better if we remain in the country. Will you accompany us if we go to town ? If your friend is losing so much money, he will soon become poor. What will your father say, if he hears that you are going to leave the country? I shall not write you again till I shall come (till I come) to Vienna. Will the weather be good or bad to-morrow? I believe that it is going to rain to-morrow. Shall I try it once more ? Do not try it till you have spoken again with me. Do you know that our friend William is going to leave our town ? _ 62 — When is he going to depart? I believe that he will depart in five or six days. If thou wilt (tt)illft) bring me pen, ink, and paper, I shall try to write that letter for you. 99. Present Subjunctive. Sing, i^ lobe, I praise (praised etc.); bu lobeft, thou praise (praisedst etc.); er lobe, he praise (praised etc.). Plur. mv loben, i^r lobet, fie loben. Imperfect Subfunctive. id^ lobte etc. (like imperfect indicative). Perfect Indicative. \^ ^abe (bu ^ft, er ^at etc.) gelobt, I hare praised. Perfect Subjunctive. \6) \)Qiht (bu ^abcft, er l^abe, Xo'xx ^aben, t^r ^abet, fte l^a* ben) getobt. Perfect Infinitive. gelobt l^obeti, gelobt gu l^aben, to have praised. Pluperfect Indicative, id) Ijattt (bu l^atteft etc.) gelobt, I had praised. Pluperfect Subjunctive, id) ptte (bu l^cittefi etc.) gelobt. Obs. — 1. The present subjunctive generaHy does not drop the e in the endings. The third person sing, is always like the first. 2. The first persons subjunct. present of fonuen, tDoUeil, miiffen are: ic^ fonne, ic^ iDoIte, id) tniiffe, and are conjugated like the subjunctive of ic^ lobe. §aben; to have, makes thepres. subj.: ic^ l^abe, bu ^abeft, er ^abe, rt)ir l^aben, t^r l^abet, fie ^abeu. @etu, to be, has the pres. subj.: id) \ti, bu feieft, cr fet, tt)ir feien, ii)r feiet, fie feieu. 3. The imperfect subjunctives of founen, Xt)oUtn, miiffen are: id) fonute, (could), tvoUttf miigte. §aben, fein, bringen, benten soften in the imperf. subjunct. the a of their imperfect indicatives: id) tvdvt (I were), id) bad^te, id) brac^te. @enben, ttienben, brennen, tennen, nennen, rennen form their imperf. subjunct. regularly, restoring the c of the infinitives: id) fenbete, ttJenbete, brennte, fennte, nennte, rennte. 4. The perfect indie, of l^aben and fein are: id) l^obe gel)abt, I have had; id) bin geiDefen, I have been; perfect subjunctive: id) l^abe (bu })dbt\l etc.) ge^* l^abt; id) fei (bu feieft etc.) getrefen; pluperfect indicative: id) l^atte geljabt, I had had; id) toax gettjefeu, 1 had been; pluperfect subjunctive: id) |atte ge l^abt; id) mdre gemefen. 6. In clauses introduced by b a g the subjunctive is under certain cii cumstances more generally used than the indicative. This is the case if th clause introduced by bag is dependent on a verb of hearing, thinking, bb LiEViNG or SAYING, in the imperfect or pluperfect tense: I believe that he comes, id) gtaube, ba^ er f nt m t ; but: I believed that he came (was coming), id) gtaubte, bag er ! ttt ttl e. Such verbs as require the verbs in the following clause to be in the sub junctive are: benfeu, iiberjeugt fein, l^oren, glauben, ttjcil^nen, fiird^ten, fageii anttt)orten, fd)reiben, and the like. — 63 — 6. In clauses introduced by tJwt, the English past tense is translated either by the present or imperfect subjunctive, and the English pluperfect either by the pereect or pluperfect subjunctive: They believed that he learned, fie cjtaubten, bag er I e rn e (or t e rti t e). They said that he had learned, fie fagten, '^(iS^ er getemt 1^ a b e (or ^ d 1 1 e )♦ But the use of the present and perfect subjunctives must be avoided, when its forms would not be distinguishable from the indicative : id) gtaubte, bag fie lemten (not lernen); tc^ gtaubte, \iQS^ fie gelernt fatten (not ^aben), 7. In all these constructions the conjunction bag may be omitted, and the verb (subjunctive) of the clause takes its place immediately after the subject : \^ glaubte, er fei in ber @tabt, I believed he was in the city. 8. The same usage of the subjunctive takes place in clauses introduced by ob (whether, if), after the imperfect or pluperfect of verbs of asking (fragen) or doubting (,^rt)eifeln): \&\ fragte t^it, ob er franf Jet (or to a re), I asked him whether (if) he was sick. |^° If the clause introduced by \i(x^ depends on verbs in the present or FUTURE, the subjunctive is more rarely used than the indicative, SSd^nen, to suppose (wrongly); un^juldffig, inadmissible; »ermutl)en, to presume; rid^ tig, correct; ertldren, to declare; unrid)tig, incorrect; annet)men, tb accept; tdglid), daily; be^aupten, to state, to assert; bte B^^f^^^/ supply, provision; bemerten, to remark; ber ^orfc^lag, the proposition; fd^einen, to seem; bie 2lnfid)t, the view; fragen, to ask (a question); bie^utter, the butter; »erfxd)ern, to assure; bag (Si (pU ©ter), the Q^g\ borbereiten (past part, t)orbereitet), to bie SBa^r^ett, the truth; prepare; bie ©efellfd^aft, the company; teugnen, to deny; bie @(^Iad)t, the battle; jtneifeln, to doubt; ber ©eneral, the general; ja^ten, to pay; *ber Sintuo'^ner, the inhabitant; iibergengt, convinced; ob, whether, if. 3cf) glaubte, ba^ er fpiele. ^i) glaubtc, \^^% fie f)3tetten. ^^ md^nte, "ti^^ bu franf feieft. 3^(f) tt)a^nte, bu feieft franL .SBir Der* tnut^eten, ba^ bu beine 9lufgaben lernteft. J)ie i^einbe \i^i)itw.f '^^^ tDtr feine ^i^M^^n l^citten, 3Keine greunbe furd()teten, id) fei tobt. ©r tnar uber^eugt, \i(x% id) mi^ nad) :93ertin begeben f)atte. ©ein greunb erffdrte, ba§ er beinen 3Sorfd)fag nicfjt anne^men fonne. J)iefe 2Jfdnner fatten be^uptet, ba^ bu in So(n tDof)nteft. 3d) be* merfte, ba§ biefe Slnfid^t uuri^tig ju fein f^eine. Sr t)erftd)erte ntir. — 64 — ba§ er tmmer biefe 9lbfitf)t gefjabt ^abe. ©er Setter ba(f)te, ba^ mir un^ nti^t Dorbereitet fatten. Tltint greunbe f(f)rieben mir, fie hxdd}^ ten tdglid) Sutter unb Sier nad) ber Stabt, S3Ji(l)e(m (eiignete, ba^ er iemate bie 2lbft(f)t ge^abt ^citte, fein §ou^ ^u t)er!aiifen. ©ein 25ater fragte tnt^, ob idf) jemat^ in SBien gettjefen fei, Qi) gtDeifeltc, ob biefer SJiann bir bic SSa^rt)eit fage. 100. My brother thought that thou wast Vorking; but I was afraid that thou wast playing. He supposed [wrongly] that I was wrong. He often told me (told me often) that he had never had such a suspicion. We presumed, ffenry was in your company. Were you not convinced that we could not lose, that battle? The general declared that these propositions were inadmissible. He stated that the English were sending provisions, and that the inhabitants were bringing them to the city. How could you say that I was living in France ? Did I not always say that your views were correct ? He remarked that he knew me, and [that] your suspicion could not be correct. My brother asked me whether I had ever had such designs ? Henry answered me that he was not prepared to declare his views; he doubted if we could pay that money. I supposed you were accompanying your brother. I was afraid you were dead, since I had heard that you had not been in town for a month. 101. Future Subjunctive, x^ ttjetbe tobeit, bu tDcrbefl loben, er tDcrbe lobem, ft>tr trerben loben, i^r iDerbet (oben, fie mcrben loben. Conditional, xdj tniirbe loben, I should or would praise; bu tniirbeft loben, thou wouldst praise; er roiirbe (oben, he would praise; tntr tDiirben toben, we should praise; iljx triirbet loben, you would praise; fte tDiirben loben, they would praise. Obs. — 1. If a clause, introduced by if, is dependent on a verb in the potential mood with should, would, could, might, the clause is called HYPOTHETICAL, and requires in German the subjunctive of the imperfect for the English past tense, and the subjunctive of the pluperfect for the — 66 — English pluperfect. The conditional should not be used in clauses intro- duced by tnenn (if) : / should praise you, if you were here, \6) iDliube @te tobett, hjenn @ic l^ier tporen; I should praise you, if you worked (would work), id^ ttJiirbe ®te (oben, tpenn @te arbetteten {not arbetten njiirben): / should' praise you, if you had worked, x6) tt)iirbe @ie loben, votmi @te gearbettet fatten. 2. In the principal sentence of the hypothetical period the English potential with should or would is rendered either by the German conditional, or by the subjunctive of the imperfect (pluperfect): 3(j^ ttJlirbe jufrteben f e in (or id^ tD a r e gufrieben), tuenn fie angefomnten rtjaren, I should be.pleased if they had arrived. @ie fatten t^n gelobt, tuenn @te l^ier getDefen tocireti, you would have praised him if you had been here. 3. The English potential with could or mi^ht in the principal sentence is generally rendered by the subjunctive of the imperfect (or pluperfect, see p. 108) of the modal auxiliary fbnneit (id) fbnnte) with the infinitive of the verb: dr !ontite bieg ti)un, tt)enti er l^ier tudre, he could (might) do this if he were here. 4. The imperfect subjunctive of the modal auxiliary tttiiffert (id^ Tttil^tc) in the principal sentence of hypothetical periods is generally rendered by */ ought to or '/ should he obliged to' or by similar circumlocutions: @te mil 6t en bies triiffen, tt)enn @ie auftner!fam mdren, you ought to know this if you were attentive. 3c§ moigte meinen ^lan aufgeben, trenn bie^ bev gaU iDCirc, I should he obliged to give up my plan if this were the case. 5. The imperfect subjunctive of the modal auxiliary mogen (\6) ttiod^te, see p. 108.) in the principal sentence of hypothetical periods, generally cor- responds to 7 shmU wish to' or 'like to : 3(^ moc^te i^n fel)en, Xotxm eS mogltd^ toare, / should wish (would like) to see him if it were possible. 6. In all these instances (No. 2 — 5.) the conditional clause is frequently understood: 3Ba^ tuiirben ^\t tl^un? what would you do? 7. The English potential with should or would in clauses introduced by THAT (bo6), is expressed either by the subjunctive of the future, or by the conditional (especially with a plural verb). But after verbs of wishing, would is expressed by mo&jit, or by the imperfect ^bjunctive of the main verb: 3d^ ^offte, ^(k^ er fommen ft) er be (or tt)iirbe), I hoped that he would come, ^r gtaubte, \)(x^ fie bleiben n? iir b en (not merben), he believed that they would remain. 3d| njiinfd)te, 'b(x'^ fie tommen m o d^ t e n (or fdmen), I wished that they would come. 8. In clauses introduced by that, could generally corresponds to fonnte, and wiigrA^ to mbd)te: (Sr bad^te, bag fie nid^t tommen fonnten, he thought that they could not come. (Sr fiird)tete, bag fie fommen m o d^ t c n , he was afraid that they might come. ?lbfd^neiben, to cut off; XO^Xtn, to choose, elect; erreid)en, to reach; befolgen (part, befolgt), to follow; anbem (part, geanbert), to change; reifen, to travel; jurudfte^ren, to return; fid^ juriidfjiel^cn, to retreat; — 66 — crrld^teit, to establish; ber dtai^, the advice; bej^dtigen, to confirm; ber S3urger, tlie citizen; bauen, to build; bte 9legterung, the government; ^offen, to hope; baS ^oftamt, the post-office; fortfe^en, to continue; gern, gladly, willingly; ber Si^ein, the Rhine; ^p'dt, late; ber ^raftbent, the President; bolb, soon; ber 53ef(f)tu6, the resolution; gefunb, healthy; ber ®ef alien, the favor; {parfam, economical. !iDer ©eneral furcfitetc, ba^ bte geinbe feme 3wfi^^ten abf(f)neiben tDiirben. SBir fiirc^teten, ha^ bu ju fpdt fontmen ntodf)teft. !Setn 33etter tDiinfc^te, ha^ \)n biifi narf) SBien begeben tnoc^teft, !Die (Stn== n)of)ner l^offten, ba^ bte geinbe \)k ©tabt nxd)t errei(J)en fonnten. -3<1) glaubte ni(i)t, ba^ bein Sruber feine 3Infi(i)t anberh tt)erbe. 3Bir t)er:= mut^eten, ba§ ^art feine Slufgaben mc[)t fjaben tDiirbe. 3^dE) bacf)te bu iDerbeft balb guriicffe^ren. Qij tDiirbe gludli^er fein, iDenn id) ^iid^er unb greunbe ^citte. Qd) iDiirbe mel^r 23ergnugen ^aben, irenn ntetne @d)tx)eftern t)ier iDciren. !©u iDurbeft mcf)t fo reid) fein, mnn bu ntd^t fo t)iele ®ef(i)dfte gemad^t ^tteft. SBenu §eiuri(^ @elb ^citte, U)urbe er biefe SJJeffer faufeu. Qd) tDurbe beiueu -©ruber be^ fudEien, menu t(^ ^dt l^dtte. SBtr tDiirbeu bid) nidjt tabelu, tneun bu fleipiger getrefeu mdreft. !Dein Dufel fagte mir, bu iDiirbeft morgen md)t tommeu. SBeli^eu t)on biefen Stodeu iniirbeft bu tDd^teu? JBem iDiirbet i^r eure -Slumen gebeu? SBa^ tDitrbeft bu fageu, wtnn id) meiu ^ferb t)erfaufte? Qd) U)ixrbe bir erlaubeu ju fpieleu, treuu hn beiue 2lufgabeu gemad^t l^dtteft. 2Beun bu ^dt ju lefeu ^citteft, tDitrbe i(^ bir eiu uii^Ii^e^ 33u(f) lei^eu. 3^ tDitrbe gern mit bir ge{)en, menu meiu ?e^rer e^ eriaubte; id) mu§ f)eute [uo(^] brei Sriefc fd^reibeu. Qd) bxadjtt bir geru beiue 33ud^er, treuu ic^ fie ij'dtk. ®eiu ^ater tpdre je^t reid), uieuu er meiueu SSorfd^Iag befolgt Ijdttt, ©u ^dtteft 9Je(J)t, tDeuu n^ir iu grau!rei(^ mdreu. Qd) fdjidte bir meiueu S^ieuer, meuu er uid)t au^gegaugeu lt)dre. )i&tnn toix in !l)eutfc^laub n)ot)uten, fo ^dtteft bu uid^t fo t)iel ®elb t)erIoreu. 9Benn bu bic^ iu Slc^t genommen l^dtteft, fo tt)drft bu je^t uid)t frauL Seine greuube fonuteu bir mdjt fo Diel ®elb gebeu, wznn fie uid^t reid^ tDdren. Qd) modjte nad) J)eutfd)(aub reifeu, voenn id) meljr ©efb l^dtte. ®u fdnuteft bein ®ef(^dft fortfeijeu, menu bu t)orfid)tiger mdreft. ®r fonnte gefunb fein, tomn er eiuen 5lrgt gel^abt ^dtte, — 67 — Qi^x mii^tet rcit^er fetn, tDcnn i^r f^jarfam getoefen todxtt SBcnn bu meinem yiai)bav ni(^t ®elb gegeben ^dtteft, miigte er fein $aue Derfaufen, 2Benn tDtr jmet ©timmeu (votes) met;r ge^abt \)dtkn, fo ^atte bein SSater 9te^t ge^abt. 102. We thought that the enemy (pi. ) would retreat to the Rhine. Charles did not doubt that you would return in five or six days. The inhabitants wished that the government would establish a new post-office. All citizens expected that the President would confirm these resolutions. We were afraid that you might choose the wrong (unred^t) way. Louisa would be much, (fe^r) pleased if she had these flowers. Henry would not have so many friends if he were not so kind (gut) and diligent. We should not yet have (be) arrived if we had not received a letter from your father. We should not have sold our house if my father had done more business (pi.). The teacher would blame thee if thou hadst not done thy exercises. I should not believe it if thou hadst not seen it. If I had money I should buy a pound of cherries. If you would tell me where Mr. N. lives, I would give you two dollars. Would you be- lieve that I had done this ? Would you do me this favor if I allowed you to amuse yourself this evening? I would do it willingly if I had time. You might be rich now if you had been more cautious in your afi'airs. Thou mightest live now in a palace (@d)(o^) if thou hadst followed my advice. If we should receive reinforcements, we could beat the enemy. They could not have defended (t)ertl^eibigt) themselves if my brother had not helped (gel^olfen) them. If they had (were) departed yesterday, they ought to be here now (now here). If you had followed your [own] advice, you would be obliged now to leave the country. I should like to build this house for you if you would (were willing to) pay more money. We should like to follow thy advice, if it were possible. [ Use the imperfect in- stead of conditional in the following sentences], 1 should bring you your pictures to-morrow if they were done (fertig). They would have sent your money a week ago if they had had it. If you had arrived later, you would not have found us in — 68 — town. If I were riot sick, I should visit you. If thou hadst changed thy resohitions, thou wouldst not have lost thy money. Thou wouldst be lost now if I had not saved (gerettet) tliee. If you had had less money, you would have been more economical. 103. StuSge^eu, to go out. id) gc^c an^, I go out; bu ge!)ft an^, thou goest out; er gel)t am, he goes out; tt)ir geljett auS, we go out; il^r ge^t an^, you go out; tie gc^cn aus, they go out. oufmac^en, to open; gumad)en, to shut; 5^rucfici)icfen, to send back; Unterrid)t ne^men, to take lessons; anflopfen, to knock (at a door); aufmad)en, to awake; ftubiren, to study; abfc^reiben, to copy; mitt^eilen, to communicate; onjiel)en, to put on; erfranfen, to faU sick; auf^oren, to cease; onfangen, to begin, to commence; . gefle^en, to confess; etnfe^en* (etnc (Sa^e), to be awnre (of a thing); ftc^ anftetben, to dress (one's self); auffte{)en, to rise (from bed or a fall, etc.); aufgel^en, to rise (from the sun, moon, etc.); unterge^en, to set (of the sun, etc.); tjor^ie^en, to prefer; bie '^madjxidjt, the news; bic ©emo^n^eit, the habit; bie ^ommobe, the chest of drawers; bie 9^eife, the journey; bie @ad^e, the thing; bie UntDiffen^eit, the ignorance; fd^ttjarj, black; friil^, early. Obs. — 1 . Verbs having for prefixes syllables that do not occur as words by themselves, are called inseparable coMPOum) verbs. Such prefixes are bcJ ge, ent (emp), er, tier, ger. Most other prefixes of verbs are particles (espeT cially prepositions) which also occur as separate words. Verbs compoundec^ with these are called separable compound verbs. The most usual of thesi particles are: ah, an, auf, au§, bei, mit, uadj, t»or, gu, guriicf, ettt, fort, and th^ compound particles with Ijtx and ^in (f)ert)or, ^erauf, etc.). 2. The prefixes of the. separable compound verbs are detached fromthd simple verb in the present, imperfect and imperative, if they stand in orl dinary (see Obs. 4) sentences. The detached prefixes are removed to the en men, ba fie t)on ben geinben befefet ift (or n^irb). 110. I am envied by my friends, but thy merits are acknowled- . ged by all. The king is deceived by his servants*. The President is daily overwhelmed by applications of every kind. We are overwhelmed with work (plur. in German) which has been in our hands for a year. These books are no more read. What text-books are used in your school ? Are the Poles loved or hated by the Russians? Is your work finished? It is not yet finished, but it shall (fotlen) be finished presently. I am surprised that your father should have given (transl. has given) this permission. Are you not convinced that these plans will succeed ? The inhabitants say that they are abundantly supplied with victuals. How is the city of New York supplied with victuals ? The railroad-trains and steam- boats convey (bringen) them daily to the city. My watch is now repaired; the watchmaker has sent it back to me. My watch is now (being) repaired by the watchmaker. Is thy wound not healed yet ? The streets of our city are now being graded and paved. When the shops are filled with purchasers, (the) trade is fiourishing. If that work cannot be continued by you, it must be finished by your brother. You are deserted by your friends because they are always insulted by ^ you. We are delighted that your diligence is now better rewarded than** it was formerly the case. Since you are occupiedf * S3ebtente is a menial servant; 2)tener comprises aU kinds of servants. A servant of God, etn ^ n e d) t @otte§. Otherwise ^tTed)t is used of the lowest kinds of servants, ** %l^, than, throws the following: verb to the end of the clause. t To occupy is rendered by befeljeti, if it means to take possession : but by be{d)dfttgen, if it refers to work. ^ — n — with too many engagements (Slrbeit), we shall appoint another assistant. My brother is expected by his friends while he is expecting them. Our soldiers were obliged to attack the enemy (plur.) in order not to be attacked by them. This man is endowed with the highest talents. The city is everywhere surrounded with villas and vineyards. 111. Imperfect Indicative Passive: \6) ttJUrbe* getobt, I was praised; bu iDurbefl gelobt, thou wast praised; cr IDurbc gelobt, he was praised; tore ft)urben gelobt, we were praised; \\fc ttjurbet gelobt, you were praised; ftc ftjurben gelobt, they were praised. Present Subjunctive Passive : id^ ttJerbe (bu iDerbefi, er UJCrbe etc.) gelobt. Imperfect Subjunctive Passive : t(^ tuiirbe (bu ttJUrbejl, er tDUrbc etc.) gclobt. Obs 1. The imperfect indicative passive is formed by the auxiliary ttjurbe, the imperfect of the verb tDerben, to become, whose subjunctive is ttjurbc. The imperfect subjunctive passive is easily distinguished from the active conditional, the auxiliary iriirbe in the latter being construed with the infinitive, and in the former with the past participle of the verb. 2. Instead of the ordinary passive with iDerben in these tenses and moods, a passive with f e t n is used under the same circumstances as in the present indicative (No. 109, Obs. 2): Imperfect Indicative: id) Wax geliebt, I was loved; Present Subjunctive : id) jet geliebt (generally translated by the past tense); Imperfect Subjunctive: \&j xtyaxt geliebt. S)er !?aben Vdax gefdjloffen, the shop was closed, if it means that the shop was a closed one, as a result of its having been closed before. But: ber ?aben tt) ur b e gefd^loffen, if the act of closing is described (the shop was being closed). If the action itself and its re3ulting state are not distinguished, we generally use the auxiliary ttJurbc in the imperfect. 3. The use of the subjunctive passive is the same as that of the cor- responding active tenses (No. 99. 101.) Hbl^aucn (strong verb), to cut down; bebecfett, to cover; abtragen (strong)^ to pull down; bebrol^en, to threaten; anreben, to address; be'^anbeltt, to treat; auf fatten (strong), to delay; beldftigen, to molest; bcbaueru, to regret; bertd^ten, to report; * In higher style the form \6) h) ar b is used instead of \6) iuurbe, in the singular. — 78 — bcftcgctt, to defeat; bett)unbern, to admire; * einlaben (strong), to invite; cntbedfen, to discover; ernd^ren, to support; crhjeifen (part, erftjiefcn), to prove; fortrdumen, to remove; qudlen, to torment; fd)Uegeu (part, gefd^loffen), to close; ftoren, to disturb; troften, to console; *utiternc^ten, to instruct; Derldumben, to slander; tjermiet^en, to rent; berfel^eit (strong), to provide; toerurt^eiien, to condemn; Dermatten, to administer; h)ieber aufbauen, to rebuild; ber 5(bi)0Cat (weak decl.), the lawyer; ber 5lngrtff, the attack; bag Sluge, the eye; ber 5lnge!(agtc, the accused; ber 53a^n^of, the railroad station; ber Pettier, the beggar; bte 33e(agerung, the siege; ber Sigent^iimer, the owner; bag (Sinfommen, the income; bte ^mnalfmt, the revenue;' ber ©aft, the guest; ber ©efangene, the prisoner; bag §inbemt6, the obstacle; bie ^anonabe, the cannonade; bte ?eute (pi), the individuals; ber SD^arjd^, the march; bte $artet, the party; ber ^ftduber, the robber; ber 9^td^ter, the judge; ba^ ®d)ieferbad^, the slate-roof; bte ©d^ittbel, the shingle; bag @d)iff, the ship; bie @(f)ulb, the guilt, the debt; ber ©eerduber, the pirate; bie @prad)e, the language; bag 35erbre(i)eit, the crime; ber SSuttbarj^t, the surgeon; betrdd)tli^, considerable; beutfd), German; buntei, dark; fro^, glad; ieer, empty; ^)rdd)ttg, magnificent; fd)recflid^, terrible; . bort, there; nidjt einmal, not even. Qn me(cf)em 3a^re unb Don tDem tt)urbe 2lmerifa entbcdt ? SBcr, xoax ber 9)?ann, tion bem bu ^eute in ber ^amiltonftra^e angerebet iDurbeft ? 3l(^ id) no(^ SBien retfte, n)urbe id) nhtvaU t)on Settlem belafttgt. SBa^renb bn t)on betnen greunben beiDunbert tDurbeft, n)urben n)ir t)on unfern g^etnben t)erldnmbet. ^d) wax erftaunt, ha^ Wix noc^ ntd)t^ t)on btr ge^ort l^atten. !l)ie §aufer biefer ^tat)t toaxm bamate mit ®(i)tnbeln bebecft; je^t finbet man bort nnr (Bdjk^ ferbac^er. SDtein greunb getgte mir an, ba^ feine 233nnbe wod) nic^tj ge^eilt fet; er fitgte fjinjn, ba^ er Don feinem SBnnbarjte fe^r (tjieOj geqnalt raerbe. 9)ietne ^riiber in S3er(in t^eiften mir mit, ba^ ficj faft tdglic^ Don beinen grennbcn eingelaben tniirben/ 3Benn id) Don meinen geinben ge^^t tDlirbe, fo iDiirbe id) fie nic^t l^affen, fonbemi Keben. SBenn id) Don meinen grennben Derlaffen n^are, fonnte id)\ mid) nid)t kid)t troften. ^c^ n^iirbe fe^r frol^ fein, tDenn btefej — 19 — |)inbenttffc f ortgcrauntt tt^Urben. 3116 btcfer Srtef gefdEirieben tonxbt, toaixn bie 3lugen, bit i^n lefen fotlten (were to), fdjon gef cutoff en. 'Der ^ngetfagte murbe bon ben 9tid^tern berurt^eilt, h)eil ba^ 9Ser* bretfien emiefen lt)ar, unb feine @(^ulb nid^t bejtDeifelt* iDerben fonntc, 112. The Russians were defeated by the English in the battle of (bei) Inkerman. The city was threatened with a siege, but the threat was treated with contempt by the inhabitants**. The city was threatened with a siege [ever] since the third of March. In what year wast thou sent to Germany by thy friends? The prisoners were defended by able lawyers. In what battle were you wounded ? When I departed from the city, I was accompanied by my friends to the railroad station. I was astonished when I heard that my friend Charles was not invited. When we were sailing (reifen) to Europe, our ship was pursued by a pirate. While you were instructed by Mr. Reiley, I was studying Ahn's Grammar of the German Language. We were obliged to quit our house because it was repaired. At that time all hotels of the city were filled with guests, but now they are empty. When it was dark, a terrible cannonade was opened (eroffnen) by the enemy. Was thy wound healed or not when thou wast returning to the city ? It was not healed then, but it was treated by the surgeon. The general reported that his march was being delayed by attacks of the enemy. My friend declared that he was abundantly provided with money. He said that he was daily molested by individuals who were disturbing him in his work. If my debts were paid (beja^Ien), my income would be sufficient to support me. I would regret very much if these beautiful trees were cut down. Were your streets at that time in good condition (bet ©tanb) ? No, they were not even paved; but they are being paved now. If your * in the passive to doubt must be translated by be;;tt)etfettt, not by gmeifeln. ** All those adjuncts of the verb which complete its idea, mugt bo placed after the passive agent. / — 80 — house were rented, your revenues would increase (themselves) considerably. Would we pay fewer taxes, if our city were [being] administered by your party? If you were attacked by robbers, would you defend yourself or not? The house was pulled down by the owner in order to be rebuilt more magnificently. 113. Perfect Indicative Passive: xi) bttt gelobt iDOrben, I have been praised; bu btft getobt tDorben, thou hast been praised; er tft gelobt toorben, he has been praised; Xoxx finb getobt irorben, we have been praised; \\)X feib gelobt toorben, you have been praised; fie finb gelobt toorbeit, they have been praised. Perfect Subjunctive Passive: id) fei gelobt tnorben, bu fetft (er fet, \mx feieu, etc.) gelobt njorben. Pluperfect Indicat. Passive: i(^ rtjar getobt ttiorbett, I had been praised; • bu trarft getobt roorben, thou had^t been praised; er Voax getobt toorben, he had been praised; irir Ujoren getobt iDorben, we had been praised; \\)X tt>aret getobt toorben, you had been praised; fte luaren getobt tnorben, they had been praised. Pluperfect Subjunct. Passive: \6) trdre getobt irorben, bu tt)dreft (er tt)dre, -etc.) getobt trorben. Obs. — 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive are formed by the perfect (tc^ bin tt)orben) and the pluperfect (id) Xoax irorben) of trerbenf (to become), in connection with the past participle of the verb. 2. The rules No. 99, Obs. 5 and 6, as to the use of the subjunctive and its tense after verbs of believing, stating^ etc., are applicable to the passive voice, the same as to the active: er gtaubte, 'ixi'^ \6) in ber (Sd)tac!^t Der* ttjunbet tnorben fei ober it) a r e , he believed that I had been wounded in battle. 3. The pluperfect subjunctive is often used in hypothetical periods with the force of the English potential with should (would) have (or should tvotdd have been in the passive): See No. 101, Obs. 2: id^ 1^ d tit i^u g ef el^ en; t The verb ttjerben, if not an auxiliary, takes the augment in the parti- ciple: id) bin g e tt)orben, I have become; id) tvax g e tnorben, I had become. — 81 — I shmld have seen him; er lt» S r c tion mtr gefe^ctt tcorbeti^he wovld have been seen by me. 4, In ordinary sentences the pbrfeot is frequently used in German, when in English only the simple past tense would be proper: t(^ b t n geftertl in hex @tabt g e tt) e f e n , I was yesterday in town. 5, The conjunction ctfteris translated by the German conjunction nadj* htm, and the conjunction before by el)e, betior. All these require the verb to be placed at the end of the clause: nad^betnid) t^n gel^ort ^attc, after I had heard him; nad^bemtrgetobtet tDorben tnar^f after he had been killed; e^e (bet)or) er angefangen ^atte, before he had commenced. 5lu«ful^ren, to execute; ' bie S3urgfd)aft, the bail, ( to give benac^ndjtigen, to inform; bail, ^iirgjd) aft leiften); befeittgen, to remove; bk ©ntfc!^dbigung(sing,), the damages; corrtgtren, to correct; i)a^ geuer, the fire; entlaffetl (strong v.), to dismiss; ber ^Iciger, the plaintiff; cntmut^tg en, to discourage; bie SJJii^e, the trouble; Ipftegen, to nurse; ber ^ro^eg, the law-suit; ^rotefttren, to protest; bte ^rafibentfd^aft, the presidency; *iiberfenben, to send over; ber 9latl)geber, the adviser; *iibertragen(stvong), to confer (upon); bie @telle, the place; toer^aften, to arrest; ber 'Xelegra^^ (weak d,),the telegraph; Derlangen, to demand; bte 3Sa^I, the election; t)erratt)en (strong), to betray ; ber 2Bed)f et, the note (bill of exchange) ; bortaben (strong), to summon; ber ^^^^^^^^t^r ^^^ custom-house tuarnen, to warn; officer; 5lnbrea^, Andrew; attattttfi^, Atlantic; ber ^uftrag, the order; tiergeblicf), in vain; bie ^an!, the bank; gn)eifelf)aft, doubtful. Qi) bin t)on metnem ge^rer geftraft morben, iDeil id) biefe 9Iufga^ ben abgef(f)rieben I)abe. S^-n btft Don betnem Dnfel be(of)nt tDorben, ttjeil bn feine U^r gefnnben Ijaft. ^einrid) tft fitr [eine Wn\}C ni(i)t beIo!)nt tDorben. 35ie[e 9tac^rirf)t tft am t)on §errn TloU niitget^eilt n)orbcn. 3Son mem ift biefe 2lnf gabe corrigtrt iDorben ? d^ ift mix gefagt ttjorben, ba^ ©te einen Sebienten fndjen. ©tefe ^ad)xid}t ift un^ bnrc^ (by) ^cn atlantifi^en 3:elegrap^en iiberfanbt inorben. S)iefe6 ®elb ift mir geja^It n)orben, nat^bem ii^ e^ ^tDeimal bergeblicf) Dertangt ^atte. 5Ra(^bem ber ^riifibent Lincoln getobtet tDorben toar^ t In such passive constructions the participle tt)orben is sometimes omitted: naci)bem er getobtet rt)ar. — 82 — tourbe btc ^rafibetttft^aft Slnbrea^ G'o^ttfon iibcrtragcn. SBer pflcgte eud^r al6 il)r in ber @(f)Iad)t t)erti)unbet morben mart? £arl be^ l^auptete, ba^ btefe 5yfa(^ricf)t tl^m Don feinen greitnben norf) m(f)t mit^ get^eift n^orben fet. Unfere ^tdm fonnten nic^t au^gefii^rt iDerben, nad^bem fie unfern ©egnern t)errat^en tDorben tDaren. SKeine greunbe glaubten, ba^ id) in ber@d^Ia(^t getobtet iDorben fei, ®te geinbetDer- mnt^eten, ba^ \m burd^ (by) nnfere 9Jieberiage entmutljigt iDorben' iDiiren* SBarum anttDortet il)r, ef)e i^r t)on enrem Server gefragt iDorben feib ? J)ie geinbe fIo{)en (fled), bet)or [no(^] ba^ gener t)on nnl eroffnet (opened) tt)orben iDar. 9Benn bn meinen dtatij befolgt tjdtteft, tDiirft bn nidjt t)on beinem ®egner bei (at) ber 2Sat)t be* fiegt niorben. S)iefer 23orfd)tag ircire Don inir nxi)t angenominen (accepted) tDorben, toenn id^ nic^t t)on meinen 9tat{)gebern getdnfc^t morben n^dre. 114. I have been informed that you have opened (eroffnet) a school in the city of New York. This debt has never been paid. Almost all custom-house officers have been dismissed by the President. Your note has been protested by the bank. After your cousin had been arrested, I was summoned by the judge in order to give bail for him. We continued our journey after these obstacles had been removed. William paid me a visit, before I had been informed that he was here. Before your orders had been executed, we heard that (the) war had been declared. Your brother stated in his letter that he had lost his law-suit and was condemned to pay damages to the plaintiff. It is doubtful whether I would have found bail, if I had been arrested. If I had been in your place, I should not have been defeated by my adversary. If you had had better advisers, you would have been warned by them. — 88 — 116. \i6) frcuen, to rejoice, to be glad. idf) freue mt(^, I rejoice, I am glad; id} l^abe tntd) gefreut, I have rejoiced; I have been glad, etc. ; bu freufl bid), thou art glad, etc.; bu ^aft bid^ gefreut, er freut fief), er Ijat fid) gefreut, mv freuen un§, ttJtr ^abett un^ gefreut, .i^r freut eud^, i^r ^abt eud) gefreut, fie freuen fid). fte l)aben fid^ gefreut. Obs. — 1. A great number of German reflexive verbs (construed with a reflexive pronoun) correspond to English neuter or passive verbs or to whole phrases: f id^ Derbreitcn, to spread; ft(^ tdufd^eu, to be disappointed; ftd^ Jcljen, to take a seat. The reflexive pronouns (unless governed by preposi- tions) are generally, but not always, in the accusative. In f ic!^ fd)meid)ehl, to flatter one's self, fid) eiubilben, to imagine, and several others the reflexive pronouns are datives: id) {d^mctd^Ie mir , etc. 2* The English compounds with self (myself, thyself, himself, etc.) , are not to be considered as reflexives if they qualify nouns or pronouns with BMPHATiCAL forcc. In this case they are rendered by the German indeclinable •fclbft (orfelber): 3(^ I)abe ben 3}iann felbft gefel^erf, I have seen the man himself; e r f e t b ft fagte e^, he said so himself; i 6) xotxbt f e I b ft ge^en, /shall go myself 3. If the English compounds with self have both a reflexi ve and emphat- ical force (which always is the case when reflexives have the rhetorical accent) , they are rendered by the German reflexives in connection with felbft: He has killed himself (and no other), er l)at f i (3^ f e I b ft getobtet; you must not praise yourselves (but others you may), i^r miifit euc^ nid)t f elb ft loben. 4:. The English reciprocals each other, one another are either translated by the indeclinable einanber, or, if no ambiguity can arise, by the reflexive pronouns either alone, or in combination with einanber: fie fd)impfen \id) , they abuse each other; trtr l)affen einanber, we hate each other; fie ftoreu f i (^ etnanber, they disturb each other. Often German reciprocal verbs are ex= pressed by neuter verbs in English: f t d^ treffen, to meet (one another); ft 6) (mit einanber) unterl)alten, to converse. ^bgel^en (al>gegangen), to leave (neuter fic^ begegnen, to meet; verb); befd^cibigen, to damage; jtd^ omiifiren, to enjoy one's self; ftdf) biiden, to stoop down; anbeuten, to intimate; banfen (with dative), to thank; ouf{)eben (aufge!^oben), to pick up; pd^ erinnern (with gen.), to remember; fid) aufl)a(ten (strong), to stay; jtd^ erfunbigen, to inquire; auSbrennen, to burn out; fid^ erfditen, to take a cold; fid^ befinben (befunben), to do, to be jtd^ ergeben (strong), to surrender (of the health); (one's self); — 84 — ftd) etnbttben, to imagine; fid) fiigetl, to submit; gcl)orrf)en (with dative), to obey, fatten (strong), to keep; l^erau^forbern, to challenge; fld^ ndl)ern, to approach; rcgieren, to govern; jic^ fe^en, to take a seat; treffen (getroffen), to hit; fid) trennen (to separate (from one another) ; *fxd) unterl)alten (strong), to converse; *unteiTid)ten, to instruct; *unterftiiljen, to support; fid) Uerbcugen, to bow (down); t)erpf(id)ten, to pledge; tierfcmicn, to misjudge; fid) Dcrfammeln, to assemble; tierurf ad) en, to cause; toemicfcin, to implicate; *fid) iDiberfet^en (with dative), to op- pose, to resist; tt)iebericl)CU (strong), to see again; fi(^ irunbern, to wonder; ^aijkn, to number; gugeben (strong), to concede;"] bic Slnforberutig, the demand; bie Hnorbniing, the regulation; ber ^u(pvud), the claim; ber 5Irgtt)0^n, the suspicion; htx 5(u0fd^u§, the board; ber iBeamte, the officer; haQ ©elbftiidf, the piece of money; ha^ ©efel^, the law; ber §inime(, Heaven; bie ^anonenfugel, the cannon ball; ba« SRitglieb (plur. 3Jiitgtieber), the member; bie £)brig!eit, the authorities; ber @d)aben, the damage; bie @i^ung, the session, meeting; bie Unternel^muttg, the enterprise; ber 35orfi^enbe, the chairman; bie.3uftimmung, the approbation, con- sent; ougerft, extreme; befannt, known (as adj.); beutUc^, distinct; gered^t, just; Iteb, dear; Tnel^rere, several; miibe, tired; ftrenge, severe; tobtlid), fatal; tno^t, well; \va^ iTiad^en (Sie, how is your health ? 3lbfc^ieb'nel)men, to take leave; fid) (dat.) iBeiregung (fem.) maditn, to take exercise; 33eifaE finben, to meet with favor. • (Suten 2:ag, tieber §)einrt^, Qd) frcite mid), bi(^ tDieberjufel^en. 5Bie befinbeft bu hid) ? Qd) befinbe mid) fel)r n)oI)I, feit id) in dim 3)orf tt)oI)ne. SBa^ m'ad)t bcin ©ruber ? 3ft er woijl ? Qa, er bc^* finbet fii^ fel)r n)oI)L Sa^ tl)uft bit, gubtDig ? Qd^ fleibe mit^ an. ^(eibet if)r end) nod) nid)t an ? Sir n)crben un^ fpater auHeiben. 211^ bie aiiitgtieber be§ 2lu§f(^uffe§ fid) t^erfammelt I)atten, iDurbe ha^ ^xototoU (the minutes) ber let^ten ©i^itng t3om SSorfiljcuben oerfe* fen.f SBir biidten un^ alle, urn nid)t Don ben ^anonenfugeln getrof^ fen ju trierben. SS3arum ^aft bu bid) nid}t erfunbigt, trmin berCSifen^* t To read, lefen, nortefen, ablefen, Oerlefen. The simple verb Ie(en de- notes reading in general; the compounds denote io read aloud. In the sentence ftbove the simple verb would be improper. — 85 — bafinjug abge^t? Sir fjaben un$ nod) meittaf^ ben Slnorbnungen ber Obrtgteit n)iberfe^t. Sir erinnern un^ bie)e§ 2)ianne^ feljt beut(id). grinncrt tl)r tnd) nidjt, bafe il)r eu(^ Derppt(i)tet I)attet, ben ©efefeen }U ge^ordien? Sir ()aben felbft nidjt geglaubt, ba^ bie 2KitGlieber fi{^ biefen Slnforbcrnngcn fiigen iDiirben. Sir frenten nn^, ate ttjtr I)ortcn, ba^ @ie felbft nnjere 5lnfprii(^e nnterftU^en tnitrben^ ©ein 2?ater fetbft ift in biefe aingelegenljcit t)ern)i(felt iDorben. Ql)v mii^t felbft anerfennen, ba§ nieine 3lntrdge gered)t finb* §elft end) felbft, bann (then) tt)irb ber §immel end) I}c(fen. ®n Dernrtljeilft btd^ fetbft, menn bn bie^ jngibft. Sann trerben wix nn^ ipieberfel)en? & wax nidjt belannt, ba^ biefe §erren fid) f^on fennen. ®ie Wdn^ ner ndl)erten fid) einanber o()ne ^rgn)oI)n. ^arl nnb Sin)e(m fnd)en fid) einanber [fd}on] feit tdnger (for more) afe einer @tnnbe. Sari nnb id) begegneten nn^ geftern breimat in ber ©tra^e, .9?e^mt iel^t 3lbfd)ieb t)on einanber, liebe Sinbcr, i()r miij^t end^ trennen; i()r ()abt feine 3cit ^^i}^'r ^i^ti) ntit einanber gn nnter^atten. Qd) glanbe, ba^ tt)ir nn§ einanber berfannt f)aben ; tt)ir irolten fiinftig (for the future) gnte grennbe fein. 116. Were you not extremely glad when you heard that this war had been finished (beenben) ? I have staid here for more than three months. How did you enjoy yourself in my brother's company? The enemy did not oppose the march of our army. Doest thou not remember my older brother ? Re- member, my son, that our days are numbered ! How do you do, Charles? I am not very well, I have t%ken a cold. I do not wonder; you take too little exercise. I bowed, when I recognized the President. The ambassador bowed, in order to intimate his approbation. Why doest thou stoop down? In order to pick up a small piece of money that I have lost. I imagined that my enterprise would meet with more favor; but I was mistaken. Why do you not take a seat ? You must be tired. I thank you, I cannot stay [any] longer. What damage has been caused by this fire ? Several rooms are burned out, but the house itself has not been damaged much. Have you not conceded ygurself that this city must — 86 — surrender soon and cannot keep (itself) much longer? Hare you heard this of the President or of one of his officers f ? I have seen myself that the accused has beaten the boy. Who has instructed your brother ? Nobody, he has instructed himself. You must never be more severe with others than with yourself. Those that cannot govern others, -cannot govern themselves. Will you not send a servant in order to buy these things ? No, it is better that I go myself. Po you know if these peoplej know each other? The two soldiers wounded each other; but their wounds were not fatal. We have met to-day, but did not recognize one another. Do you know that two members of the Senate have challenged each other ? Mr. Nollet and I have conversed (for) two hours (with each other). 117. 1. @S regnet, it rains; eS ft^ttctt (jd^tieet), it snows; e§ frtert, it freezes; c§ bUt^t, it lightens; e§ bonnert, it thunders; eS tagt, the day breaks; e§ flopft, Bomebody knocks; e§ Idutet, the beU rings; eS ift fait, it is cold; e§ ttnrb !alt, it begins to be (is getting) cold. - ttttd^, I am hungry; 2. x6) frtere or e8 friert 1 f cold; id^ fdimi^e . . '. ,, eg jc^tDt^t perspiring; idj^ungere, idj bin ^ungrtg, i)abe §unger ,, eg ^ungert \6) burfte, id) bin burfttg, ^abc S)urft ,,e8bnrftetj thirsty; id) bin ttjarm L warm. 3. 2Bag ifl 31^nen?- what ails you, what is the matter with you? 2Bie tfi 3l^nen ? how do you feel ? (58 ifl tntr c8 iDirb mtr latt, xoaxm, tt)Ot)I, untt)o^I, lib el, . fc^njtnbltg, I feel I begin to feel ' cold; warm; well; unwell; sick in my stomach; giddy. ^g tfl mtr, alS ob . . (with subjunctive), I feel (it seems to me) as if eg fommt" mtr tJOr, { ^^|^^ ; ; ^^.^j^ g^^. ^^ it appears (seems) to me [ *f j*^; ; t Officer is translated by S3eamte, if a civU officer is meant; an officer of the army is translated by Officter» X This people, btejeg ^olf; these peoples, bicfe iBolIer; these people (mdiYiduals), blefc !i?eute. — 87 — 4. eS orgcrt mtd^, ' angry, displeased, e§ e!e(t mxdf, disgusted, eg t)erbrie6t mi(f) (part vexed, irritated, Derbroffen), ' e§ njunbert mid) (tdft munbre mid^), eg freut mid), eg tft mir bog, ..lam (tt)cnn)... ■ astonished, glad, pleased. that. •(iO « lieb (ic^ freue mic^), eg betrubt mid), eg tf)Ut grieved, sorry, mir (eib, eg fc^mergt mic^, J 5, x^ (irgere mid), id) bin ' draerUd|, td) etie mid), angry, displeased, ' treit, (ba^) disgusted, id) bin Derbrieglid), ioj bin betriibt, id^ bin ' I feel, (am) vexed, imtated. • becau grieved, sorry, tranrig, sad, Obs.-1. The number of impersonal expressions is considerably larger in German than in English. Almost every German sentence, not having a mere personal pronoun for a subject, may be cast into an impersonal form, in which case the subject must be placed after the verb: eg rottt ber Conner, the thunder rolls; eg tvax bieg ein nener iBenjeig, bag. . this was a new proof, that. . The impersonal form is generally preferred if indefinite substantives are the subjects: eg flopft 3»emanb, somebody knocks; eg ift 9^iemanb ha, nobody is there; eg ift ein gener anggebrod^en, a fire has broken out. 2, Those impersonal expressions that are construed with an accusative or dative (enumerated No 2, 3, and 4) frequently begin with their accusatives or datives in which instance the impersonal eg is generally dropped : mi(^ fricrt, I am cold; mid^ bnrftet, I am thirsty; mir ift unttJOl^I, I feel unwell. Those impersonals enumerated No. 4 always drop the eg, if the dependent clause (with bag or tt)enn) is placed at the beginning of the sentence; other- wise the eg is more generally retained: mir t^nt j[eg) leib, ha^, etc., I am sorry that, etc; but: bag @ie nid)t tommen, tl^ut mir leib, I am sorry that you do not come. Those expressions enumerated No. 1 never drop the eg. Stugfe^en (bn fte^jl ang), to look (with a clause or with an adjective) ; bet)err(d^en, to rule over; bred)en (part, gebrod^en), to break; belten, to bark; ge^en (gegangen), to walk, to step; l^eigen, to warm (heat) the rooms, build a fire (in the stove); l^errfd^en, to rule, to prevail; lanfen (strong v.), to run; mitbringen, to bring along; 9^ot^ leiben, to suffer; reid)en, to hand; tjerfcinmen (strong), to miss; toerftel^en, to understand; tooriiberge^en (strong), to pass; tndrmen, to warm (a person); tie S^re, the honor; baQ ©etnttter, the thunder-storm; baS 5Serf^red^en, the promise; ber topfic^mera (pi. bie to^ffdimerseii), bie Ui1ad)e, the cause; the headache; ber iBeftwinb, the west-wind; bie §au^tl)iir, the street-door; bunfet, dark; bie lt^ran!l}eit, the sickness; getDo^nlid), ordinary, common; bie 9^ad)t, the night; ^ ^erglid^, sincere; ber @clat)e, the slave; nag, wet; bie @id)erl)eit, the safety; untreu, faithless; ba§ ©d^neeluetter, the snow-storm; burd)aug nid)t, not at all; bie ®umme, the sum; Dielleidjt, perhaps; (bag) XI}autt)etter, a thaw; ^eute (5(benb), l^eute CUfla^^t), to-night; bag S)atertanb; one's own country, fatherland; einmal,r^"^(^P^^^*^^^)- (S§ ift f(^ted)teg ^Better, there is a storm; it is bad weather. (SSift Oftiutnb, the wind is east., 2)ie ®efd)dfte cje^en fd)Ied)t, business is dull. (S8 betrifft (past. part, betroffen) miCtj (mi^ bctrifft) ein Unfatt (m.) I meet with an accident. SRegnet e^? S^3 regnet nod^ nid^t, aber e^ mirb foglett^ anfangen ju regnen. @>3 I)at bie ganse )!fta(i)t gefc^nett. Sir merben tnorgen ©d^neetnetter I)aben. (5^ iDirb fait, wiv miiffen balb ein(}ei5en. SBirb e^ ittorgen frieren ? 9Jein, e^ t^irb Sl^aumetter fein* ^aben ©ie fic^ [f^on] getDdrmt? Sleiti, icf) brauc^e mi(^ m(i)t ju lijarmen; e^ ift mir buri^au^ nid)t fait, 9Ba^ ift bir, Sari? Su fie^ft bla^ am, d^ ift mir nur ein tDenig iibel; e^ iDirb balb t)oritbergeI)en. 2Bie ift bir je^t? Wiv tpirb beffer, irf) I)abe nur [nod}] ein t^enig topffi^merjen. a^ fc^eint, ba^ e^ 3^nen fd)n3inblig ift. 9Zein, id) t^ill 3^nen offen geftel)en, ba^ id) §nnger I)abe. T)nrftet end), Sinber? (g^3 t^nt mir leib, ba^ fein 9Baffer in nnferm §anfe ift. 2iSie fiel^ft bu an^, §ein^ rid)? bnfd^iDi^eft; bn l^aft gett)iB (I suppose) jn ftarf (much) ge^ Idnfen? S^ wax mir, al^ ob id) einen §nnb bellen l^orte, nnb id^ ^orte ni(^t anf gn lanfen, bi^ i^ in @id)er^eit tDar. 9Ba^ (at -what) t)erbrie^t hid}? Qd) bin drgerlid), ineil id) ^ente jmeimal in meiner Slrbeit geftort morben bin. @^ l)at mic^ nie me^r ge^nngert, al^ geftern. 2}iid) bnrftet fe^r, 2JJntter, id) mod)te (No. 101, Obs. 3) ein ®Ia§ SBaffer f)aben. S5enn i^r I)nngrig iDdret, iDiirbet it)r ener j ©rot gegeffen ^aben. d^ iDnnbert mid^ bnrdE)an^ nid^t, ba^ ©ie bie^J nid)t t)erftel)en. griebrid) ber (Sro^e fagte, ba^ e§ i^n efele, @clat)en JU be^errfd)en. @^ drgert midE), ba^ ic^ geftern bie SSorlefung t)erJ — 80 — fciumt ^abe. ?freut e^ ®ie Dtelleiiiit, ba^ 3!)re greunbe 9lot^ (eibctt mitffen? 9^ein, e^ t^ut mtr ^erjUtf) leib, aber ic^ !ann it)nen nic^t l)etfen; ii^ ^abe nii^t^, ma^ ic^ tf)nen geben fonnte. (5^ tDar un§ (iu^erft lieb, ba^ tl)r ^^apter unb gebern mitgebrac^t ^attet 3rf) bin be* triibt, meil id) meinen ^^iSroseg Derloren f)abe. SBarum bift butraurtg? SBeit bie ®efd)afte jd)(ed)t ge^en. Sag ^^^re grau Tlntkv mi)t (auger bet un^ bteiben fann, tf)ut un^ fef)r leib (to be transposed in English). S)a§ beiueu 23ater eitt fo grower Unfalt betroffen t)at, be* trubt mid^ fe^r. SBitrbe e§ eu(^ nid)t [(^merjen, i^enn cure ®o^ne i^rem a3ater(anbe imtreit iDciren ? S'ommt e^ bir nic^t t)or, afe ob e^ geHopft f)atte? 3ft betn ©ruber fleiBig? (Sr ift fet)r fleiBtg; e^ fanu S^temaub fletBiger feiu, afe er. d^ fterbeu j;e|t me^r 2J?eufdjeu, aU geu)d{)u(i(^; tDa^ ift bie Urfadje? d^ f)errfd)eu ie^t me^r ^raut l^eiten a(^ e^emat^. 118. Is it going to rain ? No, it will snow. Will there be a storm to-night ? I believe not, the wind is west. Are you afraidf when it lightens and thunders? No, I am not afraid of (t)or with a dative) a thunder-storm. Our journey was J not finished till the day broke (aubred)eu). It will soon begin to be da^rk; you must lock the street-door, John. It begins to storm, Charles; we must run if we do not want (iDoIIeu) to be thorougly (burc^ uub bur^) wet. Why do the bells ring-? There must be a fire in the city. I should be very sorry, if that were the case. I am very hungry, let me have (gib mir) a piece of bread. You will be thirsty if you take (effeu) too much salt. Do you (already) heat your rooms? It has not been cold enough (in order) to heat [them], but we shall build a fire to-night. Do you feel un- well, Charles ? It appears to me as if you looked sick. You are right, I have taken a cold. If this is so, you must walk into the room, and warm yourself. No, I thank you, I cannot stay; 1 feel too warm already. I begin to feel unwell, will (iDoHeu) you have the kindness to hand me a glass of water ? f lam afraid, foUowed by that is translated by idj fiiri^te; ^Iso, if fiird^teil is followed by an accusative. But the neuter verb to be a/raid is rendered by flcl^ furd)ten. X SBuvbe or war ? — 90 — What ails you to-day ? You look as if you had met with an accident. I have (impersonally) met with no accident; butf I feel angry because I have m'issed the railroad train. I felt vexed because Charles had broken his promise. What is the matter with your friend ? He feels sorry because he has lost a large sum of money. I am pleased [to hear] that you are well again. I was glad that William had not followed your advice. Nobody has wished yet (to be expressed impersonally) that he should have acted badly (translate: to have acted badly). My friend writes me (impersonally) that he is expect- ing you. Once upon a time lived a great man (impersonally) who owned (befa^) large palaces (Sd^Io^No. 55) and gardens. ll'9. Infinitive. treff ett, to hit. Past Participle, Qetroffcit. Present Indicative, id) treffe, bu triff fl, er trifft, \mx treffcrt, il^r trefft, fte treffen. Present Subjunctive. \6) treffe, bu treffeft, er treffe, etc. Imperfect Indicative, td) traf, h\x trafft, er traf, \mx trafen, i^r traft, fie trafen. Imperf. Subjunctive. \6) trdfe, bu trcifeft, er trdfe, njir trafen, t^r trdfet, jte trdfen. Imperative. tx\% trcfft Obs. — 1. The strong verbs, a list J of which is attached to the Second Part have the foHowing peculiarities: a) The first pers. imperf. indie, takes no ending, but changes the radi- cal vowel. The past participle retains either the vowel of the infinitive, or takes that of the imperfect, or a vowel different from 'both: fd)tagen, fd^Iug, ge|tf)lagen; fed^ten, fod^t, gefod^ten; fterben, ftorb, geftorben. b) The imperf. subj. adds the ending e to its indicative, softening the radicals a, 0, u into ix, o, ii. c) Most strong verbs with the radicals a and o soften these vowels in the second and third pers. indicative (id^ fd^tage, bu fd^ldgft, er fd)tdgt); and most of those with the radical e change this vowel into i in the same persons, and in the singular ofthe imperative, dropping at the same time their final e in the latter mood, some of them doubling the final consonant: geben, gib; ne{)Tnen, nimm. Some other strong verbs (for instance laffen, tag), drop like- wise the final e of the imperative. If strong verbs with any of these radicals i' ^ber or fonbern ? Does I fed angry ? correct the previous clause ? J The strident should look for every strong verb in the list before at- tempting to use it. Since none of the many compounds of strong verbs are given in" the list, the mode of their conjugation must be ascertained by look- ing for the corresponding simple verbs. I — 91 — end in bctt or ten (t^cn), they drop the c of their endings in the second and third pers. pres» indic», those in ten and tl^en generally dropping also the t of the ending in the third' pers.: vatljm, rat^ft, rcit^; treten, trtttft, tritt. d) Of irregular formation are: tl^un, t^at, getl^an; ge^en, ging, gegangen; fte!^en, panb, geftanben, 2. Several German verhs governing an infinitive without ju, are to- gether with their infinitives rendered by single verbs or various phrases* Such verbs are: fpagteren ge^en, to take a walk; fte^en btetbcn, to stop; fallen laffen, to drop; lennen lernen, to become acquainted with. Only the last of these infinitives (being the governing verbs) are conjugated, and must in the simple tenses of ordinary sentences precede their dependent infinitives : id^ ge^c fpaj^ieren, td^ blieb ftel^en, etc. ^nneljmen, to accept, to take; auffc^reiben, to write down; befel)len, to command; bitten, to request, to beg; betaujd)en, to watch; einneljmen, to occupy, to carry; fi(i) erj^redcn, to be frightened, to be scared; Ptel^en, to flee; gelten, to be esteemed, to be worth; etmaS gelten, to be for something; f al^ren, to ride (on a vehicle) ; nad^geben (with dat.), to yield; ratten, to advise; flatt finben, to take place; jlerben, to die; fd^Iafen, to sleep; fdjeinen, to shine; bergeffen, to forget; ber ©tgentl^ilmcr, the owner; bie grei^eit, the liberty; bai8 ©ebirge, the mountain-chain; bie ©efangennal^nte, the capture; bie ©ettJatt, the force; ber ©Idnbiger, the creditor; bie ^offnung, the hope; bie (£taf jtfer, the classics; bie Orbnung, the order; ber SReiter, the horseman; bie @petfe, the food; bie ©tarfe, the strength; bie ©tettung, the position; ber ^^etter, the plate; bie 2^rnppen, the troops; bie Unorbnung, the disorder; bie Unterl^altnng, the conversation; bie SSerfd^anjung, the intreuchment; bie SBerfpred^ung, the promise; ftd^ tjergletd^en, to make a compromise; *ba8 iSerlangen, the demand; tjcrratl^en, to betray; tierfd^njinben, to disappear; bertreten, to represent; ;^uftellen, to deliver; ftd) 3uriirfjtet)en, to withdraw; bag ^tmofen, the alms; bag ^S(I, the ABC, the alphabet; bie SBebcutung, the meaning; bie ^rteftafc!^e, the pocket-book; SBenn bu 2ltmofen gtbft, ta§ betnc Itnfc |)anb nid)t tDtffen, tua^ bctnc red)tc t^ut. 50Jetn (So{)n fjdlt alle feine SSerfprcdEjungen, ba er niemal^ mc^r t)erf:pricf)t^ al^ er ^alten fann. yiimm meinen diatif bie SSernjaltung, the administration; bie B^Wllttg, the payment; *ba8 Sort, the word; linf, left ) rec^t, right f ^^^®' ^lotjUtj^, sudden; ttiJlitg, fully; gufdttig, accidental. — 92 — an, unb tg nid^t^ bon btcfer ©peife. Tlan berriit^ fcinc ^reunbc^ ipenn man fie t)ergt§t. ®er 2lbt)ocat, ber mid^ in biefem "iproceffi t)ertntt, gilt t)ie( in unferer ®tabt. S)ie geinbe fIol)en in gro^ci Unorbnung, nadibem i{)re 3Serf(i)an3ungen t)on unfern Struppen einge^ nommen uiaren, S)ie Wftao^h lie^ bie Speller fallen, tneil fie firf) er fcI)ro(fen f)atte. !Die 5Reiter btieben p(o^(i(f) ftel}en, afe ob fie nnfen ©tdrte nnb Steltnng lennen lernen inollten. 211^ njir geftern in bei ®tabt fpajieren gingen, fanben ton eine -Srieftafc^e, bie Xdiv mitna^: men, nm fie bent Sigentpmer jnsnftellen, 2Ba^ tl)at bie 9tegierung^ al^ fie bie 5yja{f)rid}t Don ber ©efangennal^me be^ Saifer^ er^ielt @ie gab bent 9SerIangen be^ 3SoIf^ nad) nnb jog fid) Don ber SSermal tung be^ @taat^ (state) jnriicf. (S^ fant nn^ Dor, ate ob bie gcinbe fid^ nad^ ber @tabt jtirncEjogen. Sr fame gerft tnieber, nienn ic^ i^ti bate, mid) jn befnd)en. Qd) Derga^e 2(He^, ma^ i^r mir gefagt ^abt, toenn ic^ e^ nid)t anf fd^riebe. ^ 120. Where force commands, the law is (getten) [for] nothing. Be- fore thou diest, do not forget to put (bringen) thy house in order. Read this letter, and see thyself that our last hope has dis- appeared. Help me to do my lesson before thou commences! thine. What did your friend when he received the news that these men had stopped (einftetten) their payments ? He wrote me that he had made a compromise with his creditors. Whei Charles arrived in Cologne he found the letters that he had ex- pected. While my son began to learn his ABC, thine was already reading the classics. When we saw that we were watched, we immediately dropped our conversation. When we were riding [on the cars] to New York, the railroad-train suddenly stopped (fte[)en b(eiben) before we came to Newark. Where was your mother when that accident took place ? She was taking a walk with my sister. How did you become acquainted with that gentleman? I met (treffen) him accidentally at Count Bis- marck's house. We conversed more than an hour, and he in- vited me to see (befnd^en) him at his residence. I advised that lady to take lessons of (bei) Mr. Nollet, if she commenced (subjunct.) to study Frenchf. If you did not sleep so long^ f Uninflected adjective (franjofifd^). — 93 — you would be healthier. If the moon were shining now, you would distinctly see (imperf.) the whole mountain-chain. I would gladly die (imperf.), if I could buy (erfaufen) the liberty of my country with my death. They said that they did not fully understand the meaning of his words. 121. PREPOSITIONS with Genitive :f with Dative: with Accusative : iDd^renb, during; aiiQ, out of (from); burd), through, hy; tOtQtn, on account of; ttad^, after (to); O^ne, without; t)On, from (of, by) ; um, around, about; ^n, to; QCQen, against. with Dative or Accusative i an, at; auf, upon, on; neben (near) by, beside; unter, under, below, beneath; iiber, over, above; t)or, before, ago. 3ni is often used instead of in betn; am is often used instead of an bent; tn3 ** ** in ba§; an3 . " " an bag; beim ** *' bei bent; bom ** " t)on bem; pm ** " 3u bem; nnterm ** ** nnterbem; gur ** '* gu ber; aufg ** ** auf bag. burets ** ** bitvcfibag; Obs. — 1. 5(n, in, anf, neben, nnter, iiber, t)or govern the accusative, when they express a motion or direction towards an object, or a placing of some- thing on, 6e/bre, etc. an object. If this is not the case, these prepositions govern the dative. In relations other than those of place, the use of the case is regulated according to an analogy to local relations, which is often difficult to determine. . 2. The meanings attached above to the prepositions are only approxi- mative and denote the original conception connected with each preposition. Very frequently English prepositions must be rendered by German pre- positions not expressing their original meanings: ^nf ber @ee, at sea; anf bie @ec, to sea; ouf bem SJlartte, at (in) the market; anf ben 9Jiarft, to the market; t For a complete list of prepositions see the Theoretical Course p. 61. — 94 — auf ber ^ojl, at the post-office; auf bent iBaKe, at the ball; auf t)tm !Oanbe, in the country (op- posite to city); im ^oncerte, at the concert; im 2^1) eater, at the theatre; gu §aufe, (at) home; am lifer, on the shore; an ber SBanb, on the wall; in ber 2>d)uU, at. school; gu ber ^eit, at the time; an bem Sage, on the day; am 16ten Tlax, on the 16th of May; bet ^a^t (in ber ^'^ad^t), at night; gu SSeil^nad^ten, at Christmas; auf btc $ofl (gur ?5ofl),to the post-office; auf ben «aU (gum iBatte), to the ball; auf« !Oanb, to the country; iu8 Concert, to the concert; in8 2^^eater, to the theatre; nad) §aufe, (to) home; onS Ufer, to the shore; an bie 3Banb, to the wall; gur (in bte) (gc^ule, to school; bis gu ber ^dt, (up) to the time; biSgu bem S^age, (up) to the day; big gum 3ten 3unt, (up) to the 3d of June; am ^Dlorgen, in (on) the morning; im tjorigen 3a^re (t)origeS 3a]^r), last year. 3. The preposition bi/ cannot be translated by Don if it does not denote the agent of a passive verb. It is translated by burd^ if it denotes by means of. 4. To is generally not translated by the mere dative if it denotes the object of a motion in space. If this motion refers to places, it is generally translated by nad^, but also by other prepositions (See Obs. 2). If a person • is the object of the motion, it is generally translated by git: come to me, fomm gu mir. 5. The adverb h\9, placed before prepositions denoting direction, meana {IS far as J up to, if referring to space. Referring to countries and towns it i generally connected with nad^, which may also be left out. id^ !am big (nod^) S3ertin, I came as far as Berlin. Referring to other localities it is mostly con- nected with gu (bis gum ^erge, etc.). But all other prepositions, denoting direction may be connected with big (bt« an ben gtug, big auf ben 53erg, etc.). Referring to time, big is translated by till, up to, and is generally connected with gu, which sometimes is dropped: big gum 2ten 3Jidrg; big (gu) SSei^uad^* ten, etc. Not till is rendered by erfi. 5lbfaIIen (strong), to fall off; anfeljen (strong), to look at; auffallen (strong, w. dat.), to strike; augbreiten, to extend; augtaufc^en, to exchange; beforbern, to forward, bege^ren, to demand; begraben (strong), to bury; batiren, to date; itc^ bre^en, to revolve, to turn; ermutl^igen, to encourage; errtd^ten, to erect; errtngen (strong), to obtain; fatten (strong), to fall; pug en (strong), to hang; liegen (strong), to lie, to be (situated)j] fid) rii^men (w. gen.), to boast (of); fi^en (fa6, gefcffen), to sit; ftellen, to place; fpagieren fal^rcn, to take a ride; umge^en (strong), to associate; jtd^ UJagcn^ to venture; — 95 — bic %di\t, the axis; bie 5llpen, the Alps; bie 3lu8ftd)t, the prospect; bic 3lnftrengung, the effort; ber SBaU, the ball; t>a^ iBefinben, the health; bie 53emer!ung, the remark; bag iBoot, the boat; ha^ Concert, the concert; bie (Sintabung, the invitation; ber Sinlag, the admission; bag ©is, the ice; bie (Sifenbaljit, the railroad; baS (Snbe, the end; bie Srlaubnig, the permission; (Suropa, Europe; ber gelbgug, the campaign; bie geftung, the fortress; ber gtug, the river; bie gront, the front; ber %xo% the frost; bte ©artent^iir, the garden-gate; baS ©ebdiibe, the building; ber ©eburtstag, the birthday; bte ©elegen^eit, the occasion; ber ©tebel, the top (of roofs); ber ©tpfel, the top (of trees, etc.) ; ber ©raben, the moat, ditch; ber §tmmet, the sky; bie §iitfe, the help; bte 3nbuftrtc, the industry; bte ^o^Ie, the coal; bie Seid^e, the corpse; bie lOtfte, the list; bie 3}Zad)t, the power; 9Kat(attb, Milan; ber 9Jiaitget, the want; ber 2Jiar!t, the market; hxtSStavitv, the wall (outside); ber 9?ame (gen. SIflamtnQ), the name; ber Sfiebel, the fog; ber $ret8, the price; ber 9laitb, the edge; ber 9^ang, the rank; ber 9legen, the rain; bie ^tx\)t, the row; bte 9^et)otutton, the revolution; bte @d)ilbit)a(^e, the sentinel; bag @d)ta^tfelb, the field of battle; ber ®cf)itce, the snow; . ber 'BcijVLi^, the shelter, protection; ber @omttag, the sunday; bte station, the station; ber @tt)l, the style; ba^ X^eater, the theatre; bte ^^itr(c), the gate, the door; ha^ Ufer, the bank (of a river) ; ber Untlauf, the revolution (turning); bag ^xdj, the cattle; ber S$ort^eil, the advantage; ber Sag en, the carriage; ber Sail, the rampart; bie Sanb, the wall (inside); ber ^immttmamx, the carpenter; abtrefeitb, absent; blau, blue; brett, broad, wide; bid)t, dense; • eigen, own; einjtg, single; eittjiicfenb, charming; crl^ebiid^, considerable; gar m(^t, not at all; gefegtiet, blessed; ttcii^ft, next; offentlid^, public; ftabttfd^, city (adject.); tief, deep; unbebeuteitb, inconsiderable; unerl^i3rt, unheard of; Weit, far; ico^tfeit cheap. Sol^in ge^en @tc (tt)0 gel^cn ®te l^in)? where (whither) do you go? So^er (tjon njo) totnmcn ^ie (too fontmen ®ie §cr) ? from where (whence) do you come? ©as tjl bie U^r (toictJiet U^r ift eg) ? what o'clock is it? — 96 — (S8 if! fed^S U^r, it is six o'clock; l^alb jteBcit U^r, half past six; cm btcrtcl na(^ fed)S (auf ftebcn), a quarter past six; breiDiertel auf fteben (ein biertcl t>ox fteben), a quarter of seven. Um tDetd^e 3^^^ ? ^t what o'clock ? Um fecf)^ U^r, at six o'clock. 2Bir lonnten ti^egen be6 ftrengen grofte^ (be6 ftrengen grofte^ iDegen) ntd)t au6 bem §aufe gel^en. ^m Dortgen 3a^re bradien mir burd/^ (Si^; nad^ biefer 3^it tDagten mtr nidjt tDieber auf^ Ste ju gel)en. Surd) tDeldje ©tra^en miiffen tntr gel)en, um auf ben Ttaxtt 3U !ommen ? ©ie (Siun)ot)uer giugen auf ben SSSatten ber geftung fpajteren. 3luf bem ®ipfet be^ -Sergei fatten trir eine eutjiidEenbc Slu^[id)t. SSer ftel)t an ber Jf)ur? (S^ ift §errn molkt'^ S)tener, ber fid) nad) -3f)rem Sefinben erfunbigt. SBarum fe^en 8te []xi)] bie S3Uber an, bie an ben SBcinben t)angen? SBir ftanben geftern am Ufer be^ gluffeS, um unfere greunbe ju fel^en, bie auf bem @d)iffc iDaren. Slopfen (£ie an bie Oartent^itr, unb bege^ren @ie ©inla^! -3ft 3I)r -©ruber ju §aufe ? 9?ein, ic^ ^abe i^n auf bie $oft gefdjidt. Sin (to) n)entt)otten ®ie btefe Sriefe fdjiden? Qd) ^abe nad) §aufc an meine ^^i^eunbe gefi^rieben. Q6) fa^ unter bem gro^en -Saum, ber neben unferm ^laufe fte^t; unter un^ lag bie®tabt, unb iiber mir tear ber blaue §tmmet au^3gebreitet. Sir giugen unter bie Sdume, um @(^u^ gegen ben $Rcgen ju finben, 2Bo fommen @ie l)er? ©inb @ie im 2:i)eater gemefen? 9fein, ic^ fomme au^ bem (t)om) Soncert. ©ie geinbe iwaren bur(^ einige unbebeutenbe SSortl^eife, bie fie iiber unfere Slrmee errungen l^atten, ermut^igt morben, ffio^in fd)i(fen ©ie ^firen Sebienten ? Qi) fd)ide if)n gum @d)u^mad)er, um meinc ©tiefel abgul^olen, unb jn ^art um il^m eine ginfabung gu bringen. §aben ©ie eine ©inlabung gur ®efeKfd)aft bdim ©eneral? ?Jein, tt)ir gefjen nic^t mit einanber um. O^ne Qljxc ^iilfe tt)dre. xi) berforen gemefen. S)ie 6rbe bre!)t fi(^ um bie ©onne unb um (on) t^re eigene 2ld)fe. SBd^renb be^ gangen i^elbjug^ fonnte ber geinb fid^ nic^t eine^ einjigen ©iege^ rii^men. ^n leiner ^txt ir>aren ber ^^leig unb bie -Snbuftrie be^ 8anbe§ gefegnetcr, al^ in biefem .^a^re. 2lm ndd^*' [ten 3Korgen nad) ber ©c^lad^t begruben unfere ©olbaten i^re ^Tobteit unb bie ber geinbe. S)iefer Srief ift t)om IQ. b. 2)i.t batirt, aber erft am 18. gefd)rteben unb am 20. gur ^oftgefanbt tporben. 2)er t btefc§ SKonatS. ®fenbaf)naug lam bi« mi) Zxot), fonnte afierf t)on bort aBJ ntc^t mitcx beforbert merben. 3)er ^1^9 ^^^ ^^^ 3"^ ndc^ften Station, blieb aber bort au6 (from.for) 2)JangeI an (of) koijkn liegenff. ^i^ 3um 3a{)re 1866 gait ^reugen nur a(^ eine dJlai)t (bee) iwtitm SRangee, 2l(Ie ftdbtif(J)e(n) 2lbgaben miiffen [no(f)J t)or bem erften S'anuar bega^It njerben. 9Btr btieben lahge t)or bem ©ebdube fteljen, unb tau[(f)ten unfere Semerfungen nber (on) ben )3ra(f)tigen Stljl aue. ©er gropte 2:^eil nnferer SCrnppen fam in biefer (Bi)iad)t gar nii^t t)or ben geinb. d^ fiel nn^ auf, ba§ bie Stegiernng t)or aCe offentlic^en ©ebdube (Sd)ilbn>ad)en gefteUt f)atte. 122. During that whole time not one of our entrenchments was carried by the enemy. On account of the dense fog, our boat was detained seven hours at (bei) Poughkeepsie. After un- heard of efforts the general arrived with his army at six o'clock in the (Gen.) evening on the field of battle. By what efforts have you made it possible to arrive so soon ? Does this name stand on your list? No, but I shall place (fet^en) it immediately on the list. I sent the carpenter to (aitf) the top of the roof in order to repair it. I believe that somebody is listening (^or{^en) at the door ? • Go to (an) the window, and look (jn- fe^en) whether our carriage is at (oor) the gate? I see that the plaster (ber Salf) on these walls has (tft) almost fallen off. He has erected a beautiful villa on (an) the edge of the forest. Where (whither) do you intend (tootten) to ride ? I only intend to take a ride through the city. Wljen are you going to re- turn home ? At half past eight o'clock. Are you going to the concert to-night ? No, I shall go to the ball at Mr. NoUet's. How long have you been in this country, and where do you come from ? I come from Metz, and have been here almost nine years. How long did you stay [out] in the country ? Only a couple of days. * How many of your children go to school ? Only two; the others I am still keeping (be^atten) at home. t ^ber is frequently placed after one or more words of the sentence. 1 %h is often used to increase the force of toon, denoting a starting point, tr Siegcn bleiben, to be detained. — 98 -^ Why do you not place (fteCen) your cattle under shelter (trans- late: under a roof) ? Below the walls of the fortress are broad and deep moats. Will you not go to the general, and ask him for (urn) protection against these soldiers? Jupiter revolves in 10 days on his axis, and his revolution about the sun lasts (bauern) almost 12 years. Did you do this without the per- mission of your father ? This man lived at the time of the French revolution. My friend's birthday fell upon a Sunday. After many years you will acknowledge that I was right. Be- fore our last war, the prices of (the) victuals were considerably cheaper than now. Fiftyf years ago there were no rail- roads in the country. During the whole battle the oflQcers were before the front. The general sent all his officers before the front. I have planted a whole row of trees before my house. On the morning after the battle, the corpses lay thick (bi(J)t) on the field of battle. On that day we met (treffen) but (nur) few of the enemy (translate: /ei^; enemies). On (bet) that occasion our soldiers took a great number of prisoners. My friend returned home on the 10th of March; he will not depart again till the 20th of June Ouni). He will be absent till the 10th of July O^tt). Will General Sheridan remain in Europe till the end of the war? We came on our journey as far as Milan; last year we came only up to the Alps. 123. SBotJon, of what; batjon, of that, of it; iDomit, with what; bautit, with that, with it; tuoju, to (for) what; bagu, to (for) that, to (for) it; tDoran, at what; baran, at that, at it; Worin, in what; barin, in that, in it; iDoburd^, by what; baburc!^, by that, by it. §erab, l^inab, down; berauf, ^ittauf, up; I§erau8, ^tnauS, out; l^erein, ^inctit, in; l^eriiber, ^inubcr, over. t See the list of numerals in the Theoretical Course. Obs. — 1. All these particles are formed of prepositions, combined with the adverbs h)0, t>a, l^er and l^tn* If, in the formation of these words, two vowels meet, an r is inserted. 2. The prepositions with which these adverbs are combined, are liable to the same variation of meaning, as if they were separated: 2S o r a ti (not ttJOtion) benfett @te, of what do you think ? (the verb beitfeit being construed with an, not with tjon); tt) t) n pngt e3 ah, on what does it depend? (the verb abpitgen being construed with t)on, not with ailf). 3. The adverbs formed by prefixing tt)0 and ba must always be used instead of prepositions connected with the interrogative tt)a§ or with per- sonal and demonstrative pronouns in the neuter gender. They are not ad- missible if what, being followed by nouns, must be rendered by treldjer, e, eS: Of what books, toon tDeId)en iSiid^ent (not tcotoon ^iic^ern). The adverbs combined with ba are used if the personal pronoun or demonstrative depend- ent on a preposition, refers to things masculine, feminine or neuter in either number, but not in reference to persons. I have made no use of them (the books), x^^<^, i^^v^^ ^^^1^ ;^^^^^^;^^ ^!^^^^^i/^^^^^ -^^/^ ^^-€^-/^ -^^fi^^^f^^^ ^^<^ ■^^^"f^ •^ty. X^^5«^ <<^^"/f'^'^^ ^^€^^^^Sf-P^ ^y^-^^/if- — 119 — y y ^ 7 yy ^- y y ^ y s^^^^^;^t7 ,^^^-€^1^1^ ^^yy/if-^^ y^^-y. yiy^-^i^y^ c^^^-^yy^ y yy ^7. .^i^Lyy ^cy ^ ^.y^ * 2)te OucUc, the source. 120 ■^^//!f-^ -e^SJ-^^ ■i£^'/i<- ^^i^^Xi/'^if-'O ^C^'t!^'^^/^^^^(>/i<'^ . / X 121 — VOCABULARY. ■/^ WKV;con]., but y ftbfattCH (strong), v. n,, to fall off >d W)Qahe, t, tax ^ abge^en (strong), v.n., to leave, v. n. ^jobjcingen (strong), v. n., to depend /abljanm (strong), v» a., to cut down A ahi)olnif V. a., to call for Ja6Ie!)tten, v. a., to decline atetfen, v. n., to depart Xj^^ife, f., departure Ol^ii&neiten (strong), 'v. a., to cut off ^ Slbfd^teb ne^men, to take leave tl^^f^^mbm- (strong), V. a., to copy X ^Ibjid^t, f., intention, design )c abtragen (strong), v. a., to pull down ^abtt>efenb, adj., absent y 5ld^fe, f , axis ^tn ^c^t nt^mtn, to take care of a(j^tpQumreight; bet adjte^_^tlie eighth ^at^ten, v. a., to esteem \L2lbbocat, m., lawyer ofier,. e^ eg, adj., all '' Slttnofen, n., alms ^l^en, plur. f., the Alps fti^^onj., than, as, when ~ olt^^dj-j old a«tert!amfd&, adj., American, adj. OtmrfiTETf; V. a., to amuse; jtd) amiijt* J ren, v. refl., to enjoy one's self V Qtt, prep., at be»-«tt^eije, adj., the other )^anbern, v. a., to change, v. a. >Cailcr!enneti (strong), v. a., to acknow- ledge - anfangen (strong), v. a., to begin, Slnforberung, f., demand ^ anfiillen, v. a., to fill, ,v, a. 7^ angeben (strong), v. a., to state y( ber ^^ngeflagte, the accused-v 2lngelegenl^ett,.f. , affair ^^ angenel^m, adj., pleasant -A angretfen (strong), v. a., to attack /\ Slngrtff, m., attack Y^ fxdj anfletben, to dress (one's self) / ^ anflopfen, v.n., to knock (at the door) on!o»«tteit'ts*^eBg)^.-n., to arrive — " tofimfV^., arrival < 51nlage, f., talent ^ ^nmutl^, f . , grace -X anne^men (strong)/ v. a., to accept, to take ^norbnung, f., regulation anreben, Ar. a., to address anfel^en (strong), v. a., to look at 5lnfid^t, f., view 5lnf)3rud^, m., claim atiftetten, v. a., to appoint fid) anftrengen, to exert one's self toftretigung, f., effort ^tltrag, m., application antltJorteti, v. intr., to answer aittoenben, v. a., to employ Qitjetgen, v. a., to announce an^ie^en (strong), v. a., to put on 9(^4elf m., apple -^ ^beitpf., work, labor w ?beiten > v. n., to work, to labor ftd^ argern, to be angry, displeased 5(rgtt)o]^n, m., suspicion .eMfW> adj., poor Slmtec, f., army SOrt, f., kmd ,^ 122 — Slrjt, m,, physician atlantifd^, adj., Atlantic, adj. qUC^, particle, also auf, prep», on, upon Ottffeouejt, V. a., to build up ^ui%abe-r f., lesson, exercise, task ouffteDen, [*°"^- See page 6S. OuffaEen (strong), v. intr. with dat., to strike auf^alten (strong), v. a., to delay; ftd^ auf{)aUen, to stay auf£)eben (strong), v. a., to pick up ouf^oren, v. n., to cease * oufmad)en, v. a., to open 5lufmer!fam!eit, f., attention aufrtd)ttg, adj., upright, sincere auffd)reiben (strong), v. a., to write down 5luftrag, m., order auf roadmen, v. n., to awake %l^ n., the eye au8, prep., out of, from augbretten, v.n., to extend ausbrettnen, v. n., to bum out xiu§borren, v. a., to parch -ftugerft, adj., extreme auSfii^ren, v. a., to execute, accom- plish, carry out augriiften, v. a., to endow 5lu§f(^ug, m,, board (of persons) auSfel^en (strong), v. n., to look, v. n. au^fe^cn, v. a., to expose ^u§ft(i)t; f., prospect au8taufd)en, v. a., to exchange Qusoertaufen, v. a., to sell out. i ». ^ S3al^n^of, m., railroad-station ««i. batb, adv., soon -53atf, m., ball .^antr,n., ribbon; m., volume . 'iBattl7~f., bank (moneyed Institute) T^ iBafe. f., cousin, f. >yL bauen, v. a., to build ^/ JBoiim, m , tree beabfid^tigen, v« a. , to intend ber ^eamte, m., the officer (civil) yL bcbauern, v. a., to regret -(- beberfeti, v. a., to cover ^ ^ebeutung, f., meaning 4- bCLiBftrcrtrt«yJiM«i-servant ^ebingung, f., condition ^" bebro^en, v. a., to threaten S- befei^Ien (strong), v. a., to command ' SSefinben, n., health N^ ftd^ befinben (strong), to do, to be (of j health) . ^ befolgen, v. a., to follow (an order) > beforbern, v. a., to forward ^ fid^ begeben, to betake one's self, to * proceed fid^ begegnen, to meet (one another) ^ bege^ren, v. a., to demand -\ begteiten, v. a., to accompany^ begraben (strong), v. a., to bury f beftanbein, V. a., to treat v[. bel^aupten, v. a., to assert, to state be^errfdjen, v. a,, to rule over -V bci, p i'e p :y^witli^ in the house of iBeifall fittben, to meet with favor -^ betmo^nen, intr. v. w. dat., to be present at befannt, adj., known -^.^ ber iBefatintc (personal noun), the, acquaintance S5e!anntfd)oft (abstr. n.), acquaintance belagem, v. a. , to besiege S5elagerung, f., siege beldftigen, v. a., to molest belauf^en, v. a. , to watch beleibtgen, v. a., to insult bcllert, V. n., to bark belo^nen, v. a., to reward bemarfeir, v. a., to perceive, to remark SBemerfuttg, f., remark benad^rtd^ttgen, v. a., to inform beneiben, v. a., to envy ^ei?g^-m-^ mountain bertd)ten, v. a., to report berit^mt, adj., renowned befd^cibtgen, v. a., to damage — 123 — fid) befd)afttgctt, to occupy one's self befd^tegen (strong), v. a., to bombard iBefd^lug, m., conclusion bejd^ulbtgen, v. a., to accuse befe^en, v. a. , to occupy (take pos- session of) beftegcn, v. a., to defeat jtc^ beffern, to improve (one's self) beftotigen, v. a., to confirm 53efted)ung, f. , bribery beftcl^en in (strong), to consist in nwft-^ffl!!^ m^^'iV, to pay a visit -bcftt^^€tt7-v. a. , to visit fici^ betrogetl (strong), to behave (one's self) iBetragen, n., conduct betrac!^tlii^, adj., considerable betriibeti, v. a., to afflict; e§ betriibt tntd), I am sorry fid^ bctriibett, to be grieved, sorry SBett, n., bed iBettler, m., beggar ftd) 53etDeguitg tnaci^en, to take exercise bemunbern, v. a., to admire Jj^n., beer 58tlb, n., (pi. SBilbcr), picture «8miE, f., pear bi^prep. and conj., to, till, until iHttgfl (strong), V. a., to request nun (pi. S3latter), n., leaf blau, adj., blue SBkvn., lead 5gkifiiftr«i., pencil bkiJbOL^strong), v. n., to remain bitten, V. n., to lighten nt(f)t blog, conj., not only bliil^en, v. n., to blossom, to flourish 5^tetf> f., flower *^oot, n., boat Jwfe, adj., wicked, naughty SBotc, m., messenger 53otf(^aft, f., message brauc^en^ v. a., to need, v. a. -bue^^ (strong), V. a. & n. , to break brett, adj», broad, wide brenncn, v. a. & n., to bum '. \ ^rief y m,, letter S3rteftafd^c, f., pocket-book bringoi (strong), v. a., to bring *Brtrt, n., bread ^vnber, m., brother ^YJiff^I, n., Brussels ^3tt(ir(pl- Biidfter), n., book ^ ^Xi^^al kt, m., book-keeper ^ud^pnbler, m., book-seller ftd^ biitfen, to stoop mrgfd)aft, f., bail . ( i}Sitfff»r f ., butter D ^ ^. (Concert, n,, concert iSottgreg, m„ Congress ^ ^ongregmitglieb, m., member of Con- gress corrigiren, v. a., to correct v^ ^OUfhtT^n., (male) cousin; (Soufine, f., (female), cousin S)a, adv., there; conj, since / bamal§, adv., then, at that time * c' 2)atne, f., lady '>^ ^ift^H, V. intr. , to thank bafc^onj., that battren, v. a. , to date X^ bauern, v. n. , to last - beittrPi'^J^o^^j *^y5 betner, ber bctntge, thine benleit (strong), v. n., to think beuttid^, adj., distinct >< beutfc^, adj. German (adj.) beiv^eutf(^e, German (noun) 2)feUtf^lanb, n., Germany bid)t, adj., dense v^ bicttrett, v. a., to dictate yL 2)ieiier, m., man-servant biefer, e, eg, pron., this bonnern, v. n. , to thunder > Dorf (pi. S)orfer), n., village ^ bort, adv. , there, at that place X b ye t ,mim ., three; bretmal, three times ^ fid^ bre'^cn, to revolve, to turnyt^ 124 4- hrt Wtftc, num. , the third -f bunfel, adj., dark feur^prep., through, by "A burd^aug ntd)t, not at all burflen (biirften), v. n. , to be thirsty $4Mje«b7-»r-, dozen >jL. ^^t, conj., before (conj.) H^C^etnatS, adv., formerly -JU (S^re, f., honor ■f di (pi. Ster), n., egg ^ eicjen, adj., own ^ ^igenfd^aft, f., quality - ^ TStgent^iimer, m., owner cmpa,-one -4-4tcf) einbilben, to imagine u ettitge, adj. plur., a few Ai^Stnfommen, n., income Ji^mlaben (strong), v. a., to invite ^'Sinlabung, f., invitation X (Sinlag, m. , admission Z ekimal, adv., once; nod^ etntnal, once more N Sinita^nte, f., revenue J. cinnel^men (strong), v. a., to occupy, to carry (a fortress) NC^ettlfe'^en (strong), v. a., to be aware of ^ ettlft, adv. , once (upon a time) *@tnn)Ol)Tlcr, m. , Tnhabi tant eitt^^en (strong), v. a., to collect -^ einjig, adj., single, only (adj.) •< (Si«, n., ice .^tfftlH*., iron "r^ Sifenba^n, f., railroad ^^^tjettba^njug, m., railroad-train l^jid) efein, to be disgusted -aUt, f., ell, yard S{tern-(plur.), parents -^ ^tlbe, n. , end ^ngldnber, m., Englishman >f— entbcden, v. a., to discover ./^ cntlaff en (strong), v. a. , to dismiss j„ cntmntl^igcn, v. a., to discourage ©ntfd^abtgung, f., damages ^^mtfd^nlbtgeii, v. a,, to excuse (Stttfdjulbtgung, f., excuse '^ tnttozxdjtn (strong), v. intr., to escape H entgiicfenb, adj., charming ^z er, pers. pron., he (Srbitterung, f., a^imosity -^ €tb^J[,^arth erfreuen, v. a., to delight "- *(SrfoIg, m., success, result *- ftd^ ergeben (strong), to surrender (one's self) crl^altert (strong), v. a., to receive erljeblid^, adj., considerable fidj erinnern, to remember er!Iaren, v. a., to declare fxci) erfdlten, to take a cold er!ranfen, v. n., to fall sick erfennen, v. a., to recognize ftd) erfunbtgen, to inquire erlauben, v. a. , to permit, to allow (^rlaubntg, f., permission ermut^igen, v. a. , to encourage erna^rett, v. a. , to support ernten, v. a. & n., to harvest erobent, v. a., to conquer erretd)en, v. a., to obtain, to reach errid)ten, v. a., to establish, to erect erringen (strong), v. a., to obtain (with effort) jtd) erfd^redeti (strong), to be fright- ened, scared erfl, adv., not till erftaunen, v. a., to astonish (v. a.) ber erfte, num., the first erfud^en, v. a., to request ertrarten, v. a., to expect (Srhjartung, f., expectation erlueifen (strong), v. a. to prove er^iteleti, v. a., to derive eg, pers. pron., it effen (strong), v. a., to eat ztWa^, indef. pron., something, any- thing cucr, poss. pron., your; ber eure, bcr eurtge, yours @uropa, Europe : f- — 126 9- ga^rcn (strong), v. n., to ride (on a I vehicle) !f gatt, m., case ---fatten (strong), V. n., to fall ?^-.faft, particle, almost foutr^dj., idle, lazy ^Se^f., pen (^cmrcffer, n. , pen-knife geitib, m. , enemy fdubXi^r-adj., hostile -gelHpl- gelber), n., field T^-^elb^eri*, m., commander y'geTb;^ug, m., campaign g€H^r, n., window ,%^mx, n., fire ^nhm (strong), v. a. , to find ^ gtef^, f., bottle < gtetg, m., diligence glct fe i) , n., meat, flesh ^ fteifiig , adj., diligent fBcl^n (strong), v. n., to flee %^lugel, m., wing gltt§^4n., river ><{, fortrciutneit, v. a., to remove '.; gortfc^rttt, m., progress T^ortfet^en, v. a., to continue fragEnrvrB;^, to ask (a question) gwmlm^T^Hfance graHj0f€7-i». , ^Yenchman fran;^ftf^,-adj.TlFrench (adj.) grau,.X,-woman7 wife , grdutein, n., young lady,TiIiss y^grei^eit, f. , liberty ^ fid) freuen, to be glad, to rejoice friend (female) greuttbttS^ffT?- friendship grk-bitt, m. , peace ^riebrid),J'rederick fro^, adj., glad grant, f., front -groft, in., frost '^ frieren (strong), v. n. , to freeze -%m^ f., fruit v(^ frud^tbar, adj., fertile fr%adj., early y^ grii^Iing, m., spring < ftd^ fiigen, to submit >^ fiif)ren, v. a., to conduct >4 filv> prep. , for fftiel^ten, v. n. , to be afraid; v.a. , to fear gH»jl, m., prince ^ttg^m.,foot , fork tK. Oong, f., goose ganj^adj., whole gar ntd)t, (particle,) not at all '^^ ©arten, m., garden ©artentl^iir, f., garden-gate >C Oartner, m., gardener (male); ©art* nerin, f. , gardener (female) jga£t,jCQ^£u^st . >e^ ©afi^of, m., hotel .Qthm (strong), V. a., to give ©ebaube, n., building v^ ©ebirge, n. , mountain-chain y/ ©ebrand^, m., use ^ gebrand^en, v. a., to use ^ ©ebnrtStag, m., birth-day "^ ©efa^r, f., danger -<. *®efallen, m. , the favor r- gefallen (strong), v. intr., to please V gefcitltg, adj., obliging / ber ©cfangene, the. prisoner y gegen, prep. , against ©egenb, f., landscape, grounds y( ©egner, m., adversary )< y])fj ^, pa tron g-)j. v. n., to gO, tO walk, to step gc^ori^en, v. intr. w. dat., to obey \] ^eprntpr. intr., to belong geprig, adj., proper -^ ©el^iilfe, m., assistant-^ ©etftm., mind X ©elbfiilcf , n. , piece of money ^ Oetegen'^ett, f. , occasion ^ (Sele^rfamfeit, f., scholarship gelel^rt, adj., learned 126 >c^clten (strong), v. n., to be esteemed, to be worth; etttJoS getten, to be for something @emll[e^ ~nr, vegetables *^eueral^-m., general (nomi) X Qcnefen (strong), v. n., to recover (neuter) 7> geniigenb, adj., suflacient yCQ^^^^t, adj., just Si. gem, adv., gladly, willingly Ct ber ©efanbte, the embassador ' @e{4^ ^-j business jf ©efdjti, n. , ability u gefc^icft, adj., able ©efellfd^aft, t, company ^ @efe^, n„ law gefunb, adj., healthy .^^fleai, adv., yesterday yt geftel^en (strong), v.a., to acknowledge «/v@etreibc, n., grain ^ ©eraalt, f. , force y getrig, adj., certain V@ett)itter, n., thunderstorm Ih^mo^nljtitff., habit gett)bl)nltct), adj., ordinary, common @iebel, m., top (of a roof) ©ipfel, m. , top (of a mountain etc.) @la§, n., glass glauben, v. a. & n., to believe ©lauben, m., faith, belief ©Idublger, m., creditor ©liicf, n., fortune, success, happiness -gfflttit?, adj., happy ©olb^ji., gold goibmradj., golden, gold (adj.) ©raben, m., moat, ditch "©raffm., count groft^-adj., great, large, big ©runb, m., reason 9tt4>-adj., good, kind @Ut, n., property ®litc,f., kindness ^b«l -v-\. «• :il,*¥' v. a., to buy, to purchase ^Ctllfer, m,, purchaser ^oufmcum, m., merchant teiit, no, adj. pron. leiinen, (irr.), v. a., to know K ^enntntg, f. knowledge, attainment ttnb, n.rtP^' ^tnber), child li!irf(3^e, f.,. cherry X ^Iciger, m. , plaintiff >^^Iar^ett, f., clearness <<^Iafft!er, m., classic (noun) ^^twKpl.^Ieiber),n., dress .c,-ti\ tUinf adj., small, little Muc^m.y boy *^offer, m., trunk ^ ^o^le, f», coal y .(iiiltty. Cologne Ig mtnett (strong), v. n., to come ^omntobc, f., chest of drawers y{ f'nnt^ m., king ^finiytlt, f., queen fonnen, irr. v., to be able y^- ^to^ffd^tnerj, m., head-ache ^ • ^orb, m., basket yi^ -kOfl]^ adj., sick, ill ^ranf^ett, f., disease, sickness /. . ^retbe, f., chalk y. ^rteg, m., war ^ ^rone, f., crown y #tt^ f., bullet -lUj^adj., short, brief ?aben, m., shop -^ ganb (pi . I^anber), n., country IBanbgut, n., farm, country-seat >C iOanbljaug, n., villa *^ JtitH§5r€fe^^leng lattge (adv. of time), long, for a longX time laufetl (strong), V. n., to run ^ e8 Iciutet, the bell rings y^ Ifebtir," V. n., to live geben, n., life lOeben^mittel, n., victual, eatable >< leer, adj., empty ^ ^^fytt^^r^^., teacher "^^^blUJ^ n., text-book lOetc^e, f., corpse -f~ letd^t, adj., light, easy ^ eg tl)Ut tnir leib, I am sorry >;< letbeit (strong), v. n. & a., to suffer x. letl)en (strong), v. a. to lend -/^ fe^He%v. a., to learn U!{m (strong), v. n. & a., to read leugtien, v. a., to deny 5<. Seilte^l., people, individuals — 128 — ')^ItcB,"adj., dear; cS tfl tnir lieb, I am glad liebeiv V. a., to love liegeh^ (strong), v. n., to lie, to be (situated) -|^'Iin!, adj., left (side) v^gifte, f., list V liter arijc^, adj., literary "f-Ioben, V. a., to praise -gaij^n., {pi. 2bd)tx), hole f^offel, m., spdon >$?oI)n, m. & n.,\ wages •^ot^, n., half an ounce Jgijtnr, m., lion • ^ Suft l)aben, to have a mind (desire) ^ ^ m. ■ SKfl^H, V. a., to make "jf- Tla6)t, {., power S^^^4^^ II- » girl S9^br-f-j maid-servant ^ aJ^ailanb, Milan •^SD^anget, m., want /Maim, m., (pi. Tlanmx), man (male), husband y. MadtfjOQ.., market ^MaxmoXf m., marble yC^ 2Rauer, f., wall (outside) BRj^indef. pron., more N. nte^rere, indef. pron., several ' utetttT-my; ber tneintge, nteiner, mine SKettfc^, m., man (human being) ^ffe^^i., knife *meta% n., metal' Wttmttty t, minute Imi^iin^m (strong), v. n., to fail mit^prep., with -^ tnitbrtngen (strong), v. a., to bring along r 9iJl-itgtieb,n., (pi. er), member (person) -t mttnel^men (strong), v. a., to take ^ along '^ IKittel, n. , means, instrument */ neben, prep., (near) by 'f> 9^ebel, m., fog >^ D^effe, m., nephew -f.. tttttt, no (particle) vymr adj., new md^f not nid^t einntol, not even "/- nt4t^ nothing, not anything; m(i)t« tuag, nothing that uk^Jlkma^Jiever 9^ieberlage, f., defeat VC Ui]4L(adv. of time), still, yet 'Hflotl) letben, to suffer (be in distress) j '^' ^itt^di^ , adj., useful Db, whether, if Ob^^i., fruit '• Obrigfett, f., the authorities ^ ober, or \ off en^ adj., open bffentlid^, adj., public y^ bffnen, v. a., to open "< C^eitn, Onfel; m., uncle — 129 m\ o^tte, prep. , without Drbnung, order (opposed to disorder) iftreid^ (Oefterreid)), Austria /^ ^y^MT, n., pair, couple K^artet, f., party y^^Jaffagter, m*, passenger ■]i fpff ^^; ni., pepper ^fcrlr, n., horse ^^ftaume, f., plum y J)flafterjt, v. a., to pave / pflegen, v. a., to nurse -^♦^funb, n,, pound JC ^latiiren, v. a., to grade, to level A plo^ttd), adj., sudden ^Jto^ent/ T. a:;'to plunder X $oftamt, n., post;'^ffice < ^rdcf)tig, adj., magnificent ^Jktifttytttt, m^j^^president ^jjrdft^^trtftlJafCf^ presidency ^:^m^, m., price ^ifCitge, m., Prussian (noun) ^reugen, Prussia 'T'^roteftiren, v. n. , to protest I ^rojeg, m., lawsuit sCCluatett, V^ a., to torment 7n «• )l Sldd^en, aA a., to avenge ^ 9iatib (pi J 9?dnbcr), m., edge '/ 9iang, m.^ rank s^ 9^at^, m.,i advice ■^ xatljtxi (stirong), v. a., to advise >" 9tat^geberi m», adviser . 9lduber, mi, , robber ^iMft, n,, tight m(;t, adj., right xsiim, V. n.,, to speak, to talk ^S Slegelmdgigtett, f., regularity. Wi%m, m., rkin ^k^m^d^xxmii m., umbrella J. tcgieren, v. $.. & n., to govern ^ftcgterung, fi, government xt^nm, V. n., to rain m%adj., rich rcid^en, v. a. , to hand ^ Xtxdjii^^ adj., abundant / '3idlje,\ f., row, series y,, ^^%y.^, journey retjettpp. n. , to travel, to go (travelling) mt^n-^stapong), V. n., to ride (on horse-back) ^tittXf m., horse-man 7^ repariren, v. a., to repair 7C. S^kjUlW^I, f., republic r£|iuJWilmiiff^ adjr, repttbliean 9iet)aluti0tt;-f., -revolution (uprising) d^ftmr ffi. pEEme ^iiijtex, m., judge >/^ ric^tig, adj., correct S ^ itt ^ y. m., ring ^ 9farf, m., coat 9liu^m, m., glory jl_ ftd^ rii^tnen (w. gen.), to boast (of)j^^ ^nfitfltlb, Bussia @ad^c, f., thing ^(.^ fden, V. a. & n., to sow (scatter)TC ^gettrV. a., to say, to tell ' *@«% n., salt ®d)aben, m., damage ^ fd^aben, v. intr., to injure ^ 4(i^ai;fradj., sharp fd^einen (strong), v. n., to shine, to ' seem -^ itfjl^u, V. a., to send *@d)icffal, n., fate n^ @d^ief erbat^, n. , slate-roof >(^ @rf)iff, n., ship >^ @d^il^t2jl^, f., sentinel @d)itibel, f., shingle \^ @d^infen, m., ham X @d)tac^t, f., battle @rf)tad^tfelb, n., field of battle SL, Wtftfen- (strong), v. n., to sleep f(i)tagen (strong), v. a., to beat, to strike W«^, bad n ^ 130 — ^fd^IieSctt (strong), v. a., to close ^ @#t0§rn.» (pi. ©d^toffer), castle y ©d^liiffel, m., key i-dfukj4. , school ©driller, m., scholar (pupil) @djit^, m., shelter, protection fd^tDa^, adj., weak jd^mar;^, adj., black {d^loeiv adj., heavy, difficult ^d^ttielJer, f. , sister fd[)tt)tnbtig, adj., giddy @ct)rt)inbfud^t, f., consumption fd^lrt^en, V. n., to sweat, to perspire @cttrtJC, m., slave (BtttdVLbtXf m., pirate 4cl&eu (strong), V. a. & n., to see fcfyiv ^dv. , very, very much -@eiferf., soap jtin, his, ber fetnlgc, his (without a noun) ffiu^ V. n. , to be fcit, prep., before, since, ago; conj. since, ever since *@eitat, m., senate -fenbctVr (irr. ) v. a., to send @enf, m., mustard fic^ ie^en, to take a seat - Speller, m., plate *V!^^kTrm., dollar 7^2^I)aun)etter, n», thaw ^eiic r; n., theatre ee, m. , tea 7^2;^ eil, m., part filf%¥m^ adj., dear [ 3^1) h r r ; n,, animal, brute ll^mrtslrong & irr.), v. a., to do %()ill( ^; f.j door, gate XtjUT^m., tower, steeple ;Ctief, adj., deep ^4gfrrm., tiger Zmi r ; i., ink ^Tf(fJ7m., table •^S ^ifd y t f tv m., joiner See^terf-, daughter gt f br m., death t ub t ;- adj., dead ^toWn, v. a., to kill ytbbtUd^, adj., fatal Iruii^VuillTtlt, V. a., to transport tremog^ sad; id) bin traurig, I am sad, I am sorry, grieved ^ffffnr (strong), v. a., to hit fl^^— trctmctt-,- to separate (from one another) •-- t«av adj., faithful t » t!t!on ..( &t rong), v. n. & a., to drink troften, v. a», to comfort, to console Zxnp);im, pi. troops U. iibel, adj., sick in the stomach -^ ittoj-prep., over, above iiberall, adv., everywhere V *uberpufen, v. a., overwhelm > *iiberrafd^en, v, a., to surprise •*#. ^btffeffe i ib tf H^ {iv T r )y-v: -a^ tp send *iibertragen (strong), y. a., to confer ^ (upon) iiber^eugt, adj., convinced Ul^r, f., watch, clock y^ * U l) t ' Umd)Civ> m., watchmaker Utn, prep., around, about ^?4 *umgcben (strong), v. a. , to surround X umgel^en (strong), v. n., to associate -^ Umlauf,m. , revolution (turning round) *untrtngen, to surround (in a circle) y(^ Utnrig, m., sketch ^ iwiattgm£tlllt4 adj., unpleasant jmortig^-adj., naughty Utlbebeutenb, adj., inconsiderable y^ utibegrunbct, adj., unfounded n< ainb^jDonx^ and UtifaH, m., accident, misfortune 4lrtgIMr-Ji.-,-inisfctft«ne ungliitflidft, adj., unhappy, unfortunate Unorbttung, f., disorder Unrcct)t, n. , wrong imrtd^tig, adj., incorrect unfer, our; ber unfrige, ours Utlter, prep., under, below, beneath utlterge^eti (strong), v. n., to set (of the sun etc.) *ftd) utiterl^alten (strong), to converse Unter^attung, f., conversation Untemel^mutig, f. , enterprise *utiterrtd^tcn, v. a. , to instruct, to in- form Untcrrtd^t ncl^mcn, to take lessons *unterftii^en, v. a», to support untreu, adj., faithless c -4 — 132 . — iUltJorft^ttg, adj., incautious lintt)al)r, adj., untrue Untnlffen^eit, f., ignorance unttJO^I, adj., unwell - uitj^ulaffig, adj., inadmissible Urjad^e, f„ cause -^Sater, m., father '^S^a^ertanb, n., one's own country, fatherland V jtd) t)^rbeugen, to bow (down) iBerbr^d)cn, n.^ crime SBerbadjit, m., suspicion s^ toerbtenen, v. a. , to deserve rf-S$erbienft, n., merit -^erbrtegltd^, vexed, initated tLc^ Derbrtegt vxi6), I am vexed, irritated 'L oerborren, v. n., to dry up ^ Derfolgen, v. a., to pursue " bergebtid),adv., iu vain T^-toergeffen (strong), v. a., to forget ^ ftd^ tjergteidjert (strong)^ to mabe a compromise / oergniigt, adj., glad i ^^erguiigen, n., pleasure 'ULjjergrofeern, v. a., to increase /^erl)aften, v. a», to arrest -^Derlaufen, v. a., to sell •^erlenneu, v. a., to. misjudge* Det[aitgen, v. a., to demand SSerlangen, n., demand Oerlaffeu (strong), v. a., to leave, quit, desert Derlaumben, v. a., to slander toerlejen (strong), v. a., to read Jjerle^en, v. a., to hurt tocrlleren (strong), v. a., to lose oermietl^en, v. a., to rent 55ermbgen, n., property t)ermut^en, v. a. , to presume tternld^ten, v. a., to annihilate toerpfltd^ten, v. a., to pledge berrat^en (strong), v. a., to betray ftd) t)crjammetn, to assemble (v. n.) Derjclumen, v. a., to miss SSerjdian^ung, f., entenchment tierfdjttegen (strong), v. a„ to lock terfd^onern, v. a., to embellish Derfc^ttJinben (strong), v. n., to dis- appear tierfe^en (strong), v. a., to provide toerfic^ern (v. a.), to assure Derfrnfen (strong), v. n., to sink tjerforgen, v. a., to supply berfpred^en (strong), v. a., to pro* mise S5erfpred)en, n., \ ^^^^. ^ iBcr[pred}uttg,f.,F"^^^^ SSerftarfung, f., reinforcement toerftel^en (strong), v. a., to un- derstand *iBerfu(^, m., attempt toerfud)en, v. a. , to attempt, to endeav- or, to try Jjert^etbigen, v. a., to defend oertreten (strong), v. a., to represent tjerurfad^en, v. a., to cause t)erurtl)eilen, v. a., to condemn 35erurt^eilimg, f., condemnation t)erlt>alten, v. a., to manage, to ad"^ minister 35crtDattung, t, administration DertDtdeln, v. a., to implicate toerttimtben, v. a., to wound better, m., cousm (male) ^itlj, n., cattle totel, much; tJtele, many t)teEeid)t, perhaps Dter, four; biermal, four times; bicrtel, a quarter; ber tJtette, the fourth 3SogeI, m., bird 35ol!, n., the people (nation) tJoU, adj., fuU boKenben, v. a., to finish tjolltg, adv., fully tJon, prep., of, from, by t)or, prep., before, ago tjorberetten, v. a., to prepare tJorlaben (strong), v. a., to summon ijorlegen, v. a., to submit (placo b^ fore) — - 133 SJorlefung, £♦, lecture 23orrat^, m., stock iBorfc^Iag, m», proposition tooiiici)tig, adj., cautious ber 35orfiijenbe, chairman Doriibergel^en (strong), v. n.. to pj tor^ic^en (strong), v. a., toprefei t SSad^fant, adj., watchful tB ft(J^f e u (s trong), v. n., to grow yL^fBa^m, m., carriage yL. (fic^) tt)agen, to venture i-^0:jl, t, election, choice f tt)al)(en, v. a., to elect, to choose sj^2Bal}ter, m., voter ^ttja^nen, v. a., to suppose (wrongly) ''Wltljt, adj., true ^iuci^renb, prep., during; conj. while •/2Bat)rt)ett, f., truth ' SS«4Hpl' 3BaIber), m., forest / 2BaE, m. , rampart XSKanb, f., wall (inside) t^aimp interrog. adv., when? ttinrrtty adj., warm Mrmett^v. a., to warm >4»arten, v. a., to wait l ^afUUl/ adv., why XiM^ pron., what * % ] iflffc% n., water * 2Be(i)fet, m. , note (bill of exchange) S05eg, m. , way, road /ruegen, prep,, on account of ^ftd) tDCtgern, to refuse (v. n.) -m€4{r-6o»j . , because i figeitiy m ^^ine 3Sem§«¥teu, m., vine-yard meig, «dj., white ftrrtfc*dj., wise SB5eigI)eit^.f., wisdom ■ iDCtt, adj., far n)ctd)er, which, who, that U3emg, little, few; ttjemger, less (fewer) Xotv, interr. pron. , who ? SBetter, n., weather ttjte, interr. adv., how ? ber toit bielpe, what day of the month, what (in order) ? *tr)iberfal)ren (strong), v. intr., to befall *fid^ tDtberfeijen, to resist, to oppose irieber, adv., again ''D^OCu/t^'^^^^^^W^^ (strong), v. a., to see again tniff en, irr. v. a. , to know tno, where SKod^e, f. , week tt)0\)i, adv., well trol^lfeil, adj., cheap \voi)ntn, V. n., to dwell, to live, reside 5So^nung, f., residence *SSort (pi. either SBorte or SBortcr), n., word SBimbarjt, m., surgeon SSiJtibe, f., wound jtc^ trunbern, to wonder 2Bunf(^, m., wish, desire tDunfd^eti, V. a., to wish,^ to desire SSurm, m. (pi. aBiirmer), worm 8. 3a^t,f., number *^ ja^ten, v. a. & n., to pay y^. jdl)Ien, V. a. , to number ^ gctc^nen, v. a. & n., to draw (make a yt draft) ^^3eit^.,time geituug* f., newspaper gcrftbren, v. a., to destroy ^m^mtrn., room 3ttnmermann, m., carpenter X #, 30II, m., inch ;k ber 3oIlbcamtc, the custom-house- officer*- \ j«, prep., to; adv. too 3urfcr, III. , sugar jufatlig, adj., accidental r 134 — ^ttfrkka, adj., contented, satisfied, T^Siif"'^^/ f., supply, provisions piOfChm (strong), v. a., to concede ■{^H^'dreiiy V. a., to listen to ' ' gi«nad)en, v. a., to shut ■^urMradv., back gurMfe^ren, v. n., to return guriicflaffen (strong), to leave behind guriicfreifen, v. n., to go (travel), back pUxJ^^dmr^. a., to send back fu]^_4Uru(Jjte^eti (strong), to with- draw, to retreat gttfammen, adv., together guftellen, v. a., to deliver 3uftimmung, f-, approbation, consent ^totd, m.. purpose ^)mu two; ber podtt, the second gttjetfel^aft, adj., doubtful gwetfeitt; V. n. , to doubt gttjetmat; twice F , 6- 1^% d ^ c^ — 135 — READING EXERCISES. ^B®* The words not suggested in the Notes are found in the Vocabulary. •1. pie ^exie. (The Axes.) !Dte9l^ti ehte^ armeu ^intmemtannS tnarMtt etnen ©trom^ ge^ fatten^. (Sr flefjte^ htn j^in^ott' an^ fie i^m mieber ^n brmgen«, ©a' fttegs ber ®ott aup unb bra(i)te« eine golbene 2l^t ^erauf^ „^a^ ift bie metmge md)t/' fprai^^^ t)er 3immermann. ®er glu^gott tau(f)teii in bie Jtiefe^^ unb tam^^ mit ciner fitbernen 2tyt tcieber ^er^ t)or". „2lu(i)i4 biefe ge^ort mir nid)t"/' fagte ber ^xme\ Unb toieber t)erfan!i6 ber ®ott, nnb bra(f)te eine 3ljt Don ©ifen ntit J^otjernem" bu nun" anc^^^ ba^jenige^^ ^erlieren, xoa^^ bi^^er^'^ bein Sigentl^nm^^ iDar^^" ^axe. 2river. ^pluperf. of fatten, I, 99, a. 7 fprang^s er in einen ^a^m^, unb mit grower Slnftrcngung ge- lang e§ i{)m^, ba§ §an^ ju erreitfien. Sr marf" ben Semol^nem^^ ein ®eil53 J^5l^ mittelft beffen^ fie \\d)^^ in ben Sa^n l^erabtie^en^, §ierauf56 brad)te^'^ er, nai^ einem mut^igen^ ^ampfe^^ mit ben (5te^ menten^o, bie ^amilie unbef^dbigt^i am ba^ fid^ere^^ ^fer. 3lfe nnn^^ ber ®raf i^m bie Setol^nung einf)dnbigen iDoUte^s, bie er fo tDo^I t)er' bient«6 l^atte, meigerte er fic&, fie anjune^men, unb fagte: rrQd) t)er* !aufe mein 8eben nii^ts nod^^^ bebarf^^ id^ gure§ ®elbe§, ba meiner §dnbe 3Irbeit micf) unb bie 9JZeinigen'o ernd^rt, ®ebt 3ltie6 ber ar* men i^^^inilie, bie ®ott burd^ mid) gerettet i)at, unb bie afler i^rer §abe^i beraubt ift^^^'' ^during, ^inundation, ^^(jige, 4pass. imperf. of l^intoegrei^en, to carry away, ^bridge, ^current, '^still. ^imperf. of ftel^en, to stand {was left), % 48 ; II, 26. lomiddle. "arch. 121^ 25. '^fic^ Befinben, to be, to stand. >^I, 74; Obs. 3. ^HoU- gatherer. ^^family. 1 "to inhabit. ^^^I, 93. ^^shore. 2oto gather, (past part.) See 1, 105, Obs. 3. 211, 58, 3. 22distinctly. ssghrieks for help. 24distressed. ssjn the midst of, among. ^Ccrowd. sTimperf. of toerf^reci^en. 28by means of. 29sure. 30i struction. 3ito save. ^Sconditional, with the force of a subjunctive of indirect state- ment. See II, 87 note 4; 11,88 note 6. 33reward. a^redundant, 1, 87, Obs. 1. 351^23. 36enough. ^'IL 89, 6. s^fierce. 39current. -^Oentrust, see II, 60, 2. ^ladverb ot time, at this moment, II, 72, 2. -^^l^erBeifcmmcn, to come along, ^speasant. '*4cri- tical. ^ogituation. •♦^bystander, spectator, ''^oss of time, -^simperf. of f^jringeu, to jump, -^^boat, skiff, ^^imperf. of gelingcn, to succeed in; in German used •'mpersonally (it succeeded to him), ^limperf. of juttjerfcn, to.throio (something to jomebody). 52in]iabitant. ^''rope. ^genitive of the relative ber, see II, 16, Rem. I ; n, 61. ssimperf. of M ^eraBIaffcn, to let one's self down, to descend, see I, 99, L ^^ then, afterwards, thereupon, ^"imperf. of bringen, to bring, convey, I, 58. '^vigorous. • s^struggle. ^^baS Clement, the element, ^^unharmed, ^21^ 93^ obs. 1. — 137 — 2. 4. Secure, ^^redundant. ^^zix(^an\>iQtn tootten, to be about to hand, i. e. to tender, ^Ho earn. 6?!^ 19^ Obs. 3. ^Snor. 69pres. of tebilrfen (1, 107), to be in need, construed with the genitive, II, 78, a. 'Omy family, II, 25, 3. '^property, wpres. pass, of l&crau6en, to deprive. See II, 61, § 75. 3. §xn 6flexxexi!^xf^et ^anet. (An Austrian Peasant.) 3Ife bie granjofen im ^^a^re 1809 auf SBiem t)orru(ftem, mar^ fc^irte^ eine6 abenb^^ ber SSortrab^ einer fraujofifc^en 2:rup:penabt^e{=^ iung^ inxd) ein an ber ^eerftra^e^ belegene^ o[terrei(i)if(i)e^ S)orf. S)er Sefe^fe^aber«, ber beabft(J)ttgte, tDd^renb ber 5yfact)t einen tniditigem ^lan^o gegen ben geinb au^3ufitf)ren, forberte^^ einen Saner anf", ber 3lbt^ei(nngi=' aU SBegmeifer^^ ^^ btenen"- 2lber ber Saner UljnW e§i6 ab^^ fid)i7 ^n ehtem fo(^en Slntte" fjerjngebem^ 2lfe ber Dfficier • feine Slnfforbernng^^ bringenber^ tDieber^otte^ be^arrte^^ ber Saner entf(^ieben23 anf fetner SBeigernng^^ ®er Offtcter beftiirmte^^ t^n ntit SSerfprec^nngen nnb bot^e it)m sntefet^^ einen f(^tt)eren Sentel^^ ®oIbe^ ate SeIof)nnng29. Slber 3lHe^ txiar Dergeblicf). -3=njn)if(f)en3o fant bie=^ ienige 2:rn|)penabt]^eilnng an, jn t^etd^er ber 3Sortrab ge^orte, nnb ber ©enerat tnar dn^erft anfgebrarfit^v bag bie SErn:ppen \\^^^ nicf)t fc^om* lange anf bent 9Jiarfd)e befdnben^^^ Site er erfn^r^^ bag ber ein^ige, be« 3Bege§ Innbige^^. 3Kann fi(^ ni(^t beiDegen^^ Iaffe% ate ffiegmeifer in bienen, befaljt er, hen Saner Dorsnfii^ren^s. „gntmeber^/' rief^» er il^m 3n''o, ^jeigft^^ bn nn^ ben rerf)ten 3Beg, ober id) taffe-^^ i^i^ cx\d)k^ ^en«!" — „®e^r tooijtl" ern)ieberte^^ ber Saner, „in biefem galte toerbe ic^ ate rei^tfctiaffener^s Snrger^^ [terben nnb brandEje ni(f)t 8an== be^oerrdt^er^' jn iDerben." ©iefe geftigleit^^ erfiillte^^ ben ©eneral ntit Sen)nnbernng5o. - ®ie §anb be^ aJianne^ ergreifenb^V fpra(^ er: „®e^e {)eint^^ voadtvtx'^ Waml Qd) tDerbe njo^l^ jnfe^en°« tnitffen, toie i(^56 o][)jie gitfjrer^^ an§!omnten«8 fann^^." lYienna. Ho advance, ^to march, "evening, IJ, 79, a. ^advanced guard. ^fbrce. 'an ber ^^eerflrafe betcgen, on the road-side, ^commander, •''important. ^Oplan. "to order, '^(jetachment. i3giiide. ^Ho serve. ^Ho decline, ^^redundant. ^'to lend himself. ^Soffice. i^request. sobvingcnb, urgent, II. 69, Rem. 2. sito repeat. 22to persist, sspositively. 24refusal. 25to overwhelm, sejmperf. of 6icten, to offer. 27at last. 28purse, soj-eward. 30nieanwhile. siirritated, angry. 32to be. ssredundant. 34imperf. of erfal^ren, to learn, ssfu^i^ig^ y^itji genitive, acquainted with, ^eto induce. See II, 81 § 103, b. sTgubjunctive of indirect statement. II, 37. ^Ho bring up. 39either. -^oimperf. of rufen (he said to him), "ito show, "^^to have. ^3 to shoot (n, 81, c). 44to reply, ^honest. "Gcitizen. "Ttraitor. -isfirmness. «to fill. ^Oad- miration. ^Ho seize, sshome. ^sbrave, excellent. 54i.edundant. °Ho look out. *®the auxiliary id^ farm is here used redundantly, a construction with the infinitve being employed in English, s^gui^e. ssto get along, to do. ^9 — 188 — 4. ^cirjog JirBa in flttbofflabt. (Duke Alba in Rudolstadt.) 21(6 ^atfer tarl ber giinfte tm ^'afjrc 154T auf fetnem SDiarfd^ na(^ granfen^ burdft STpringena fam^, ertangte^ bie tDermittmetc^ ©rafin Sat^arina t)on ®rf)lt)ar3burg=$Rubo(ftabt t)om ^aifer eincn ©d^u^briefs fitr xi)vt Untert^anem. 31(6 balb^ barauf^ ber faiferitd^e' Oenerd, ^ei^og^o t)on 2ltba, mtt feinen fijanifdjemi Slruppen \xi) ber ©tabt 9?uboIftabt nd^erte, bat^^ er fi(i)i2 bei^^ ber ©rdfiu auf ein grii^^ ftiid I'* ju ®aft^^ (Sine fo befifieibene^^ Sittei^, an ber ©pi^e^^ etnei §eere6 get^an^^ fonnte ntdjt tt)oI)t abgefdilagen^ merben. (Sin freunb^ ttc^er^o (gmpfang^i unb eiue gut befe^te^s Za\d^ ermartete^^ beu ^tt gog auf bent ©c^Ioffe, Saum^^ fjatte man^^ firf) gefe^t, afe ein ©ilbote* bie ®rdfin au6 bem ©peifefaale^^ rief^^. ©6 toarb^o {f^x gemeftet^i^ ba^ fpanif^e ®oIbaten in einigen ©iirfern ®en)alttptig!eiten32 Der^ itbt33 unb ben ^Bauern^^ ba^ 3Sie^35 i^eggetrieben^e fatten, Sat^arim auf^ au^erfte" erttritftet^, befal)! i^rer ganjen !iDienerjc^aft»9, fi fdlleunigf^o unb in^ge^eim^^ ju ben^affnen^^ xinh bie ®d)Io§pforten^3 jj Derfd)(ie§en» 3ll6 fie na^ bem ©^jeifefaale juriicfgete^rt mar, be Etagte^^ fie fit^^^ Uber^^ ba^, n^a^^^ ^ gugetragen^^^ unb baritber, bar- man feine 9tii(ffirf)^9 auf ben faiferUd^en ©d^u^brief genommen^ ^be^. 3)er ^erjog ertoieberte^^ lad^enb^^ ba^ bie^ Srieg^gebrau^^j fei^; unb ba^ bergleidfien^^ f(eine^« Unfdlle^^ auf bem 3)Zarf(f)e uuDer* meiblid)^'^ u^dren^. „k)a^ gotten tr)ir fe^en/' antiDortete bie ©rdfiri unb t)ertie^^» ba§ 3^"^^^^'/ ^^^ fi^ i^ menigen Slugenbliden^^ mit ^e* iDaffneten^o fitllte^i, bie fic^ mit gejogenen^^ ©(^toertern^^ e^rerbietigft* j^inter^-* ben®tii^(en ber ®dfte aufftellten^^ ©er ^erjog t)erdnberte' bie garbe^'. Slbgcfcijuitten^s Don ber 2lrmee, bliej^^^ t^j^ j^ic^t^ itbrig^^ aW^ bie beleibigte !i)ame, auf toelcf)e'i Siebingungen e6 ami)'' fei, ju Derfolinen'^. ^einric^ t)on SraunfditDeig, einer ber Segteiter'^ be3 ^erjog^, fagte fid^'^ guerft'^- unb brad^'« in ein" faute^'^ ®etd(f)ter'» au§'^ Sr ergriffs® ^en t)ernUnftigen»i 2lngtt)egs2^ ben ganjen 25or= gang83 in^ 8d(i)erli(i)e ju giel^en^^ inbem^^ er ber ®rdfin itber i^n Sorgfatt^e ^\xx xijxt Untert^anen eine gobrebe I)iett8', 3^^^^^^ Dermo(^te«9 er ben ^erjog, auf ber ©telle^o ben Sefel)!^^ ^u geben, bai gefto^tene 2Sie^ ben ©igentpmern jurixdjufteQem^. (Sobalb^^ bi( ®rdfin fic^ Uberjeugt^^ ^atte, bap ber ©efeljt au^gefii^rt merbet iDiirbe, bantte fie i^ren ®dften auf^ t)erbinblidt|fte95, unb bie tefeteren' t)erabfrf)iebeten9' fid)^' mit grower i)5fli(i)feit»^ 'Franconia. ^xhuringia, ^imperf. of !ommen, to come^ to pass. '*to obtain - 130 — •widowed. Hetters of protection, "subject (weak decl.). ^later. ^imperial, wduke. ''Spanish, 'fi^ ju (^aft !6»itteit, to invite one's self, '^at the residence, "lunch. Immodest, ''request, '"at the head. '^made. '^to refuse, -'^cordial 2»reception. 22fui.nished. actable, ^^to await, zsgcarcely. *<'!, 54, Obs. ^Texpress messenger, ^s^ining hall. ^gimperf. of rufen, to call. "^I, 77, foot-note, ^'to report. 32acts of violence. ^Ho commit, ^-ijative after verbs of taking away, IT, 78, b; to be translated as if a genitive dependent on SSiel^. ^ocattle. ^ j^inwegtreiben, to carry away. 3'extremely. s^provoked. ^o^ody of servants, "^^rapidly. -^ 'in secret, ■^'toarm. -^^gatesof the castle, ^^to complain, ^^of. ''^1,26.27. ''Ho transpire. Supply the auxiliary l^atte. ^^of the fact that. ^'9tii(ffi(!^t nel^men auf, to pay regard to. ^%ub- junct. of indirect statement, II, 88, 6, h (foot-note). ^Ho reply. ^Ho laugh, ^^us- ageofwar. ^^11, £8, 6, a (foot-note), ^''such. ^* petty annoyances, ^'unavoidable. -58iniperf. of toerlaffen. ^^moments (masc). coarmed men II, 77, § 101, 1. ^'to fiil, I. 83, Obs. I ; II, 81, a. ^"^drawn sw^ords. '^most respectfully. <^ -^behind. <^Ho arrange, draw up, ^^^change. <^'color. <^^past part, of abfc(>neiben. ^^^^as left. ''^U, 66, 5. 7'whatsoever, II, 67, a.; 89, 7. '-to reconcile, '^companion, "^to compose one's self, '-'first, 'imperf. of au^bvcc^en, to burst (out), ^'redundant, '^loud. "'laughter. Resorted to. ^^sensible. ^-expedient. ^^jQcident. ^^to turn into ridicule, ^'par- ticipial construction in English. ^* solicitude. -' to eulogize, ^^at last, ^"^toermi^gen, to induce, I, 108; 11, 56. ** ^^on the spot. ^'order. ^^to return, to restore, -^as soon as, 11, 66, 4. ^j'ij^jgijjeitgen, to convince, to satisfy, ^^in the most obliging manner, II, 69, c. ^cjatter. ^"to take leave, ^^politeness, courtesy. 5. ^CX §bdUa6c. (The Page.) Gin (Sbettnabe (latte im aSorjiminev^ griebridj bc§ ©rof^cn bie 9?ad)ttDad)e2. 55er ^ouig, bcr uidjt fc^lafeu fonutc, ffincjeltc^ imb giug% ba bcr Snabe nidjt erfd}ieii^ fclbft^ in^ SSorjimmcr. Gr faub' ten 3wng(iiu3« in ticfem @d}lafc» Dor eincm 5:ifd)e fi^enb, auf mU d)cm cin angefangener Srief lag^^. I)er ^dnig ual)m" ben ®ricf, bcr a()0'2 (autetc'3: „*^iebe DJZutterl !Dic^ ift mmi^ )d)oiti^ bie britte )Rad)tf bap id) fur bie aubereu (Sbetfnabcu bie 9iad}tiDadje ti)nc; abcr id) !aim ha^ ^adjcn^'^ bcina()e'« widjp^ mel)r'« au^l)a(tcu^'. ^ubeffcm^ l)abe id) I)ierburd)i9 fcit brei a55od)eii 3el)u S()a{er Dcrbicnt^^ uie(d)c id) bir«» jursi grquicfung^i in beiucr traurigen22 gagc^^ [cube — ." 5^icfc fiublid)e23 giebe^^ gefiel^^ beat ilouig, uub cr ftccf tc^^ bcin^' ^imbcii cine 9iolIe=8 ®oIbftit(Je29 in bie Za\d)c^^ ©icfcr^i crrictl)"^ bei^ fcinem (Sr* it)ad)en33fogleid), iDo()cr=^* ba^ ®elb gefoinmen fci^^ Gr marp fid) bcm" tonig, fobatb^s biefcr am udd)ftcn 9)?orgen aufgeftanbcn wav^, jn gni^ Bcn-'o, unb hat^' iDcgcn fciner3Jad)(dffigfeit uin a?er5cil)ung'«i. ®cr £5^ nig abcr pric^'^=* bie finblid)e ?icbe feinc^ Gbclfnabcn, unb bcobad)tcte« i^n Don t^a aiv^ ndl)cr^^ U)oburd)'^« bie gute 3)icinung'*', bie cr Don il)ni bcgtc^s, Dot(tommen^»beftdtigt tDurbc. T)icfcr ^nabe rjarb in feincn fpd* teren 8ebcnej[.i()ren^ burd) ba^ SJcrtrauen^^ fcinc^ SJ^onard)^^ y^i cincr ber I}i)c^fteu^» uub DcrautiDortUd)ften'* ® tcKungcn im )pocket. ^ithe latter (this one), II, 77, 1. ^sjniperf, of ct* rat^'en, to guess, ^il, C2 Rem. 2, 3): wJieufie awoke (at his awakening), ^''whence, 2^11, 87, 2 (foot-note). 3 imp, of toerfen, to throw. 3-possessive dative. ^?is soon as. 3'?piuperf. of aufftel^en. -^oto be connected with ttjavf fi(^. -"imperf. of bitten; urn SScrjci^ung bitten, to ask pardon, '^^impej.f. of ^rcifen, to praise, to commend, ''^to observe. ^ toon ba an, since that time, -^^more closely. "* whereby, ^"opinion. ^%eld, had. •*9fully. "Olife, years of life, ^'confidence, ^^monarch (weak decL, II» 5, § 11, 3). ^I, 22. ^toeranttoortlic^, responsible, ^^state. ^ berufen, to calL • 6. ^ofTir^ftcif. (Civility.) 3n bcr 9W^c» ciue^ italidni|d}cu= X)ox\^ kbit ein ^mtr, ber eincn ©oI)n, 9Jamene3 ge(i^% I)attc. 5)urd} bie 3lnnutl)^ fcincr (SItern war* bicfcr finabc gcnotljigt^ fcinea Uittcr()a(t6 bitrd) ®d)iDcinct)Uten' gu i)crbiencu«. i^tli^ mar immer sudorfommenb^ imb l)ofIid) Qcgen ,3^^^ bermann; bie anberu Suabcu im !Dorfe abcr mareit unficimb Udf iinb rol)". (Sine^ 2^agc^" fam ciii dJlondj^^ bcr cineu ^egrjciferi^ be* gc^rte", in^ 5)orf. Sd^renb bie anberu £nabeu beiifclbcui^ uiit $Rof)l)cit'« be()anbclten, crbot^^ fid) geli^- auf^ freuubUd)fte'8 gum 5K?c(|* JDcifcr. 2luf bem SScge bcmertte ber iDIoiic^, ha^ 3*c(ij 2^a(ent fjatte, unb e^ getang'* i()nr''' fpdter, bem H'uabeu ^^Iufnal)mc2» in fcin illofter^ gu ocrfdjaffen-^ §ier ftnbirte gelij auf^ fleifeigftc, nnb, obmol}!-^ cr balb einer ber ge(el)rteften Don aUen 9)2ond}en luurbe, btieb^^ cr bcn^ nod)" bemut^ig^^ I)of(id) nub guuorfommenb. ©iefe (Sigen)d)aftcn mad)tcn2' i^n 2lllen, bie i^n fannten-% licb^' nub \y)cvt{,^\ nnb fo ifant c^, bai3 cr balb ju I}oI)en Stellnngen bcfbrbcrt^» marb. tSr murbc S3ijd^of»^, Garbinat, nnb, al^ bcr ^ap)>i ftarb^^ marb cr am 24. 9{pril 1585 cinftimmig33 gnm ^apft crmd^Its^ gr rcgiertc nnter bem 9fa^ men Siytu^ ber giinfte, nnb CS ift befannt, ta^ cr ju bea grogteu aller *ij3dpfte geI)orte. inear. -Italian, ^^y name, •'poverty, 'imperf. pass, of notl^igen, to compeL See I, 77, Obs. 2. <^to earn his living, "by tending a herd of swine. 1, 105. ^oblig- ing, ^impolite. lOrude. "one day, 11, 5, a. i^monk. "guj^^^ >jto ask for. 1 berfetbc has often the force of lie. » rudeness, ''imperf. of crbieten. ' i.i the gentlest manner. '%e succeeded ia. ^Oadmission. 2iconvent. 22^0 procure, to ob- tain. 231^ 1C2. 24iiiiperf. of Heilen. "i^ ^02, Obs. 2. 2. humble. sTjieb unb wertf mat^cn, to endear. *-I, £8, Obs. 2. ^to promote, ^obishop (II, 74, 75, § 90, 3). '•pope, sejinperj, of ftcrbcn.. saunanimously. 34to elect, to choose, II, 73, h % 0. f/4 f^^ AHN'S METHOD OF LEARNING THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. REVISED GUSTAVUS FISCHER. SECOND (THEORETICAL) COURSE. Fourth Edition. NEW YORK: E. S t e i g e r. 18t2. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, by E. Steiger, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washin£t<»i* E. Stkiger, New York, Printer and Electrotyper, CHAPTER L PRELIMINARY REMARKS. § 1. The German Language is composed of eight parts of speech. They are: the Article, the Noun or Substantive, the Adjective, the Pronoun, the Yerb, the Adverb, the Preposi- tion, and the Conjunction. § 2. There are in German two numbers: the Singular and the Plural; three genders: the Masculine, the Feminine, and the Neuter; four cases: the Nominative, the Genitive, the Dative, and the Accusative.* OF THE ARTICLE. § 3. I. Declension of the definite Article, Singular. Plural Masculine. Feminine. Neuter, for all genders. Nom. ber, bie, ^a^, tilt the Gen. beg, ber, beg, bcr, of the Dat. bem, ber, bem, ben, to the Ace. ben, bic, bag. btc, the. § 4. II . Declension ofth^ indefinite Article, Nom. ein, etnc, ein, a Gen. etncg, eincr, eineg, of a Dat. elnem, ciner, einem, to a Ace. eineu, eiue, ein, a * The nominative answers to the English nominative case, the accusa- tive to the objective case without preposition, and the genitive to the pos- sessive Ci\se, or to the objective case vfithqf. The dative generaUy answers to the objective with to. 3 CHAPTER II. NOUNS (SUBSTANTIVES). I. GENDER. § 5. Nouns denoting persons have a natural gender, and • are masculine or feminine according to their sex: ber 3)2ann, the man; bie gi^^ii^ the woman; ber ®(i)neiber, the tailor. There is no common gender in German.* Exceptions.— 2)a§ SSeib, the woman (wife); ba§ 9}^dbd}en, the girl; bag Cfiulein, the young lady, and all other diminutives in d)ert and Icin (as: ha^ 55^nlein, the little son); bag ©ema^I, husband or wife; bic ®d)ilbmacf)e, the sentinel; bie SSaifc, the orphan (both male and female); b e t SP'^m t b gl, Hhe ward (male and female); ^inb (child) is always neuter. § 6. Designations of persons according to their occupa- tions and other qualities, with but few exceptions, are originally masculine^ referring to the male sex only. From these nouns those designating females are derived by attaching to them the ending in: ®raf (count), ©rdfin (countess); Sonig (king), SoaU gilt (queen); ®d)neiber (tailor), ®d)neiberiu (dressmaker). The radical vowel of these derivatives in in is almost always softened. Remark, — ^This method of derivation applies also to some nouns denoting brutes: ber SSolf (wolf), bie SSolfin (she-wolf). § 1. Nouns denoting things, concrete or abstract, belong to all three genders: ber i^ki^, the diligence; \)k U[)r, the watch; ber 3JJnt^, the courage; bie £unft, the art; ba^ SOZccr, the sea. The gender of these nouns, some derivatives excepted, cannot be determined by general rules, but must be learned by practice and the lexicon. § 8. Of DERIVATIVE nouus thosc with the endings ei, l^eit, feit, fdiaft and nng are without exception feminine: \>ic®d}mtid}c^ let (flattery), bie greil)eit (liberty), bie aJldBigfeit (temperance), bie greunbic^aft (friendship), bie §offnung (hope). § 9. The diminutives (with the endings d)en and (ein) are without exception neuter: ba3 So^ntein or @o{)nd}cn (the little son); ba^ Sndblein (the little boy). Nouns in t()umare likewise NEUTER, except ber ^rrt^unt (the mistake); ber ^eid)t(}um (wealth).. * The noun ber ^at^e, the god-son; bie ^atl^e, the god-daughter may be considered as an exception. II — 5 — Remaeks. — 1. Names of countries, cities and villages are NEUTER (a very few excepted). 2. Compound nouns take the gender of their last component, a few compounds of the masculine 2JiutI) excepted: bie 5lnnutl), poverty; bic ©I'Ogmut^, generosity; bic ©anftmutl), meekness, and a few others. 3. Some nouns have two genders, but with different meanings: 2)er 53anb, the volume; boS 8anb, the ribbon; ber dxbe, the heir; ba§ (Srbc, the inheritance; ber ®d)ilb, the shield; i>a^ @c^itb, the sign (of an inn); ber X^or, the fool; ba§ 2:()or, the gate; ber 35erbienft, the earnings; ha^ 3^erbienft, merit; ber @ec, the lake; tic ®ec, the sea; ber §eibc, the heathen; tie §eibc, the heath. /^ il. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. § 10, There are two declensions, the weak and the strong. I. WEAK DECLENSION. § 11. To the WEAK declension belong: 1. all masculine nouns ending in e (except ber Safe), as: ber ^mbc (the boy), ber®el)li(fe (the assistant), ber ^reu|e (the Prussian); 2. several masculine nouns which have dropped their former ending e;* 3. most appellations of males taken from foreign languages, provided they have their accent on their ultima, f as: ber S:t)rann (the tyrant); ber 3:i)eotog (the theologian); ber ^rinj (the prince); ber Stubent (the student); 4. most feminine nouns (for exceptions see § 13. Rem. 2), which however are in- declinable in the singular number: bie grau (the woman); bie ®c^i5nl)eit (the beauty). § 12. The weak declension takes in all cases of the sin- gular (except in the nominative) and of the plural the ending cn^ and is inflected after the following scheme: * The most important of these nouns are: §ctb (hero), ©rof (count), Sflrfl ^prince), §irt (herdsman), SWenfc^ (man), ^crr (gentleman), ^^or and Vlaxx (fool), ^dr (bear), 0(1)8 or Od){e (ox). To these must be added some few national nouns in r, as Ungar (Hungarian), 33atcr (Bavarian). Many of the nouns mentioned have retained their ending e in popular dialects and often in poetry. t Most of these nouns likewise added formerly the ending t, and some do still so in poetry and popular dialects, as: ber Xtixannt (in Schiller), ber X^eologe. Feminines. Nom. S)ie grau, the woman Nom. Gen. ber Srau, of the woman (the Gen. woman's) Dat. ber grau, to the woman Dat. Ace. bie grau, the woman Ace. — 6 — Masculines. Singular. Plural. Nom» !Der ilnabC, the boy Nom. bte ^uabcit, the boys Gen. be^ ^uabcit, of the boy (the Gen. ber ^'uabcil, uf the boys (the boy's) boys') Dat. bent ^'nabcti, to the boy Dat. ben ^nabctt, to the boys Ace. ben ^nabeil, the boy Ace. bie ^nabCtt, the boys. bie grauett, the women ber graueil, of the women (the women's) ben grauctt, to the women tilt graucit, the women. Kem. — 1. The feminine nonns in cr and el add only the endin.::^ tt to the nominative, as: bie ®d)tt»efter (sister), plur. bie @d)n)eftertt; bie ©abel (fork), plur. bie ©abettt. §err takes in the singular the ending n, in the plural ctt (be§ §erril, bie §errcu). Feminines in in double the ji in the plural (bie ^onicjiu, plur. bie ^bniginitcu). 2. The following' masculine nouns in e: griebe (peace), gunfe (spark), ©ebante (thought), ©efalle (favor), ©lanbe (faith), §aufe (heap), 9lame (name), ®ame (seed), @d)abe (damage), SBiHe (will) and the neuter ba6 §erj (heart), take in the genitive singular cn§ instead of Ctt, but retain in all other cases the ending en {^tX}^, being a neuter, makes the aceusative like the nominative). All masculine nouns here mentioned, have in the nom. sing, a collateral form in en (ber grieben, @e fallen etc.). II. STRONG DECLENSION. § 13. All NEUTER nouns (except ^erj) and those masculines and feminines not following the weak declension, belong to the STRONG declension, according to the following PARADIGM. ;^ Singular, Plural. Nom. 2)er giW, the fish Nom. bie gifd)C, the fishes Gen. be§ gifd)C$, of the fish (the fish's) Gen. ber gifd)C, of the fishes Dat. bent gifc^C (bent gifc^), to the fish Dat. ben gi)d)Ctt, to the fishes Ace. ben gifc^, the fish Ace. bie gifd)C, the fishes. ^^* Decline thus: ber greunb, the friend; ber §unb, the dog; berSBein, the wine; ber ^reig, the circle; 't^a^ S^erbienft, the merit; ha^ ^inbernig*, the obstacle. * Final j^, when an ending is attached to it, must be changed into ff if the preceding vowel is short, which is always the case with the vowels e andt. Rem. — 1. All feminine and most masculine nouns belonging to the strong declension, that have the radical vowels a, 0, U, au,soften them in the plural in a, 0, ii, du, as: ber ^a^n, the boat, plur. bie ^d^ne; ber ®o^n, the son, plur. bie @oI)ue; ber gug, the foot, plur. bie ^ii^t; ber iBaum, the tree, plur. bie ^dume. The radical vowels in the plural of the weak declension are never softened. 2. The f jllowing feminine nouns (being indeclinable in the singular) follow this declension: 1. all ending in iiig (as: bie iBetriibnig, the affliction, plur. bie iBetriibniffe; bie ^enntnig, the knowleJge, plur. bie ^enntniffe u. j. tt).; 2. about thirty monosyllabics among which are: hit %ict (axe), iBan! (bench), iBruft (breast), ©ang (goose), §anb (iiand), ^raft (strength), ^unft (art), Tla&it (power), aJiaug (mouse), 9^ad)t (night), ®tabt (town), SBanb (wall), and a few compounds. PAEADIGM. Singular. Plural. Nom. 2)te @tabt, the town Nom. bie @tdbtC, the towns Gen. ber @tabt, of the town Gen. ber (Stdbte, of the towns Dat. ber @tabt, to the town Dat. ben @tdbtCtt, to the towns Ace. bie @tabt, the town Ace. bie @tdbte, the towns. c-w 3. The e in the ending e^ of the gen. sing, is often dropped if the word can be conveniently pronounced without it, especially if the word consists of more than one syllable, as: 5(ufrul)r (sedition) gen. 5(ufrul)r^ (hardly 5luf»= rul^reg); SiincjUng (young man) gen. ^iinglingS (not ^iincilinge^) ; but^^obe^ (hardly XoH); gi(cJ[)eg (not gifd)§); ^x^m (not %x^U). The e of the dative may always be dropped. 4» Nouns ending in et, Cl, Ctt must drop the C of all endings in both singular and plural. Singular. Plural. Nom. 2)er 5Sciter, the father Nom. bie 3>dter, the fathers Gen. be« SSatcr^, Gen. ber mttx, Dat. bem 33ater, Dat. ben iBdterit, Ace. beu ^ater, Ace. bie iBdter. Here belong the two femine nouns Tluttex, mother (plur. SD^iitter) and ^od)ter, daughter (plur. Xod)ter). Nouns in Ctt do not take another n in ^J the dative plural, so that their plurals have entirely the appearance of the '-^^ WEAK declension: ber ©arteit (the garden), dat. pi. htn ©drtcn, *^ § 14. Many monosyllabic neuters, a few masculines, and all nouns ending in t()um (as: ber 3{cicf)t()um, wealth; bci^3 gurften* t^um, the principality) form their plural by the ending er, to 8 which they add the ending ti in the dative. They always soften the radical vowels a, o, u, au.* Singular. Nom. 2)a§ %n\i, the oflace Gen. bc§ %mit^f Dat. bent ^mtc, Ace. t>(x§> %mif Plural. Nom. bic ^cmtcr, the ofl&ces Gen. bcr 5(emtct, Dat. ben ^emtcrii, Ace. bie SCemtcr. All monosyllabics following this declension (except some few not often used) are contained in the following list: 2)er @eift, the mind; ber @ott, the god; ber ?eib, the body; ber Wiaxm, the man; 2)a§ 2(mt, the office; ba^iBab, the bath; \iCi^ 33anb, the ribbon; \>Ci^ 33ilb, the image; ta^ ^{aii, the leaf; ba§ 33rett, the board; ^d^ 33ud), the book; ba§ "^(k^f the roof; ba§ !5)orf, the village; bag Si^ the egg\ bag gad), the shelf; \>Ci^ gag, the cask; bag gelb, the field; bag @e(b, the money; bag ©tag, the glass; bag ©lieb, the limb; bag (Srab, the grave; bag ©rag, the grass; bag @ut, the good; bag §aupt, the head; bag ^aug, the house; bag §0(5, the wood; bag §orn, the horn; ber £)rt, the place; ber 9ianb, the border; ber 3Ba(b, the forest; bcr iSBurm, the worm. bag ipu^n, the chicken; bag talb, the calf; bag tinb, the child; bag ^leib, the dress; bag ^OXWf the grain; bag ^raut, the herb; bag ?amm, the lamb; bag ?anb, the country; bag ?tcl)t, the light; bag !?ieb, the song; bag $?od), the hole; bag D^eft, the nest; bag 9Jab, the wheel; bag 9teig, the twig; bag 9iinb, the cattle; ba§@d)i(b, the shield; bag ®d^Io6, the castle; bag ®djmert, the sword; bag %\)G\, the valley; bag %\X&\, the cloth; bag 33olf, the people; bag SBctb, the woman; bag SBortJ, the word. * Neuter nouns formins: their plurals in e,flo not soften their radical: bag Satjr (year), bie 3a^re; bag Xt)or (gate), bie Xt)ore etc. % i)ag SSort forms the phn-iil SSortC, if words in logical connection with each other are designated; but SBorter, if unconnected words are referred to. — 9 — § 15. The following masculine and neuter nouns decline STRONG in the singular, and weak in the plural: 1. Two neuters in e: aiuge, eye; dn'Ot, end; 2. those contained in the following list: S)er gorjlt, the forest; bcr @cc, the lake; ter @au, the district;- ber ®pont (pi. @porcn), the spur; tcr ©coatter, the godfather; ber ®ta(^c(, the prick; I ber Sorbeer, the laurel; ber (Strati, the ray; bcr iOlaft, the mast; ber Uutcrt^an, the subject (citizen); ber 9^aci^bar, the neighbor; ber 35ettcr, the cousin; ber ©Cftmerg, the pain; ber B^txatli, the ornament. ba« S3ett, the bed; t>a^ ?elb, the sorrow; bag §emb, the shirt; ha^ £)^r, the ear. To these must be added several nouns taken from foreign languages, as: 1. Those ending in or, taken from the Latin (^JjJrofeffor, Gen. ^rof effort, plur. ^^JrofcfforCtt, with the accent on the penult). 2. The names of the Roman offices: ^ribun, (Sonfut, etc. 3. Several nouns that cannot be classified, as: @taat, state (plur. (gtaateit); 2)iamant (diamond), ^xn^ (interest), infect (insect), $falm (psalm), and some others, § 16. Irregular plurals. 1. Masculine and neuter nouns borrowed from the French and English languages generally form their plurals in ^, if their terminations disagree with those of German words, (bie ©epartement^, btc ®enie^, bie 8orb^, bic Stuart^, bic (Slub^.*) 2. Words taken from the Latin in um form their plurals in en: ©tubtum, pi. ©tubicti; (Suangetium; (gospel), pi. ©Dangclieu; ^n^i^ibuum (individual), pi. 3'nbtt)i=' buctt. 3. The compounds with SJiann generally change this word in Scute (people) in the plural: ^aufmann (merchant), pi. Saufleute; ganb^mann (countryman), pi. ganb^fcutc. III. DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. § It. Proper nouns (even the names of females) decline STRONG, but always drop the e in the ending of the genitive and dative sing.: Nom. ^arl, Gen. .^art^, Dat. tart; Nom. !iDcutffI)== * In conversational style this ending 8 is often applie0, or WOt if the preposition be- gins with a vowel. These forms are prefixed to the prepositions, as: ttJOtJon, of (from) what (not t)on \va§>); tt)orin, in what (not in tt)a^); tVO\ilX, for what (less good fiir \va^). SSomit bifl bu befd^dftigt ? With what art thou occupied ? SS^oriit beftel)t e8? In what does it consist? iBof iir leben Wix ? For what do we live ? II. PERSONAL SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 19, The pronouns denoting the grammatical persons are thus declined: SINGULAR, First persm,. Second person. Nom. id), I;* , bu, thou; Gen. nteiucr, of me; beiner, of thee; Dat. tnir, to me; bir, to thee; Ace. m\6), me. PLURAL. bi^, thee. Nom. XOXX, we; il)r, you; Gen. unfer, of us; tXXtXf of you; Dat. un§, to us; ^ eucf), to you; Aco. une, us. Third person, SINGULAR. eud^, you. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Nom. cr, he; fte, she; C«, it; Gen . feiner, of him; \\)XtX, of her; feiner, of it; Dat . il)m, to him; t^r, to lier; il)m, to it; Ace . il)n, liim; fie, her; eg, it. *3^d), is also used as a noun of the neuter gender: 'td^ 3c^ (^"r own self), and has then the declension of nouns, not of pronouns (Gen. be§ 3c!^§; Dat. bem 3(i)). It is also used without endings: meineS 3ci) etc. 12 — PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS. Nom. jic, they; Gen. i^rer, of them; Dat. iljnen, to them; Ace. fie, them, § 20. 1. The pronouns of the first and second persons are also used as reflexive pronouns (see Part I, p. 52 and 83), corresponding to the English compounds with self (myself, thyself, ourselves etc.): 3d) ^^f^J^ftiQe m i rf) , I occupy my^eZ/; i^r bcf d)dftigt t\x^, you occupy yourselves. 2. The same is the case with the genitive sing, and plur. of the third person: er ift feincr beipu^t, he is conscious of him' self; fie ift i ^ r c r nid)t mdd)tig, she has no control of herself 3. But the datives and accusatives of the third person in all genders and both numbers take the form f i d^ , which corresponds to the forms (to) himself, (to) herself, (to) itself, (to) them- selves. ®^ I f.-,f f ; A ^^^'Aa^, beff Clt, whose, of whom, of which berctt, beffcn, bem, to whom, to which bcr, bent, ben, whom, which bic, bas. — 16 ~ interrogative Wtiijtx. 2Ba§ declines like the interrogative ma^, and bcr declines like the definite article with this difference that it adds the weak ending cu to the genitive of all genders and numbers, and to the dative plural: ber, bie, ha^ (who, which, that). Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. PLURAL OF ALL GENDERS. Nom. bie, who, which, that Gen. berCIt, whose, etc. Dat. benClt, to whom, etc. Ace. bie, whom, etc. Rem. — 1. The German language does not, as the English, employ the interrogative substantive pronoun tvcx (who) as a relative. But both, the adjective pronoun tt>et(f)er, and the word ber (properly demonstrative) correspond to each of the Enp^lish relatives* who, which and thai. 2. The genitive of the pronoun tvcidjtv can generally not be employed as a relative. Instead of it must be used the genitives of bet (beffen, beretl in both singular and plural: The hoy whose father you know, bcr ^nabc, b e j f cn (not iDe!(d)e8) 2>atcr (Sie fenncn. Only if the relative is connected as attribute with a NOUN, the use of ber is forbidden in all cases, and in this instance Xt)tU d)e°v n)etd)er must be used in the genitive: iBertin, U) e I d) c (Stabt (8ie fennen (m e (d) e r ®tabt Gigent^umlid)feiten ®ie fennen), Berlin, which city you know (the peculiarities of which city you know). 3. The relative n)a§ must be used for the English which or thai if a relative pronoun is required after indefinite or demonstrative pronouns, used without nouns in the neuter gender: 5lfle§, UJa^ (ill that), 3>iele§, Wa^ (much that), ba§ or bagjenige, roaS (that which), not OTcS, ha^ (n)cld)e§), SSieteS, ha^ (tt)e{d)e§) or baS (ba^jenige), t>a^ or n)c(c^e§. But if in tlds instiince the relative stands in the genitive, befjen (not n>ef|*en) must be used (see the examples). * There is no difference in the use of n)Cld)er and ber as relatives. 2)cr is far more used in colloquial language, and is generally preferred in writing, unless euphonic reasons mike its use inelegant. Nobody would for instance write: ber, ber ber erfte ift (instead of: ber, m e I d) e r ber erfte ifl (he who is the first). But it is certainly thus used ii\ sj)eaking, since the pitch of the three ber's is different. After personal and interrogative pro- nouns bcr must always be used in place of X\)t\d)CX: I who, id}, ber etc. i — IT — EXAMPLES OF RELATIVES. Nora. !IDer ^ann, bcrormeld)cr (not mer) bit c« gejogt l^ot, the man who (that) bus told you (it). 2)ie ^inbcr, b i e or tt) e( d}e mit bir gejpieU ^abcn, the children who have played with you. S)ie i8ud)er, b t e or uj e ( d) e bir gel^i3ren, the hooks which (that) helong to you. Wc^, \va^ (not baS or ire(d)e§) niir geljort, all that belongs to me. Gen. S)er 9J?ann, bcff en (not tDcId)e§ or n^effen) §au§ ic^ gefauft l)abc, the man ivhose house I have boTight, S)ie ^inbev; b e r e n (not hjeld)er or ujeffcn) Satcr il^r fennt, the children whose father 3'ou know. 2)a§ §au«, b eff en ©ebrand) ®ie l)aben, the house the use of which you have. Wic^, b e f f en (not ujcffen or njeld^es) \i)X befdjulbigt felb, all of which you are accused. Dat. 2)er greunb, mit b cm or roctd) em (not mit wtm) xetd)en (not iuen) hn fennft, the man whom you know. 2)a3 ^ferb, b a S or m e t C^ C 8 bn reiteft, the horse which (that) you ride. %Uc^, nj a § (not t>a^ or weId)C§) ic^ ge!}ort ^abc, all (that) I have heard. 3. Demonstrative Pronouns, § 31. The demonstratives are: L ber, that (plur. those); 2. bicfcr, this (plur. these); 3. jener, that; 4. foldjet, such; 5. berjenige (see § 35.)^ and 6. berfelbe, the same. § 32. The pronouns bicfer^ jencr and foldjcr decline strong throughout (see the paradigm orbiefer, § 26.). Of fo(d)er exists a collateral form fold) Ctlt, such a, of which only the indefinite article ein is declined: vgotd) cinem 2Jiauue, to such a man. Such ah also rendered eiu fold)er, and inflected like ein jeber, § 39. * The change of tt)a§ into tDO in connection with prepositions takes also place if \va^ is a relative (§ 18, Hem). Many make U8(; of the combinations witli \y)o even in the place of the relatives bet or n)etd)Cl*, as: bie J^cbev, lU omit tc^ fd)reibe, instead of: bie geber, mit b c r or m e I d) e r id) fc^rcibe, the pen with which I am writing. But others object to the usage. — 18 — Examples: — This man, btefCt 3Raun; of that woman, Jcnet 5rau; to this child, jeucm ^inbe; to those men, icucii 2Jlannern. § 33. The demonstrative ber* is declined like the article if it is followed hj a noun with which it agrees in gender, number, and case. W\t "i^tw •33ii(J)ern taim id) nidjt^ tl)iin, with those books I cannot do anything. But if its noun is understood, it has the same declension as the relative bcr (§ 30). It is thus frequently used with the force of an emphasized personal pro- noun of the third person: 3) c n fenne id) nici)t, him I do not know. 2) a§ tami id) iud)t t^mt, that I cannot do. S) e r en gtbt c§ raenige, of those there are few. SDlit bene u !ann xi) nic^U tt)un, with thosel cannot do anything* § 34. In berjc:iige and berfelbe each of the two components bcr and jcutQe (fe(te) is inflected: bcr, entirely like the article, and ieitlije (fctbe) after the weak form (§ 27.): SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine, Feminine. Neuter. All Genders. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. bcrjenige iJCiSjeiugctt bcmjeuigctt i>Cttiemgeu ^iejentgc bcrjenigcit ' l^crienigcn feicienige fea^jenige ^ci^ienigcit fccmjenigett ba^jemge ^icjenigctt ^crjentgen ^ctlientgctt Hcjenigett Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. l)crfetbc feicfelbc fcC^Sjelbcn (2:en- erally beffelben) bcrfetbcit bemfelbcu ^crieIbcu t>enfelbctt t)icfetbc ^a^feIbe (generally written baffetbe) beffelben (beffelben) &cmfetbctt &a^felbc Mcfelben berfetbett bcnfelbcn Hcfelbeit. § 35. ©crjenige is used only in a correlative connection. It corresponds: 1) to the English he or its equivalent the one (pi. those^ the ones), if these words are determined and com- pleted by a relative clause; 2) to the English tJiat (the one, pi. those, the ones), if these words take the place of a noun previously mentioned, provided that a relative clause or a de- pendent phrase is attached to the demonstrative. * The vowel c in the demonstrative ber is more strongly emphasized than either in the article or in the relative ber. If the word is connected, as demonstrative, with a noun, it is always spaced in print, to distinguish it from the article. — 19 — SDerjemge, bcr feme greunbe ^at, ifl gu betlagen, he (the one) who has no friends is to be pitied. S)ieientgen, tie nic^t benlen, tebeit ntd)t, those (the ones) who do not think, do not live. SSldw $au§ ift fi^oner, al8 ba^ieuige bctneS iBruberg, my house is more beautiful than that (the one) of thy brother. 2)iefe^ ^ferb ift groger at§ ba§jentge, 'tid^ bu gefauft l^afl, this horse is larger than the one (that) which you have bought. Rem. — 1. The masculine sing, berjetttge, ber if both words are in the nominative, may be replaced by the interrogative tD er, and the plural bie*- jentgen, bie may be replaced by b i e alone. 2S e r tetiie greunbe l)at, tfl gu be* flagen, who has no friends etc. ; 2)ie ni(f|t benten, leben nic^t, those who do not think etc. 2. The neuter ba^jenige, if used absolutely, and not referring to a par- ticular noun, must be followed by the relative ID a 3 (see § 30. Rem. 3). In this instance ba^jeiuge may be dropped, 2)a§ienige, lu a§ (not "t^a^ or luelcfje^), bu fagfl ift njaljr, or: ilSa§ bu fagfl, ift Xoa\)Xf what (that which) you say is true. But if the demonstrative is in the genitive or dative, it cannot be dropped: 2)ie 2Ba{)rl}eit be^ienigen, uja§ ®ie niir gefagt i^aben (not bie SBal^r* l^eit iDeffeu), the truth of what you have told me. § 36. The demonstrative bet (§ 33.) is frequently used with the force of berjenigc; but in this instance it takes the form fceret, instead of bercn, in the genitive plural. The demon- strative jener is generally not employed in this connection. ^ er, tDelc^er (or berjeuige, ber; or n)er; not ber, tt)er) fdet, n)irb eruteu, who (he who) sows will reap. ©e^t nur um mit bcneti, bie (benjenigeu, bie; beneu, h)etci)e) euern (§eift bifben, associate with those only that benefit your mind, golgt nic^t bem ^ai\)t ber er (beriemgen, but not bereu*), bie eud^ benei- ben, do not follow the advice of those that envy you. 2)a8 $?eibeu b c r SintDoljuer (or berjemgen, but not berer or bercn), bie burd} ben ^rieg tjerarmt traren, the suffering of those inhabitants who were impoverished by the war. Unfere Jiteratur ift grog, aber bie ber !J)eutfd)eu (or biejenige bcr 2)eut- fd^en) ift grower, our literature is great, but that of the Germans is gi eater. * There are passages enough, in which we find b er eu in this connec- tion. But it is considered as- faulty. — 20 — 4. Indefinite Pronominal Adjectives,'^ § 3*1. Sing, eiu, eine, ein (the indefinite article), a, some, any (sing.), one. einigcr, e, c^ (strong), ctlDa^ (indeclinable), \ some, any, a little. xot{6)tt, e, e^ (STRONG), Plur. einiQC (strong), ) ^ ^^^^ iDeWjC (STRONG), ) > ^? 1. Gin refers to individual nouns (such as friend^ horscj fidd, etc.) in the singular. Referring to nouns previously mentioned, or used with the force of 3cmanb or man (see the note), it declines strong through(>ut (einct, cinC, cinCd or eind). Its force is often increased by the adverb irgenb placed be- fore it. For its declension as indefinite article see § 4. §aben (Sic cincn §ammer? §ier ifl ciner. Have you any hammer ? Here is one, 3ft nid)t (E i n C r an bev X^iir ? Is not some one at the door ? §afl bn c i n 3)leffcr ? 3a, id^ l)abe e i n § (einc«). Have you a knife ? Yes, I have one. §aft bu einc gcber bei ber §anb? Have you some (a) pen at hand? ^onnen (Bie nid)t t r (^ c n b c i n SBertjcug finben ? Can you not find some tool ? SBenn ^it irgenb eincn 2Sunf(^ ^aben, bringen (Sic i^n bor! If you have any desire, state it. ^^* In this connection the English one or any cannot be rendered by Cttt)a8 or cintgcr. For the form b C r cinc see § 46. 2. S t n? a § and the singular of c i n i g c r and tt)tld)tv refer exclusively to nouns denoting a quantity (such as water, grain, gold), and to abstracts (as diligence, courage etc.). SSctc^er in this connection cannot be joined to nouns, but may be used in reference to nouns mentioned before. These words may also be preceded by irgenb, in which case tDCld^cr may be joined to nouns. SScnn @ic nnr c i n t g c n gfeig anmenbcn n?oUtcn, if you would but apply 9ome diligence. §abcn 2>it e t tu a 8 @elb bei ftd) ? 3a, id) l^abe n? c I c^ e «. Have you ang (some, a little) money with you ? Yes, I have some, SScnn tX irgenb cinigcS {ttxoa^, njctdjeS) ©ctbflticrtraucn Ijatttf if he had any self- reliance (at all). ^^ The English some and ang employed in a merely partitivef sense are not expressed in German, except if referring to a noun previously men- * All these pronominal adjectives may, like all other adjectives, be em- ployed 'substantively', repiacinj^ the substantive indefinite pronouns, men- tioned § 22. They are then written with a capital. Thus feincr stands for 3cmanb or man; Reiner with the force of ^^iiemanb; 3eber for 3ebcmiann; (SinigeS for (StroaS. But this does not make these words ' substantive pro- nouns', as they always keep their adjective inflection. f That the Enp:lish some or any are employed in a partitive sense will be generally evident, if we may not replace these words by a Utile or a few. — 21 - tioned: S^rtnfctt ®ic Setn (not citttgcn or cttuaS SSetn), do you drink any wine ? ^ertaufen 8ie 3iiffc5^ ("^^^ einigen or ettt)a§ 3"^cr), do you sell any sugar ? 3a, ic^ oeilaufe w e ( d) c n , yes, I sell sorm. 3. ©inigc and tueld^e in the PLURAL answer to the English some or any, if they are used in tlie sense of ' a few' before plural nouns. SBctd)C refers to plural nouns which are mentioned before. If irgenb is used I efore plural *nouns, tDClc^C generally takes the place of einigc. If some and any cannot be replaced by *a fen fpa;;icren, I took a walk with some (a few) friends. SBcnit bieje SSdnbc e t n i g e ^i^^^t^^n batten, ttJiirben fie beffcr au^fc^en, if these walls had some (a few) ornaments, they would look better. Senn crirgcnb xot\6)t ©c^ttjteric^teiten erl^eben foHte, if he should raise any difficulties (whatever). SKa« fud)ft bu ? 3d) fud)c ^fJciget. §aft bu tt) c I d) e gefunben ? What are you looking for ? I am looking for (some) nails. Have you found some (any) ? 4. Instead of einigct in all its forms the indefinite pronoun ctUd)Ct (strong) may be used. But it cannot be connected with irgenb, nor can it be used with abstracts. § 38. ^ein, fcine, fein, no, not — any; plur. feine (strong), no. ^ein before nouns is declined like the indefinite article. But if it refers to nouns mentioned before, or if it is used substsmtively, it declines strong throughout (teinCt, feine, feincd or fetnd), and is translated none or no one (nobody). 3d) ^abc feine 9^ad)rid)t crl^attcn, I have not received any news. (5r ^at feine greunbe, he has no friends. (Sr l^at etnigc 3(nf^riid)c, ober bn Ijaft feine, he has some claims, but thou hast none. 3ft (Sinei* l)ier gettjefen ? SUtxw, Reiner ift ^ier gcttJcfen, Has any one been here ? No, no one has been here. § 39. 3ebet, c, e§ (strong)^ each, every (without plural). It may also, without changing its meaning, be preceded by the indefinite article, and declines then weak, except in those forms in which the indefinite article takes no ending: Norn. einjebCt; Gen. eineg jebCtt; Dat. cinem {ebClt; Neuter : ein jebc^. In both forms it may be used substantively with the force of 3ebermann. ^rgab jcbcm (cinem jeben) ^nabcn eincn 5;^aler, he gave to each boy a dollar. 3cbcr (ein 3cber), ber nid)t fiir mid) ift, ift mtber mid), every one that is not for me, is against me, @ib 3cbcm(eincm 3cbcn) bad ®eine, give every one his own. § 40. SlHer, oMe, allc^ (strong), all; plur. at(c, all. The neuter singular fitted, used substantively, is rendered by everything ^ and is also used in speaking of persons (all, every one, all the people). — 22 — 21 tt c r Xabd !rdn!t, all censure hurts. 9[)^tt a U e r ^ufmerffamfett, with all attention; mtt alien feincn grcmtben, with all his friends. 2111 eS ift JJCrloren, all (everything) is lost. 21 U e g freut fid), all rejoice. ^^^ If jZZ with the article before singular nouns is equivalent to * the whole', it is not gendered by atter, but by the adjective gang: all the city, tie ganje (Stabt § 41. 23iel, much; plur. many. If t)tel is not preceded by the article or another qualifying word, it is either not inflected at all, or it declines strong. In nom. and ace. sing the uninflected forms are far more usual; in the other cases the inflected forms prevail. (Nom. t)ie( iffiein; Gen. t)ieleg Scin§; Dat. t)telem SBein; Ace. tjtel SBein). In the plural, the nom. and ace. are about as often inflected as not (tjiel or DielC Solbaten, many soldiers). In the other cases of tlie plural the inflected forms prevail. If it stands without noun, the singular much answers to the neuter 25ietoril5ielC^, the genitive and dative being almost always inflected. The plural ' many\ used substantively, is always rendered by the inflected form ^ielc. (Sr tueig iBiel or 23ielc^*, he knows much (many things). 2)ie§ ift tie 2JJeinung S3telcr, this is the opinion of many. ^ie( may be preceded and qualified by the definite article, by demonstra- tives or possessives, and inflects then WEAKf, being translated by 'great amount or quantity of\ bet t>ielc 9iegen, the great amount of rain. 2Bag ttJillft bn mtt biefem Dielcit ©olbe anfangen? What will you do with this great amount of gold ? 2)^it feinem tiielcit (Selbe, with his great amount of money* § 42. aSenig, little; plur. few. If little is opposed to great, it is translated by Ilein; if opposed to much, by hJentg. SSenig, in respect to its inflection is almost entirely treated like tJtel: Nom. menig @elb, little money; Gen. tuenige^ (en)t @etbe^; Dat. tncntgem ©elbe; Ace. tuenig ®e!b. After prepositions the uninflected forms decidedly prevail (mtt Juenig @elb). In the plural the inflected forms are required in the genitive, and more frequent in the dative; but in nom. and ace. the uninflected forms rather prevail: Sr !^at n)entg grennbe, he has few friends; but roenigCt J^^^eunbe, of few friends. If used substantively in the plural, n)enig is inflected in all cases: iBenigC (not njenig) begmeifetn t^, few doubt it. LittUf used absolutely in the singular is generally rendered by the uninflected tDenig, rarely by tDenigeS. 2Senig in the singular, like little, may be preceded by the indefinite article: ein roenig, a little, which is almost equivalent to etn)a§. It remains in all cases uninflected (mtt ein menig %\t\^, with a little diligence). The plural a few is translated by einige or ti\\6)t, not by ein irenig. Not a few is rendered by nid)t tDenige or by mancl)e; and not a little by nic^t menig. * Some make a difl'erence between ^iel and SSieleS, which is not war- ranted by the usage of the best writers. t With possessives it must inflect strong if the possessive takes no ending. See § 55. Rem. 1. X See § 55. Rem. 2. 23 ¥ § 43. WanijCT, c, t^; plur. manege (strong),* many a, not a few. 2)Zancf)er both in the singular and plural corresponds to manr/ a or not a few: (Sr ^attemit manc^cm §inberniffe (or manc^en §inberntffen) p fdmpfen, he had to struggle with many an obstacle (not a few obstacles). § 44. SSKe^r, more. It is indeclinable in all cases: mit me^r ®eib, with more money; me^r greimbe, more friends. SBeniger, less, is treated in the same way, but is sometimes, though rarely, found with (strong) inflection. § 45. 3)Jet)rcre (strong), several. It is used only in the plural: CEr ntac^tc mtljXCtt (SitlltJCnbuttgctt, he made several objections, 'ifladj me^retCIt ^erfud)en, after several attempts. § 46. S)cr (bte,ba§) eiiie, the one; ber (bie, ba^) anbere, the other (both weak). Both form plurals (bic eitten, hit anberen; the ones, the others). 5lnbcr takes also the indefinite article before it and is then declined like eilt jeber, (etu anberct, C, C§, another). Without an article it is declined strong throughout: 3Son anbcrcitt (^toffe, of other material; bie ©ttten anberct 3e'lten, the manners of other times. 5. Possessive Pronouns^ § 41. The simple possessives are: Masculine, Feminine, 1. Singular Person. 2. masc, Pers, 3. -( ,, fem. neuter ( ,, masc, Pers, ( .} ,, fem. ,, } I ,, neuter ,, ( 1. Plural Person. 2. betn, fein, it)i\ fein, unfer, euer, nietne, beine, jeine, i^re, feiue, unferc, euere, i^re, Neuter, mein, bein, fein, fein, unfer, euer, t^r, my; thy; his; her; its; your; their. Rem. — The second singular and plural persons (bein, eucr) are confined to relations of intimacy, like the corresponding substantive personal pro- nouns. Among persons less intimately connected the third person plural 3^r (their) is used in addressing either one or more persons. 3()r is then written with a capital. Your brother, 3l)r ^ruber; your sister, 3l^re @(^tt)C* fter. 3d) baue auf 35re Sf^ad^fid^t, meinc §crren, I rely on your indulgence, gentlemen. * 9)^Qnd)cr in connection with an adjech've or the indefinite article may be used without any inflection: 9Jiand) tin .tunftter, many an artist; mand) .Qvoger aJlann. — 24 § 48. The simple possessives inliect strong in the plural, and in the singular like the indefinite article: . SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Nom. mein iBrubcr, meiuc ®d)n)cfler, ntcin ^ud), Gen. meinc^ iBruberS, nieiuct (Scl)mefter, tueiucd ^11 dj?, Dat. meincm iBruber, meincr (Sd)wefter, meincm iBud)e, Ace. meincu 33ruber, nieine ^rf)n)efter, PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS, Nom. tneine iBriiber, Gen. meincr ^riiber, Dat. meinctt iBriibern, Ace. meinc ^riiber. mein ^ud). Thus are declined: fctn 1 his cr erne 3 il)rc bis X\)X 1 her or their her or the>r uufer [■53ruber, our ■ ^ imfere \ (Sd)tt)cfter, our cuer 3l)r J -your ^ ■ eure* 3t)re . -your 1^^ In nnfer and euer the final letters are not inflectional endings, hut radical, and cannot he dropped in declining them, as it is the case in btcfct ^-en. biefc^, Unfer and cuer form Gen. nnferc^ (or unfer^), enrc^ (not un]e0< § 49. The possessive pronouns, like ordinary adjectives, may be used predicatively, answering to the English possessive cases mine, tJiine, Ms, hers, its, etc. They are then not inflected, the same as other predicative adjectives. S)ie(e8 ^ud) ift me in, tbis h( ok is mine; biefe iBiid^er fmb bein (fein^ nnfcr, CUerf); these hooks are thine (his, ours, yours). § 50. Aside from this case, the English possessive forms mine, thine, etc. are rendered by any of the following three forms of the German possessives: 1 ) By the ordinary possessives with strong inflection even in the nominative: 3ci^ l)abe meine $f(id)t gett)an, tl^nt tf)r c n r e , I have done my duty, do ye yours. — S)a§ ift ntd)t bein ^ortt)eU, ober e§ ift m e i n e r , that is not thy advantage, hut it is mine. — (Suer $?oog ift leic^t, ober u n f e r e S ift traurig, your lot is easy, hut ours is sad. * Instead of euerc the form cure is preferred. t With the third person plural this form is not used. 2) By placing the definite article before the possessive, which has then weak inflection throughout (ber, bic, ba^ mciiie, Gen. be§ metnctt, etc. ; ber, bie, ha^ unfcre, Gen. bc^ m\cxc% etc.). Unfer §aii6 ift alt, ba§ cure ift neu, our house is old, yours is new. (5r be* btcnt fid) metiier ^intmcr I}ier, unb id) bebicne mid)'ber fcincn bort; he makes use of my rooms here, and I make use of his there. 3) By attaching the termination ige to the possessives, and placing the definite article before them. These forms, like- wise, decline weak (bcr, bie, ba^ metnige, Gen. be^^bermeiitigeti; bav bie, ba^ feinige; Gen. bc^ feinigeti; Plur. bic feinigen; ber, bie, \)a^ unfrige*, eurige, il)r[ge, etc. ). SSdl)reub i^r eure 9Jlitburger tjerfotgtet, befd)ul?ten mx bie unfrigcit, while you persecuted your countrymen, we protected ours. 2)ic§ ift meiu @d)i(ffa(, IDaS UJirb aber DaS beinigc feiu? this is my fate, but what will be thine ? ^^^ The two forms with the definite article have often conventional significations. 3) a § ilReintcie, ©eintgc, etc. (substantively) means my, his, etc. property; bte 9}ieinigcn, S)eintgcn, etc. denote persons who are in some particular connection with the person designated by the pronoun, as his family, his friends, adherents, etc. III. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 51. The cardinal numerals are: 1 ein^, 19 ttcun^jel^n, 2 mh 20 gtDanjtg, 3 bret, 21 einimbj^iDangig, 4 Dter, 22 gmeiuiib;;man;;tg, 6 fiinf, 23 bretunb;^n)an;;ig, 6 fed)§, 24 Dierunbjmanjig, 7 fieben, 25 fiinfimbjwanjig, 8 ad)t, 30 bretgig, 9 neitn, 40 bierjig, 10 scl)n, 60 funf^ig, 11 elf, 60 fedijtg 12 ^Woll 70 fieb^tg (riebcnstg) 13 brei;iel)n, 80 ad)t3ig, 14 Dierje^n, 90 neimjig, 15 fuufse^n, 100 l)unbertt, 16 fed)5et)n, 101 l^unbert unb cxn9, 17 rieb;iet)u (ficbenje^n), 102 ^imbert unb jttjei, 18 ad)t3c^n, 103 l)unbert unb brei, * In bcr unfvicje, bcr curigc the c of the possessive stem is dropped, t The English a hundred and a thousand are expressed without article in German; but one hundred, one thousand take the f')i m @ i n^unbcvt, Q. X Utaufcnb. — 26 — 200 3UKi I)inibert, 1,000 gtDci taufeub, 1,000 taiifeub, 10,000 gel)n taufenb, 1871 taufenb aS)! l)uubcrt ein itnb fiebgicj, or a^tjeljn Ijunbert ein unb fiebjig; a million, eiiie iDlillion. Rem. — 1. The form (Sin^ is used only in counting, or as a neuter when it inflects strong. Else the numeral one is expressed by the indefinite article which has then the emphasis, and is spiced in print, or written with a capital; ei n er 5rau, to one woman. If the noun is understood, it has the STRONG inflection throughout. SSie t»tel ^naben maren bort ? 9^ur e i n e r ; how many boys were there ? Only one. (2r I)atte uid)t me^r i8ud)er q(^ eill^ (einC^), he had no more books than one, 2. Both is expressed by beibe. If employed with the definite article, which always precedes, it answers the English the two, and declines weak; else strong: 2)te Siidier bcibcr iBriibcr, the books of both brothers; bie ^Biic^er b e r beibCU 33ruber, the books of the two brothers. iBeibe forms a neuter singular iBetbC^, corresponding to the English both, referring to things in general: iQ e i bc$ ift vid)tig, both is correct. 3. ^Xon and brei, if not preceded by the article or an adjective pro- noun, take in the genitive the strong termination er, for instance: 2)ie2luS* {age glueier ^i^^O^^^r ^^^^ deposition of two witnesses. The other cardinal numbers remain unaltered, except that in the dative they sometimes take the termination en, if not followed by nouns. §unbert and taufenb, if their nouns are understood, decline strong, if referring to an indefinite number of hundred or thousand, corresponding to the English hundreds, thousands, Sr \)(\i oft in e i n e m %(x%t Saujenbe tjerloren, he has often lost thousands in one day. § 52. The ordinal numerals are adjectives, and are de- rived from the cardinal numerals by the addition of the syllable te or fte. From two to nineteen is added tc, the rest take ftf . 2)er erfte, the first; ber gman^igftc, the twentieth; ber gtDeite, the second; ber ein unb jn^an^igfte, the twenty- ber brittc, the third; first; ber ijierte, the fourth; ber bretgtgfte, the thirtieth; ber fiinfte, the fifth; ber fiinfgigfte, the fiftieth; ber ad)te, the eight; ber i)nnbertfte, the hundredth; ber jtDotfte, the twelfth; ber taujenbfte, the thousandth. Rem — 1. The ordinals generally decline weak. But they decline strong, if neither the definite article nor an inflected pronominal adjective stand be- fore them: (SrftCt 35anb, volume first; fein briltCt @0^n, his third son. 2. To the class of the ordinals belongs the interrogative numeral bcr iniet>tetfle ? (with weak inflection), corresponding to which (in order)? if an ordinal numeral is expected as answer. It must be generally expressed in English by circumlocution: !5)er hJteOietfle iBanb ift bie« ? What is the number — .2t — of this volume ? It is used substantively to ask for the date: S)cr tlJietjletflC tft Ijeute V What day of the month is to-day ? 3. From the ordinals are formed 1) the ordinal adverbs by the ending Ctt^ : erftcn^, firstly, in the first place; jtDeitett^, in the second place, secondly; brittCtt^, in the tMrd place, etc. 2) the fractions by the ending d, being of neuter gender if used substantively : eiu 2)l'tttcl, one third; tin 3>iertcX, one fourth; etn 3^^n3igftcl, one twentieth. The numeral giueite does not form a fraction; instead of it the word I)alb is used. If l)atb is preceded by the indefinite article*, it is declined like etu jeber, but preceded by the definite article it declines weak (etn I)atbC^ $funb, half a pound; tin ^albCt gu6, half a foot; bag \)alht S^egiment, half the regiment). If used as an abstract fraction it is not declined (^jwaujig uub eiu l)aib, twenty and one half). Instead of eill itnb ein l)a(b the expression anbertl]a(b is often used. Thus britte^alb, two and a half; Diertel)alb, three and a half, etc. § 53. The other numerals are: 1. Multiplicative Numerals. (Stufac^, single; gel)nfadb tenfold; boppelt or gtt)eifad), double; l^UItbertf ad), a hundredfold; breifad), treble; taufenbfac^, a thousandfold. They are ordinary adjectives, and decline like these. 2. Cardinal Adverbs. (Sinmat, once; biermat, four times; gtuelmat, twice; l^unbertmal, a hundred times; breimat, thrice; tauteubmal, a thousand times. 3. The Indeclinable Numerals in \tX* (Stnertei, of one kind; lTtancf)ertet, of several kinds; gltJeierlei, of two kinds; Dieledei, of many kinds; breierfet, of three kinds; allertet, of all kinds. They are formed by adding eriel to the cardinals and indefinite pro- nouns, expressing quantity. IV. ORDINARY ADJECTIVES. § 54. Ordinary Adjectives. decline weak if they are pre- ceded and qualified by the definite article, or any adjective pronoun or numeral that has an inflectional ending: SI NGUL AR . 3Iasculine. Nom. ber gutC SSlann, the good man; Gen. \it^ flutcn 9D?anne«, of the good man; Dat. bem cjutCtt SJJanne, to the good man; Ace. ben gutCtt SSlann, the good man. * §alb never takes its articles or determinative words after it. — 28- — Feminine. Nom. hit gutC grau, the good woman; • ' Gen. ber gutCll grau, of the gooJ woman; Dat. ber C^Utcn grau, to the good woman; Ace, bie gute %va\l, the good woman. Neuter, Nom. ba§ gutC ^inb, the good child; • Gen. be§ gutcn ^inbeg, of the good child; Dat. bent gut en ^inbe, to the good child; Ace. ba§ gutC ^inb, the good child. PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS. Nom. bie gittCtt Wdnntv, grauen, ^inber; Gen. ber gutCtt 9)2dnnciv grauen, ^inber; Dat. ben gate It 2J^dnuern, grauen, ^inbern; Ace. bie gut en 2)Iduner, grauen, ^inber. Thns are declined adjectives preceded by the interrogative WddjCX, by the demonstratives biefer, jeuer, fotd)er, berfelbe, berjenige; by the indefinites jeber, alter, eiuiger, etlid)er, mand)er, uieler, by the ordinals (ber erfte etc.), the nu- meral beibe and by those cases of etn, fein and the possessives that have inflectional endings, as: meinem gutcn greunbe; unfere guten 9^ad)barn; !einet guten SJlduner, etc. PtEM.— After the plurals of the indefinite t)iele, atte, mel)rere, cinige, etlid^e, manege, anbere the following adjective generally declines strong, although these indefinites are themselves inflected by strong endings: 5Itle gute ^dU' ner (Gen. aller guter 2T2dnner); me^rere groge ^iinftter; t»te{e beru^mte gelb^ l)erren, etc. Sometimes, however, this rule is not observed, and the adjectives are found with weak inflection after these words. § 55. Adjectives not qualified by the definite article or an adjective pronoun or numeral with strong endings, decline strong: SINGULAR. Masculine. Nom. guter SSein, good wine; Gen. gute§ SS^eiue^, of good wine; Dat. gutem SSeiue, to good wine; Ace. guten SBein, good wine. Feminine. Nom. frifd^e Wild), fresh milk; Gen. f r if d) er aJiild), of fresh milk; Dat. frifd)et Wild), to fresh milk; - Ace. frifc^e TIM), fresh milk. — 29 — Neuter. Nom. Jd^traqC^ %\\^, black cloth; Gen. jdiioarjc^ !£ucl)eg, of black cloth; Dat. fc^ioaqcm %\\&)t, to black cloth; Ace. fcl)tt)ar3C!S %yx^), black cloth. PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS. Nom» fd}One iBlumeu, fine flowers; Gen. fd)onci: ^(umen, of fine flowers; Dat. fd)oncit S3lumen, to fine floweis; Ace. fd)onC iBlumeii, fine flowers. Eem. — 1. Hence adjectives inflect strong, 1) if they are immediately preceded by prepositions: 2J2it grogcitt gtei^e, with great diligence; 2) if they are preceded by those forms of the indefinite article or of the possessives that have no endings: eiu grojjCt SiJiann, a great man; nieiit lieber ^ruber, my dear brother; unfer gutC^ ^inb, our good child; 3) if they are preceded by any pronominal adjective or numeral without inflectional endings: ittel^r gutc ^ud)cr, more good books; t)iel gutCt SBein, much good wine; tnand) jungC^ ^iub, many a young child; i\oz\ fc^onC ^J3ferbe, two fine horses; 4) if the pronominal adjectives which precede them are not in the same case with them: beffCtt grower 3rrtl)Um, whose great error. 2. It is now customary to give to the genitive singular of the mas- culine and neuter of adjectives the weak ending eit, even if the adjective should decline strong according to the general rules: (Sine 2)^eucje gutett SSeinS (instead of: guteg SSeitlS), a quantity of good wine; gutCtt 50iut^§, of good cheer (instead of: gute^ SJ^Ut^^). But some authors reject this rule, and genitives with the strong ending e^ can not be considered as faulty. 3. Those pronominal adjectives that may or may not be inflected, require the strong inflection of the following adjective, if they take no inflection; but if they are themselves inflected; the following adjective declines weak: SSiel gutcr 3Bein, or uteler gutc Sein; Dieted @ute, or biet @utc^ (much good); manc^ inngc^ ^inb, or ntand^c^ junge ^inb (many a young child). 4» Since the indefinite article, the possessives, and the indefinite tein take no endings in the nom. sing, of the masculine and neuter,and the accu- pative singular of the neuter, but decline their other cases strong, the follow- ing adjective must always decline strong in the nom. sing, masc, and nom. and accus. singular neuter, but weak in all other cases. Some have called this the "mixed declension" with the following scheme: SINGULAR. Masculine, Nom. cm (tfinS^t Xag, a whole day; Gen. cinc^ gftn^CIt Xagc^, of a whole day; Dat. cincm gaujcit ^age, to a whole day; Ace. eincn gan.^cn %(\o^, a whole day. — 30 — Feminine, Nom. einC gangc ^^Jac^t, a whole night; Gen. eiucr Qangcn ^lcL6)if of a whole night; Dat. ciiict gan^ett 9^ad)t, to a whole night; Ace. eiiiC gaujc 9tad)t, a whole night. Neuter. Nom. ein gongC^ 3a]^r, a whole year; Gen. einc^ Qcmjcii 3a^re^, of a whole year; Dat. eincm gangcn 3al)re, to a whole year; Ace. ein ganjc^ 3al)r, a whole year. riuraL Nom. meiuc (jutcn J^reiinbe, my good friends; Gen. tneincr gittctl greitnbe, of my good friends; Dat. meincil gutcit greiniben, to my good friends; Ace. meinc gutcn greimbe, my good friends. y. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 56. The comparative of an adjective is formed bj adding the termination er, and the superlative by adding the ter- mination fte, as: 9?ei(^, rich; retii)er, richer; bet reic^fte, the richest; \6)txv, fine; fd)oner, finer; berfd)Onfte, the finest; milb; mild; milber, milder; . ber milbefte*, the mildest. The radical vowel of the positive is softened in the com- parative and superlative: a changes into d, o into o, it into ii, as: TO, old; otter, older; ber attcfle, the oldest; grog, great; gro^ei*, greater; ber grogte, the greatest; jung, young; juiiger, younger; ber jiingfte, the youngest The following Adjectives are exceptions : 5Ba^r, true; fad)t, soft, slow; fd)tauf, slender; farg, stingy; fd)taff, lax; runb, round; fanft, soft; bunt, motley; matt, faint; ftumpf, hlunt; florf), flat; fro^ Joyful; fatfd), false; l^olb, gracious; blag, pale; rof),raw; gtatt, slippery; toU, mad; ger abe, straight; Doll, full, * Instead of jle, we add ef^e, when euphony demands it. — 31 — and the Adjectives ending in bar, t)aft, and [am, as: banlbar, grateful; banfbarer, more grateful; bo^^aft, malicious; ho^^ I)aftcr, more malicious; fparfam, economical; [par[amer, more economical. § 57* The following Adjectives are irregular: @iit, good; beffer, better; ber bcftc, the best; xmi), near; lial)er, nearer; ber ncidjfte, the next; l^oc^, high; l)ol)er, higher; ber ^od)fte, the highest; Uiel, much; mel)r, more; ber meifte, or me^rfte, the most. § 58. Comparatives and superlatives are declined accord- ing to the same rules as the adjectives in the positive, as: ber fleine Xi\d), the small table; ber Iteinere Zi]d), the smaller table; ber Heinfte S^ijcf), the smallest table; ein flciner Slifd), a little table; eiu tteinerer S^ifd), a smaller table; ein fdjone^ Suc^, a beautiful book; eiii jdjouere^ Slid), a more beautiful book. § 59. Superlatives can generally not be used predicatively without the definite article. In order to render the English predicative superlative without an article, a peculiar adverbial form is used in German, consisting of the preposition an, con- tracted with the dative neuter of the definite article (am inst. of an bem) and the weak form of the superlative: fd)on, beau- tiful, superl. am fdjonften, most beautiful; cold, fait, superl. am fa{te[tcn, coldest. SBeld^e^ Xijin ift bem 9Jlenfd)eu am treufteu? What beast is most faithful to man ? SSanu finb bie 3)Zenfdicn a tit gtiicfltd^flen? When are men happiest ? SD'lein greunb ift am g u f r i e b e n ft c u , n^ettit er atteitt ift, my friend is most pleased when he is alone. Bem. — If a predicative superlative is connected with the article, it agrees in gender^ number, and case with the subject. But if the superlative is qualified by a partitive noun which is logically the predicate, it agrees only in case and number with the subject, but in gender with the partitive noun: 2)ie(e (Stunbe ttjar bie f d) o tt fte meineS lOebeng, this hour was the most beautiful of my life. %{tt ©otbateii ftnb ttid)t immer bie t a ^ f c r ft e tt , old soldiers are not always the bravest. 2)er 9)lorb ift b a 6 fl r o 6 1 c aller 5Berbred)ett, murder is the greatest of all crimes. — - 32 CHAPTER Y. THE VERB. I. PRELIMIXARY REMARKS. § 60. German verbs have four moods: the Indicative, the Bubjunctive, the Conditional, and the Imperative. The indicative mood has two simple tenses, as: Present Tense: id) (obe, 1 praise; Imperfect Tense: id) (obte> I praised. All other tenses are formed by means of the auxiliary verbs. Perfect Tense: id) l)abe getobt, I have praised; Pluperfect Tense: id) l)atte (jclobt, I had praised; First Future Tense: id) Werbe lobeu, I shaU praise; Second Future Tense: id) mcrbe gelobt l)aben, I shall have praised. The subjunctive mood has the same tenses as the Indic- ative. The conditional mood has two tenses, the Present or the First Conditional, and the Past cr Second Conditional. § 61. The infinitive of all German verbs terminates in en or n*. By taking off this termination we find the stem of the verb, as: fd)reib is the stem of the verb fd)reiben, to write; fag, the stem of the verb fciQCtt, to say; dnbcr is the stem of the verb aubcrtt, to change. § 62. The German verbs are divided into weak and STRONG verbs. Weak rerbs are those the imperfect of which is formed by the ending te, without affecting the stem, as: loben, imperf. id) lobte; facjen, imperf. fagte. Strong verbs are those which form their imperfect without ending by a change of the radical vowel, as: gebcn, to give; imperf. id) (\ah; fterben, to die; imperf. id) ftarb; [d)(aQen, to strike; imperf. id) fd)(ug. II. CONJUGATION OF WEAK VERBS. § 63. The present tense of weak verbs is formed by the following termination, which are attached to the stem: Indicative. Sing. 1, — e, Subjunctive. Sing. 1. — c, 2. —eft, 2. —eft, X — ct, 3. — e, * (^etn (to be), t^ltn (to do), and verb^:^vith stems in cr and el take only n as ending, as bcttelu, to beg; DetmtnDcrn, to diminish. — 33 — Plur» 1. —en, Plur. 1. —en, 2. — et, * 2. — et, 3. —en, 3. —en. The imperfect has the same endings in both indicative and subjunctive: Sing. 1. — ete, Plur. 1. — eten, 2. — eteft, 2. — etet, 3. —ete, 3. —eten. The imperative and the two participles are formed by the following endings: Imperative. Sing. — e, Plur. — et. Present Participle. — enb, Past Participle. — et, (in connection with the prefix ge). Rem. — 1. In the present indicative, imperative and past participle the vowel c of the ending, when followed by ft or t, is generally dropped, except in those verbs that cannot be conveniently pronounced without it. These are the verbs with stems ending in b, t, (t^), gn and d^n, as: rebctt (rebeft, rebct); antwortcn (antnjovteft, antroortet); begegncit (begegneft, begegnct); red)ncn (red)ncft, red)nct); but lobcit, lobft, (obt; fagctt, fagft, fagt; lerncn, lernft, lernt. Verbs ending in a sibilant (\, f^, \^, J) retain e before ft only: reifcii, rcifcft, reift; mifd)Cn, mifd)Cft, mifc^t; Uerte^eit, t)erl'et3Cft, berle^^t. The dropping of the e does not apply to the subjunctive present: (obcu, lobcft, lobct; fageit, fagcft, fagct, except in verbs ending in cm and etn, which drop the e of the ending in all forms, un- less it be final : id) dnbere, bn dnberft, er dnbert, njir anberit (both for indica- tive and subjunctive). 2. In the imperfect the c, preceding the final consonants is always kept, but initial t of the ending is dropped in all persons, except in verbs with stems in b, t, gn and d)n (id) lobtc; but '\6) rebetc). 3. The prefix ge of the past participle (gclobt) is generally called the augment. It is used in all verbs, except those that are not accented on the first syllable. The verbs which do not take such an accent, and hence drop the augment, are these: 1) Verbs with the foreign ending iren or ieren, as: rcgieren (part, regiert, not {^crcgtert); mavfd)iren (marfd)trt); 2) verbs with the prefixes be, ge, ent, emp, er, tier, "^tx (see § 82), as: befnd)en, part. befud)t; gc'^'oren, part. get)i)vt; gevftbren, part. ;^evftort; 3) most compounds with the prepositions bnrd), nnter, iiber, um, l)intcv, nnber, and the adverb tjoll (see § 82), as: nntcrrid)ten, part. untcrrid)tet; umringen, part, nmvtugt; nnbedegen, part, njibertegt; DoUenben, part. UoUenbet. Verbs compounded with other pre- positions or adverbs take their augment between the preposition and the simple verb: anflagen, part, angetlagt; auSreid^en, part, an^gcretd^t. (See § 83). — 34 — MODEL OF CONJUGATION OF WEAK VERBS. a) dropping the c. Infinitive: lobctl, to praise. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. PRESENT TENSE. Sing. 1. id) lobe, I praise, I do praise, Id) tobC, I praise* I am praising 2. bu (obft, thou praisest, dost bu lobcft, praise, etc, 3. er (obt, he praises, does er lobC, praise, etc. Plur, 1. n)ir lobCtt, we praise, etc. tt)ir lobCtt, 2. i^^r lobt, you praise, etc. i^r lobct, 3. fte lobcn, they praise, etc. fie lobCtt. IMPERFECT TENSE. Indicative and Subjunctive. Sing. 1. \6) lobtC, I praised, I did praise, I was praising, 2. bu lob t eft, thou praisedst, thou didst praise, etc, 3. er lobte, he praised, etc. Plur, 1. h)ir lobten, we praised, etc. 2. \\)X lobtct, you praised, etc. 3. fie lobten, they praised, etc. Imperative, Sing. lobe, praise (thou), Pres, Participle, Tobeitb, praising, Plur. lobtf/ praise (you). Past Participle, gelobt, praised. h) retaining the e. Infinitive: rebeit, to speak. Indicative, PRESENT TENSE, Sing. 1. \6) rebe, I speak, I do speak, I am speaking, 2. 'aw reb eft, thou speakest, etc. 3. er rebet, he speaks, etc, Plur. 1. \mx reb en, we speak, etc. 2. i^r rebet, you speak, etc. 3. fie reb en, they speak, etc. Subjunctive. \(i) rebe, bu rebeft, er rcbe, mir rebett, if)r rebet, fie reb en. * The translation of the subjunctive mood is generally not different from the indicative, although it must often be rendered by one of the forms of the potential. See the syntax §105. In our paradigms the subjunctive is given without translation. t If the third person is used for address, the present subjunctive is used with the personal pronoun after the verb: ?oben ^xz, praiM (you). — 35 — IMPERFECT TENSE. Indicative and Subjunctive. Sing. !♦ ic^ rebctc/l spoke, did speak, was speaking 2. bu rebCtcft, thou spokest, etc. 3. er rebctC, lie spoke, etc. riur. 1. mx rebetcn, we spoke, etc. 2. i^r vebCtct, you spoke, etc. 3. fie rebCtCtt, they spoke, etc. Imperative. Sing. rebC, speak (thou) Pres. Participle, rebcil^, speaking Phir. rebct, speak (you) Past Participle, gcrebct, spoken. ^^ Verbs, to be conjugated for practice: fagen, to say; gtaubett, to be- lieve; tuunfd)eu, to wish; fct)eqen, tojest; ft^aben, to hurt; dnbern, to change; uevciteln, to frustrate, ntarjd)ireu, to march; uiiterncl)ten, to instruct. § 64. Irregular weak verbs. The following weak verbs deviate more or less from the above scheme: 1. The auxiliary l)aben in many of its forms drops the consonant b, or changes it into i, and softens the radical vowel in the imperfect subjunctive. See the paradigm page 41. 2. The potential verbs tDotteit, foHen, foniteu, inogen, miiffen, biirfen, toiffen are conjugated by a peculiar intermixture of strong and weak forms. (See the paradigms page 55.) 3. The verbs brennen (to burn), fentten (to know), tiennetl (to name), rennen (to run), fenben (to send), tpenben (to turn), change their radical vowel c into a in the Imperfect indicative and past participle (brflnntC, fanntc, nanntc, etc., gebrannt, (jetauut, etc.). ^Senbcn and tnenben drop, moreover, the e of the imperfect indicative and past participle (against § 63. Rem. 1): fanbtC, ttJatlbtC; gefanbt, gemanbt.* AH these verbs restore the original vowel e in the imperfect subjunctive (brCltUtC, fCUtttC, etc., jcnbctc, trenbetc). 4. iBringen (to bring) and bcnfen (to think) make the imperfects bracbte, ha^^it, Imperf. subj. hxa^tt, bacfttc; Past. part. gebra<^t, gebadjt. III. CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS. § 65. There are about a hundred and seventy-five strong verbs in modern Germanf , some of which, however, admit of * (Senbcn and tt)enbeu sometimes form their imperfects or past participles regularly (feiibete, gejeubet). t A list of all strong verbs is contained in the Appendix. Verbs not occurring iri that list are weak. The present language does not form any more strong verbs; but all verbs newly introduced in the language are weak verbs by necessity. fe — 36 — both the STRONG and the weak conjugation, as for instance rafcn, imperfect rufte or rtcf. Their conjugation varies from that of the weak verbs iu the foll6wing particulars: ^ 1. Their iinperfect indicative in the iirst pers. sins:, takes no ending, and always changes tlie radical vowel of the infinitive (fommCll, imperf. id) tftm). 2. Tliiiir past participle takes the ending eu and a radical vowel differing either from the infinitive, or from the imperfect, or from both (see the formulas in the remark). 3. The imperfect indicative has the following scheme of personal endings: Sing. 1. — Pliir. 1. cil 2, ft (eft) 2. t (et) 3. — 3. en. 4. The imperfect subjunctive adds the endings of the present subjunc- tive of weak verbs, and soRens the radicals a, 0, U into a, 5, ii (indie, ic^ tarn; subj. id) !&mc, bu tdmcft, etc.). 5. The second and tliird pers. sing, of the present indicative soften the radical a into d, and sometimes o into i) (fd)tagen, fd)Idgft, fc^ldgt), and mostly change the radical e into i (ie) Jcl)eu, jic^ft, fici)t. - 6. The singular of the imperative imdergoes the same change of c into i, but not the softening of the radical vowel, which never takes place in the imperative. It drops the ending c whenever it- changes its vowel (fel^en, imper. fie^; fterben, imper. ftirb). 7. The remainder of the present indicative, the whole present subjunc- tive and the present participle are always formed as in the weak verbs. Rem. — The vowel-changes of the imperfect and participle cannot be reduced to a rule, but must be learned by the appended list of strong verbs. Vhe formulas of the vowel-changfs are these: Present ( fnfin. ) . Imperfect. Participle. (fd^tafen, fd)Iief, gefci)tafen,) (tragen, tvug, getragen,) (fe()en, fal), gefetjen,) (fterbeu, ftarb, geftorben,) (fed)ten, fod)t, gefod)ten,) (fingen, fang, gefungen,) (fliegen, flog, gcflogen,) ([d)etnen, fd)ien, gefd^ienen.) § 66. Irregular Yerbs of the Strong Form. These are: 1. j c t n and tt) e r b c n , the former of which makes its tenses from several different roots, while the latter has two different forms for the imper- fect ind. sing., (itjnrbc and tnarb). See the paradigms page 43, 44, 45, 46. a t(ie) a a u a e a c e a. c i a u Ic et i(te) t(ie) Some few verbs (as tommen, bi formulas. 2. 1 1) U It, to do, repeats the initial consonant as final letter of the im- perfect (t^at), a relic of former reduplication. Moreover, it drops the c in the endings of the present indicative in all persons but the first singular (t^UC, i\)\\\t, tl)iit, Vcjxm, t()ut, tl)un). 3. ft e I) e n and (^ c I) e ll form their imperfects and participles from other roots (iniperf. ftaub [ftuub], (]iug; part, geftanben, gcgangen). They do not chan<::e their radical e in the present. @tel)en generally makes ftiiube in imperf. subj. 4. Many verbs belonging to the formula c, a, take in the imperf. subj. the softened vowels 5 or ii, instead of a (befel}fen, befal)!, subj. liefi>l)Ie; fterben, ftarb, subj. ftiirbe). Minor irregularities are stated in the list. MODEL OF CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS. a) Formula a, U, a with softening of the radical. Infinitive: fci)Iagett, to strike. Indicative, PRESENT. Sir>g. 1. id) fd)(agC, I strike, do strike, 1 am striking 2. bit fci)tdgft, thou strikest, etc. 3. er fi^lat^t, he strikes, etc. riur» 1. njir jd)lat3Ctt, we strike, etc. 2. il)r fd)(at3t, you strike, etc. 3. fie fc^lagCtt, they strike, etc. IMPERFECT. Sing. 1. id) fd)hlf;, I struck, did strike, was striking 2. bu fd)Iligft, thou struckst, etc. 3. cr fd)(lli}, he struck, etc. Plur. 1. tt)ir fif)lugCtt, we struck, etc. 2, il)r fd)luc^t, you struck, etc. 3, fie ft^lugCtt, they struck, etc. Imperative. Sing. jd)IagC, strike (thou) Plur. fd)tagt, strike (you) Subjunctive, td^fd)Iacje t>\x fd)(a9cft cr fd)Ia(ic n?ir fd)(ac|cn tl)r fd)taijct fic fd)(a9cn. \6) fd^tiige bu fd)liigefl er fd)Higc tt)ir fcI)Higcit il)r fd)lugct fie fd)lugctt. Pres. Participle. fd)(agCttb, striking Past Participle. 9Cfd)IagCtt, struck. h) Formula c, a, 0, with change of the vowel in the pres. ind. Infinitive Present: fterbCtt, to die. " Indicative, Subjunctive, PRESENT. Sing. 1. id) flerbe, I die id) ftcrbe 2. bu ftirbft, thou diest h)X ftevbcft 3. er ftirbt, he dies er fterbc Plur. 1. njir fterbcit, we die Xoxx fterbcit 2. i^rftcrbt, you die i^r fterbct 3. ftc fterbcn, they die fte fterbeit. — 38 -^ Indicative, Subjunctive. IMPERFECT. Sing. 1. \di \taxh, I died id) ftiirbc 2. bu ftarbft, thou diedst bu ftiirbcft 3. er ftarb, lie died er ftiirbe Piur. 1. wiic ftarbcn, we died mx ftiirben 2. i()r ftarbt, you died tl)r ftiirbct 3. fie ftarbcit, they died fte ftiirbctt. Imperative. Sing, ftirb, die (thou) Pres. Participle. fterbCtt^, dying fterbt, die (you) Past Participle. gcftOVbCtt, died, lY. FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. § 6Y. Compound tenses are those which are formed by means of an auxiliary as Unite (conjugated) verb, and with tho past participle or the infinitive of the verb proper. There are the following compound tenses in German: 1) perfect; 2) pluper- fect; 3) first future; 4) second future, all of which have an in- dicative and subjunctive mood; 5) and 6) the first and second tenses of the conditional mood. Besides these, there is a per- fect infinitive. § 68. As auxiliaries of the active voice are used the present and imperfect tenses of the verbs l)aben, to have, fetn, to be, and merben, which as an ordinary verb means to become, but as an auxiliary has difierent meanings. PiEM. — The present and imperfect tenses of the auxiliaries Ijabetl, feinand iDerben are these: Present Indicative. Present Subjunctive. x6) Ijabe, I have id) I)abe, I have ic^ bin, I am id) \t\, I be id) \t)erbe, I shall (will) ic^ ruerbc, I ^hall Imperfect Indicative. Imperfect Subjunctive. \6) ^atte, I had id) ^dtte, I had tc^ war, I was id) mdre, I were id) tDurbe, * • id) itJiirbe, I should or would. § 69. The auxiliaries I)abeu or jein are used for the forma- tion of the perfect and pluperfect tenses. The perfect is com- bined of the PRESENT tense of ()abcn or fciu, and the past .participle of the verb ])roper; the pluperfect is composed of the imper- fect of ()abcu or fein, and the past participle of the verb proper. * The indicative imperfect ic^ tDUrbc does not occur as auxiliary of the active voice; but it occurs as auxiliary of the passive (see below). — 39 — Bem. The regular auxiliary is l()aben, which is used to form the perfect and pluperfect tenses active of all transitive, almost all intransitive, all reflexive and many neuter verbs. But with the auxiliary fein are formed all neuter verbs that denote a passing either from one place or from one state to another, as fommcn, to come; gcl)en, to go; fallen, to fall; ftcrben, to die; ertraufen, to fall sick; berfteit, to burst. Besides these the verbs b lei b e it, to remain, j e i tt , to he (see the paradigms), and the intransitives f o I g e n, to follow, and b e g e g n e n, to meet, are conjugated with fein. SYNOPSIS OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES. a) With the auxiliary ^aben. Perfect Infinitive, gelobt (;^u) l)aben, (to) have praised. Indicative. Subjunctive. PERFECT. i(!) ^abc gelobt, I have praised id) ^aBc gelobt, I have praised. PLUPERFECT. xdj f)aiiC gelobt, I had praised idj ^'dttc gelobt, I had praised. b) With the auxiliary fein. Perfect Infinitive, gefommen (gu) fein, (to) have come. Indicative. Subjunctive^ PERFECT. i(^ Mn getommen, I have como id) fci gefommen, I have come. PLUPERFECT. id^ Wat gefommen, I had come id) toare gefommen, I had come. § 70. The auxiliary tDcrben occurs as auxiliary of the two futures, and the two tenses of the conditional mood. The first ifuture is formed by the present tense of t^crbeu and the present infinitive of the verb proper; the second future by the present of iDcrben, and the perfect infinitive of the verb proper. The first conditional is formed by the imperfect subjunctive of tDerben and the present infinitive of the verb proper; the second conditional is formed by the imperfect subjunctive of Herbert and the perfect infinitive of the verb proper. SYNOPSIS OF the TWO FUTURES AND CONDmONALS. Indicative. Subjunctive*. FIRST FUTURE. tc^ it)CtbC loben, I shall praise id) tuctbc loben, (that) I should praise * The conjugation of the future indicative in some of its persons is tlie same as that of the subjunctive; in other persons it is different from that of the subjunctive (see the Paradigms). The subjunctive of these tenses is only used in dependent clauses, especially such as are introduced by bag^thit). It is always translate'd by the English potential. The conditional which is likewise rendered by the English potential may be often substituted for it. (See the syntax.) 40 SECOND FUTURE. Indk'iUve, id) tDCtbC getobt ^aben, I shall have praised. ^Subjunctive, id) H>crt)C tjelobt l)abeu, (tlmt) I should have praised. Hrat CondUionaL id) tDUrt>C fobeu, I should (would) praise. Second Conditional. id) iDUtbC gelobt l)aben, I should (would) have praised. Rem. — If the verb is conjugated with fein, the second future and second conditional, of course, take perfect infinitives f.)rmed with jcttt: Second . TURE. id) Uierbe gefonimen fein, I shall have come. Second Conditional. \6) tDiirbc (^efommen f e i ii , I should (would) have come. PARADIGMS. 1) ]^ abcu, to have. Present Infinitive. (p) ^aben, to have. Perfect Infinitive. get)abt (511) ^aben, to have had. Present Participle. I)abciib, having. Past Participle. ge{)abt, hac L Indicative. present. Subjunctive, Sinp:. 1. id) l)abC, I have ic^ \)<\\yt, I have (may have), etc. 2. bu ^aft, thou hast bu l)abcft 3. er ^(xt, he has er t)abe Plur. 1. tDir l)abctt, we have tDir \\cihtn 2. it)r l)abt, you have \\)x t)abct 3. fie l)abCll, they have IMPERFECT. fie t)abcu. Sing. 1. id) '^attC, I had id) ^dttC, I had (would have), etc 2. bu l)attcft, thou hadst bu t)dttcft 3. er l)attC, he had er l)dttc Plur. 1. mir I)attcn, we had iDir l)attc« 2. i^r ^attct, you had il)r {)dttct 3. fie fatten, they had PERFECT. fie l^dttcit. Sing. 1. \&\ ^bC nP^)'i^t, I have had id) t)abc ge^abt, I have had, etc 2. bu ^aft gcl)abt, thou hast had bu ^abcft gel)abt 3. er I)at get)abt, he has ] lad er t)abc gebabt Plur. 1. tDtrl)abcn flet)abt, we have had iDir t)abctt ge^abt • 2. il)r ^abt gel)abt, you have had iftr f)abct gcl)abt 3. fie l)abcn ge^abt, they have had fie t)abcu gel)abt. PLUPERFECT. Sing. 1. \6) l)attC gel)abt, I had had 2. "bn l)attcft gel)abt, thou hadst had 3. er t)attc gel)abt, he had had Plur. 1. rair fatten get)abt, we had had 3. \\)X f)atttt get)abt, you had had 2. fie l)attcu gef)abt, they had had id) l)dttC gc^abt, I had had, etc. bu l)dttcftgel)abt er l)dttc get)Qbt tuir l)dtteii ge^abt i^r f)dttct get)abt fie fatten ge^abt — 41 — ! Indicative. Subjunctive. FIRST FUTURE. Sing, 1. \6) titcrbc* l)nben, I shall have id) njcrbc t)aben,T should 2. bu tvirft l}abeu, thon wjlt have bu tncrb c ft l)aben [have 3. er U)irb l}abcn, he will have • er tvcrbc l)aben rinr. 1. inir mevbcii t)aben, we t^hall have mtrtnerbcn l)aben 2. it)r Uierbct ()aben, you will have ibr tverbct t)aben 3. fie raerbcit t)aben, they will have • fie tijevbcn l)aben. SECOND FUTURE. Sing. 1. id) irerbc c^e^abt l^abcn, I shall have had id) tnevbc (^el)abt l)aben 2. bu rairft gcl)abt l)aben, thou wilt have had bu tDcrbcft ge^abt I)aben 3. cr wirb cjebabt l)abeu, he will have had er mevbc qel)abt l)abeu P!ur. 1. tDir merbcn gebabt l)abeu, we shall have had ton iverbctt gebabt t)aben 2. \{)x werDct gebabt t)abeu, you will have had ibr tucrbct get)abt \)(ihm 3. fie merbctt gel)abt babcu, they will have had fie iuerbcit ge{)abt ^aben. FIRST CONDITIONAL. Sing. 1. \6) niiirbe baben, I should have 2. 't>\x tniu'bcft brtben, thou wouldst have 3. er iDlirbC \\ixhtix, he would have Plur. 1. \mx iDiirbclt l)abcu, we should have 2. ibr miivbct l)aben, you would have 3. fie miirbcit b^^beu, they would have. SECOND CONDITIONAL. Sing. 1. id) miirbc ge()abt Ijabeu, I should have had 2. bu U)urbcft gel)abt bcibeu, thou wouldst have had 3. er tDurbC gcl)abt I)aben, he would have had Plur. 1. U)ir n?urbcn gct)nbt l)abeu, we should have had 2. il)r tpiirbct ge()abt \](x\itx{, you would have had 3. fie n)urbcii get)abt babeu, they would have had. IMPERA.TIVE. Sing. '\)a\)t (bu), have (thou)t Plur. !)abt (ibr), have (you) [l)abeu ®ie, have (you)]. 2) \t\\\f to be. Present Infinitive, (^u) feiu, to he. Perfect Infinitive, gemefeu (ju) fcitt, to have heen. Present Participle, feicilb (very rare), being. Past Participle, gctuefeu, been. * See the paradigm of iuerbeu. t If a command is issued to a third person, the German generally uses the subjunctive: babe er, may he have, let him have. Thus in the first person plural: l^abeu wir, let us have. 42 — Indicative. Subjunctive, Sinn feicft gemefeu er fei gcivefeu mx feicn getvefen il)r fcict geroefeu fie feicn geix)efen. PLUPERFECT. Sing. 1. id} wax getrefen, I had been \di Wdxt getnefeu 2. bu U)arft geircfen, thou hadst been bu tvdrcft gemefeu 3. er Wax gemefcu, he had been er tudrc getDefen Plur. L Unr tuarcn gett»efen, we had been it>ir tudrcn getDefen 2. il)r Uiarct(n)art) gett)efeu, you had it)r tudrct geraefeu been 3. fie it»arcn geuiefeu they had been fie w'dxcu geirefeu. FIRST FUTURE. Sing. 1. id) n^erbc fein, I shall be 2. bu iuirft feiu, thou wilt be 3. er luirb feiu, he will be Plur. 1. trir tr>erbcn feiu, we shall be 2. i^r iuerbct feiu, you will be 3. fie UJerbCtt feiu, they will be xdj U)erbc fein, I should be bu merbcft fein er iDerbc feiu ujir merbcn fein il)r Ujcrbct fein fie iDerbCtt feim — 43 — Indicative. Subjunctive. SECOND FUTURE. fc;ing, 1. ic^ merbc gemefen fein, I shall id) iDerbe getuefen fein, I should have have been been 2. bu tuirft gemefen fein, thou bu trevbcft getrefeii fcin wilt have been 3. er h)irb getrefen fein, he will cr tr>erbc getrefcn feiu have been Plur. 1. njir tDcrbCtt gemefen fein, we xovc inerbcn getrefen fein shall have been 2. il)r ttierbct getDcfen fein, you i^r txjerbct geroefen feiu will have been 3. fie ttjerben gemefen fein, they fie n)erbett getuefen fein» will have been FIRST CONDITIONAL. Sing. 1. id) njiirbc fein, I should be 2. bu tuiirbcft fein, thou wouldst be 3. er tt)iirbc fein, he would be Plur. 1. roir tr)iirbcn fetn, we should be 2. \\)X wiirbct fein, you would be 3. fie miirbCtt fein, they would be. SECOND CONDITIONAL. Sing. 1. id) tt)iirbe gemefen fein, I should have been 2» bn tuUrbcft geiuefen fein, thou wouldst have been 3, er iDiirbe gemefen fein, he would have been Plur. 1. totr miirbcn gemefen fein, we should have been 2» il)r iDiirbct geraefen fein, you would have been 3. fie iDiirbcn getnefen fein, they would have been. IMPERATIVE. Sing, fei (bu), be (thou) Plur. feib (il)r), be (you) [fein (Sic, be (you)]. 3. tDcrbeti, to become. Present Infinitive, (gn) ttJCrben, to become. Perfect Infinitive, gettjorben (jn) fein, to have become. Present Participle. Werbenb, becoming. Past Participle. gen)orben, become, having become. 44 Indicative, Subjunctive. Sing. 1. id) iljerbC, I become 2. bll voir ft, thou becomes t 3. er luirb, he becomes Plur. 1. mv tuerbctt, we become 2. il)r merbct, you become 3. fie IDi'l'bCn, they become i(f) roerbC, I become (may become) bu mcrbcft cr merbe ton ttjerbcit i^r merbct fie inerbctt. IMPERFECT. Sing. 1. [^ murbc (id) tuarb), I became id) triirbe 2. bu tDUVbcft (Dii luarbft), thou becamest bu luiirbcft 3. eu raurbc {U waxh), he became cr Uiiiibe Plur. 1. mil* ttJurbcn, we became toil' miirbcit 2. il)r ivurbct, you became il)r iviirbct 3. fie lUlirbCll, they became fie tDiirben. Sing. 1. tc^ bin geiDOrben, I have become 2. bu bift geiDOrbeu, thou hast become 3. er ift geworbeu, lie has become Plur. 1. mir finb gcroorbeu, we have become 2. il)r feib gen)orbeu, you have become 3. fie finb geraorbeu, they have become xdj fei getrorben bu feicft geui 01 ben er fei geiuorbeu njir feictt gemorben il)r feiet gemorbeu fie feicn gemorben. PLUPERFECT. Sing. 1. id) wax gemorben, I had become 2. bu tvarft getDorbeu, thou hadst become 3. er wav geiuorben, ho had become Plur. 1. mx marcn geirorbeu, we had become 2. it)r marct geiDorben, you had become 3. fie marClt gemorben, they had become id) trare gemorben bu tDcireft gemorbeu er marc geioorbeu ujir tncirctt getuorbcn il)r irdrct gemorbeu fie iDdrCtt gemorben ♦ FIRST FUTURE. Sing. 1. x^ iwerbc merben, I shall become 2. bu wlvU itJerben, thou wilt become 3. er inirb roerben, he will become Plur. 1. tuir ujerbcn toerben, we shall become 2 i()r merbct raerben, you will become 3. fie Werbeil tt)erben, they will become i^i) mcrbc merben bu merbcft roerbeu er werbc toerbeu mv merbctt merben t^r raerbet merbeu fte roerbctt ttjerbeu. 45 — Indicative. SECOND FUTURE, Sing. 1. id) njerbc gctrorben jein, I shall have become 2. buix)irftGett)orbeniein;thou wilt have become 3. er iDirb gemorben fein, he will have become Fmr. 1. mv merbCtt gcti:)orben feiu, we shall have become 2. t^r merbct geirorben fein, you will have become 3. fie merben genjorbeu fern, they will have become Subjunctive, id) njerbc getuorben fein bu n?erbcft gemorben fein cr itierbc gett)orbeu fein Move njerbeu gen)orben fein i^r roerbct geworbcn fein fie ttjerbeit gemorben fein. FIRST CONDITIONAL, Sing. 1. td^ UiiirbC UJerben, I should become 2. bu tDiirbcft irerben, thou wouldst become 3. er tuiirbc lucrben, he would become Plur» 1. mir miirbCtt luerbcn, we should become 2. \\)X WiirbCt merben, you would become 3. fie tDiirbeit Itjerbeu, they would become. SECOND CONDITIONAL. Sing. 1. id) lt)iirbc gett)Ovben fein, I should have become 2. bu tDiirbcft geiuorben fein, thou wouldst have become 3. er nnirbc geraorben fein, he would have become Plur. 1. iDir miirbCtt gemorben fein, w^e should have become 2. it)r miirbct gemorben fein, you wouhihave become 3. fie tDiirbCtt geiDorben fein, they would have become. IMPERATIVE. Sing, tuerbe (bu), become (thou) Plur. n^erbet (il)r), become (you) [tt)erben ®ie, become (you)]. 4) Active Voice of the Weak Yerb. Present Infinitive. Perfect Infinitive. Present Participle. Past Participle. (ju) loben, to praise. C|C(obt (gu) l)aben, to have praised. IobCtt^, praising. gClobt, praised, having been praised. — 46 Indicative. Sing. 1. t(^ lobe, I praise 2. bll lobft, thou praisest 3. er lobt, he praises riur. 1. voir tobcn, we praise 2. i!}r (obt, you praise 3 fie lobcn, they praise Subjunctive^ tcf) lobe bll lobeft cr lobe uiir loben ibr lobet fte lob en. IMPERFECT. Sing. 1. t(f| tobte, I praised tcf) lobte 2. bu lob t eft, thou praisedst bu lobtcft 3. er lobte, he praised er lobte Plur. 1. mir lobtett, we praised n)tr (obtCtt 2. i^r lobtet, you praised t^r lobtet 3. fie lobten, they praised fie lobtett. 'tt.^ Sing. 1. t.i^ ^abe getobt, I have praised 2. bu 6aft (^etobt 3. er ^at gelobt Phir. 1. n)ir I)abett getobt 2. it)r bcibt gelobt 3. fie ^abctt getobt PLUPERFECT. Sing. 1. iJ) batte gelobt*, I had praised 2. bu batteft gelobt 3. er I)atte gelobt Plur. 1. n^ir l)atten gelobt 2. i^r l^attet gelobt 3. fie ^attett gelobt FIRST FUTURE. Sing. 1. id^ irerbe lobeu, I shall or will praise 2. bu trirft loben 3. er iDirb loben Plur. 1. xo'vc n)erbett loben 2. \\)x ttjerbet loben 3. fie trerbett loben id) l^abe gelobt bu ^abeft gelobt er ^abe gelobt iDtr l^abctt gelobt i^r ^abet gelobt fie Ijaben gelobt. id) ptte getobt bu biitteft gelobt er ^dtte gelobt trir batten gelobt i^r ^cittet gelobt fie fatten gelobt. \6) merbe loben bu iDerbeft loben er ttjerbe loben irir trerbett loben \\)x tDerbet loben fie trerbett loben. * Not unfrequently a pluperfect id) ^attC gelobt ge^abt is met with, td indicate a time happening before an action, expressed by an ordinary plul perfect. ^ 47 — Indicative. Subjunctive. SECOND FUTURE. Sing. 1, id) tDcrbe gctobt l)abcn, I i(^ ttjcrbe Qctobt Ijabctt shall or will have praised 2. bii mirft gelobt l)aben bu irerbeft (^elobt l^aben 3. er tt)trb gelobt Ijaben er raerbe gclobt \)Cihtxi Plur. 1. it)tr iDerbett fldobt ijaben \mx racrbett gelobt baben 2. i^r merbct gelobt Ijabcn i^r merbet gelobt l^aben 3. fte merben gelobt ^abert fie njerben gelobt l^aben. FIRST CONDITIONAL. Sing, 1. ic^ njiirbC loben, I should or would praise, etc. 2. bii tDurbcft lobeti 3. er miirbc loben Plur. 1. mir tDiirbeit loben 2. i^r tBurbct (oben 3. fte wurbcu loben. SECOND CONDITIONAL. Sing. 1. ic^ tDurbc gelobt ^aben, I should or would have praised, etc. 2. hvi miirbcft gelobt ^abcn 3. er n)urbc gelobt ^aben Plur. 1. n^tr tt)urbctt gelobt l)aben 2. i^r tDiirbct gelobt Ijaben 3. fie tDiirbCtt gelobt ^aben. IMPERATIVE. ; Sing, lobe i^Vi)i praise (thou) Plur. lobt (il)r), praise (you) [loben @ie, praise (you)]. REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. § 71. The present (sometimes also the perfect) infinitive of all verbs may be used with the force of a noun, denoting the action, expressed by the verb, as an abstract. Such infinitives are of neuter gender, and are declined (in the singular only) like nouns ending in cu (§13. Rem. 4). They must be pre- ceded by a neuter article or pronominal adjective in the neuter gender and correspond to the English participial noun in ing: ba^ ?efen (Gen. be§ 8efen^), the reading; mein ^anbelit (Gen. meine^ §anbeln^), my acting; nad) meinem ^(x\vix^ l^alten, according to my opinion (supposing). Many of these — 48 — infinitives have assumed the meaning of common nouns: ha^ @d)reiben, the writing (a letter); ha^^ S)afein, the existence; ba^ geben, life, etc. § 12. Both participles are frequently used with the force of attributive adjectives, and are then declined and generally may be compared like ordinary adjectives with weak or strong inflection: ber b(ii()enbe Saum, the blooming tree; eiu angie^enbe^ ^uc^, an attracting book; t)orbereitenbe ®(f)rttte, preparatory (preparing) steps; ein auffattenbere^ greignife^ a more striking event. Past participles of transitive verbs have always passive signification, if used attributively; they are thus more freely used than the English past participles : nac^ get()aner 3lrbeit^ literally: after done labor (after the labor was done). But the past participles of many verbs, conjugated with fein, may be used attributively in an active sense: ber getpefene ^rofeffor (literally: the been Professor), the ex-pro.fessor; ineiu t)er[tor^ bener 4Bruber, my ^died' brother (my late brother). § 13. The conjugation of the strong verb differs only in the simple tenses. In all compound tenses the conjugations of weak and strong verbs are entirely the same, aside from the deviating form of the past participle. V. THE PASSIVE VOICE, § 14. The conjugation of the passive voice consists in the different forms of the auxiliary merben (page 45) in combina- tion with the past participle of the verb. The verb iDerben corresponds, in the passive voice, entirely to the Enghsh passive auxiliary ^ to be, ' Rem. — 1. The order in which the auxiliary and the verb are placed in the passive voice is the same in English and in German, except that in those tenses which are formed from the compound tenses of the auxiliary (perfect, k pluperfect, future, etc.) the past participle of the verb proper must always j precede both the participle and the infinitive of the auxiliary. Thus in \ the German perfect passive the arrangement is '/ have praised been/ id) bin gclobt tDorben. 2. Since tDerbcit in its compound tenses takes feilt as an auxiliary, it follows that the verb 'have,' wherever it occurs in the English passive,must be expressed by the German „fcin". — 49 — The augment of the past participle of ttJerbeit ((^CitJOrbeit) is always iropped if iDerbeu is used as auxiliary of the passive, (id) bin getobt Iforbcn, not: i(^ bin gelobt cjetDorben). PARADIGM OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. Present Infinitive, getobt (ju) ttJerbcn, to be praised. Perfect Infinitive. ge(obt ttJorbeu (gu) jein, to have been praised. Present Participle, getobt ttjerbenb (extremely rare), being praised. Past Participle. getobt, praised. Indicative. Sing. 1. xdj trerbe getobt, I am praised 2. bu tt)irft getobt 3. er ttjirb getobt Plur. 1. tDtr tverben getobt 2. i^r werbet getobt 3. fie iDerben gelobt IMPERFECT. Sing. 1. td^ njurbe getobt, I was x(i) toiirbc getobt praised 2. bu ttjurbeft getobt 3. cr rourbe getobt Plur. 1» mx tuurben getobt 2. itjr ttjurbet getobt 3. fie Jtiurben getobt PERFECT. - Sing. 1. td^ bin getobt iDorben, I have been praised 2. bu bift getobt morben 3. er tft getobt n)orben Plur. 1. ttiir ftub getobt ttjorben 2. i^r feib getobt morben 3. fie fmb getobt trorben Subjunctive, id) njerbe getobt bu merbeft getobt er n)erbe getobt mx tDerben getobt xljx njerbet getobt fit tDerben getobt. bu miirbeft getobt er miirbe getobt tt)ir toiirben getobt il)r luiirbet getobt fie iDiirbcn getobt. i(^ iei getobt ttjorben bu feift getobt ttjorben er fel getobt tt)orben ttjir feten getobt morben i^r feiet gelobt morben fie feien getobt njorben. PLUPERFECT. Sing. 1. i(^ njar getobt morben, I had been praised 2. hn njarft getobt n)orben 3. er ujar get0bt njorben Plur. 1. mir waren getobt morben 2. i^r ujaret getobt tuorben 3, fic tuaren getobt rt)orben xdj hjdrc getobt njorbcn hn iDdrefl getobt njorben er ware getobt. niorben njir miiren getobt njorben t^r ttJiiret getobt morben fic njcircn getobt morbcn. — 50 — FIRST FUTURE. Indicative, Subjunctive. Sing. 1. id) merbe gelobt merben, I ic^ trcrbe t3clobt njerben shall or will be praised 2. bu roivft gefobt lucrben bu tt)crbeft ^etobt merben 3. er iuirb gelobt tuerben er merbe gelobt mcrben Plur. 1. mv irerben gelobt luerben wiv merbcn gelobt tnerben 2, it)r tperbet gelobt ttjerben il)r tDcrbet gefobt merbeii 3. fie merben gelobt ttjerben fie merben ge(obt merben. SECOND FUTURE. Sing, 1. x6) h)crbc gelobt luorben fein, id) ttjerbc gctobt tt)orben fcin I shall or will have been praised 2. bu tDirft getobt tDorbcn fein bu tDcrbcfl gelobt morben fcln 3. er rutrb getobt tDorbeu feiu er tt)erbe getobt tnorbeu feiu Plur. 1. tuir tuerbeu getobt iuorben feiu luir merbeu getobt luorbeu jeiu 2. ibr tt»erbet getobt ujorbcu feiu il)r tverbet getobt ujorbeu feiu 3. fie tDerben getobt tuorbeu feiu fie roerben gelobt ujorben fein. FIRST CONDITIONAL. Sing. 1. ic^ tviirbc getobt tuerbeu, I should or would be praised 2. bu miirbcft getobt merbeu 3. er miirbe getobt ttjerbeu Pltir. 1. mx roiirbeu getobt ujerbeu 2. il)r UJiirbet getobt uierbeu 3. fie luiirbcu gctobt tuerbeu. SECOND CONDITIONAL. Sing. 1. i^ triirbe getobt Ujorbeu feiu, I should or would have been praised 2, bu U3iirbeft getobt roorbeu fein 3, er UJiirbc gelobt u^orbeu feiu Plur. 1. mir uiiirbeu getobt tuorbeu feiu 2. il^r uiiirbet getobt u^orbeu feiu 3. fie tuiirbeu getobt ujorbeu feiu. IMPERATIVE, Sing. ttJerbc (fei*) getobt, be (thou) praised Plur. trcrbet (feib) getobt, be (yon) praised [feiu eople are building muchj' ' there is much building,' Rem. — 1. The English equivalents that are applied to rendering this peculiar German form are various, and depend on the idea conveyetl by the impersonal expression. In general an active expression with some im- personal or uncertain subject may be employed (there is, people, one, they)^ Often a phrase may be substituted with a transitive object, in which case the passive form may be kept: (g^ Xowxht f^dt gu ^JJad)t gejpeift, a late supper was taken. (S^ iDUrbe ftavf geinettet, bets were made freely. 2. The impersonal passive form is the only passive form of which neuter verbs are capable, and the only one that can be applied to those active verbs which in German require their object to be in the dative or genitive. The English language, connecting all active verbs with the objective case, may always use such verbs in a personal passive form, which must be rendered by an impersonal passive, if the German verb requires any other case of the object but the accusative: / am believed, eS ir>irb tnir gecjtaubt (not id) tuerbe geglaubt, the verb gtauben requiring the dative); 1 am commanded, ed ttJirb mir befo{)leu (literally: it is commanded to me); I am obeyed, e^ tDirb mir gef)or^t. The impersonal e^ in such transitive verbs is frequently dropped, and the dative opens the phrase: SOZir twirb gegtaiibt, mir mirb befo^tcn, mir it)irb ge^ ]^orcf)t. Thus with the genitive: g§ tuirb meiner gcbad)t (meiner mirb gebad)t), I am remembered (gebenfeu governing the genitive). 3. If a neuter verb is qualified by an adverb or a clause, a reflexive IMPERSONAL may often be used instead of an impersonal passive to express facts always happening under the circumstances, as: S'^ tanjifld^ l)ier gut (literally: it dances itself well here), one dances well here, here is good dancing. ©^ ftirbt , fic^ Ieid)t, i»enn man ein gute-3 ©eiciffeu l^at, one dies easily if he has a good conscience. * It cannot be applied to those neuter or intransitive verbs the idea of which apply to things only. Thus we cannot say: e^ mirb gebliil)t; C§ tuirb j gc{d)ienen (of stars for instance); c^ mirb miggliicft, etc. - 55 -- VIII. THE POTENTIAL VERBS. § 80. There are seven potential verbs: fonnen, mogen, iDoKeu, follen, mitffen, burfeu and luiffen*, the conjugation of which is irregular. (See Practical Course pp. 108. 109.) Rem. — The potential verbs or modal auxiliaries are in several respects treated alike: 1. They reject the ending c in the first pers. sing, ind» present. 2. The third pers. sing. ind. present is lilie the first. 3. The radical vowel of the singular ind. pres. is different from that of the infinitive, except in jotten. 4. The radical vowel of the plural ind. present and of the whole sub- junctive present is the same as that of the infinitive, 5. The radical vowel of the imperfect indicative is different from that of the infinitive, except in troUen and jottcn, and also different from that of the present, except in miiffen and follen. 6. The imperfect subjunctive has the same radical vowel as the infin- itive, except in tviffett. 7. The imperfect conjugates weak. 8. The past participle has the weak form, taking the radical vowel of the imperfect. But it has the strong form without augment (which gives it the appearance of. the infinitivef ), whenever another infinitive is dependent on it: 3d) l^abc nic^t fommen tonnen (instead of id} ^abe ntd)t fommen gc* !onnt), / have not been able to come. Only it) iff en forms always the participle getDugt. 9. The present and imperfect tenses of all potential verbs may be rendered by one of the English auxiliaries of the potential mood or future tense. But the infinitive, the participles and the compound tenses must be rendered by English verbs different from the auxiliaries of the potential and future. PARADIGMS. 1) tonnen, mbgcn, njollen. Present Infinitive. fonnen, to be able mbgen, to like tt)oUen, to intend, to be willing Perfect Infinitive, gefonnt (ju) ^abcn, to gemod^t (ju) ^aben, to getuottt (;^u) ^aben, to have have been able have liked intended, to have been willing * The verb iniffen belongs here in regard to its conjugation. In its UK-aning, too, it often answers to the English potential : ©r TOugte C^ nid)t anbev§ ^u mad)en, he could not do otherwise. f The history of the language distinctly shows that these forms are no infinitives, but strong forms of the participles without augment. See Grimm's German Grammar P. IV p. 168 foil. 56 fonuenb, being able gcfonnt (fonncn) id) !ann, I can bii !annft cr fann tt)ir fonncu i^r !omit lie fonnen id) !i)nnc ic^ tonntc, I could id^ fonntc Present Participle (rare), mogeub, liking hjottenb, intending. Past Participle* gemod)t (mogen) getuottt (tDotten). Present Indicative. id) mag, I may id) triti, I will, I intend bu magft bu miUft, thou intendest, etc. er mag er mU, he intends, etc. mx mogen lt)ir motleii, we will, we intend, etc. il)r mbgt i^r mollt, you intend, etc. fte mogeit fie iroUeii, they intend, etc. Present Subjunctive, id^ mogc id) tuolle. (is conjugated regularly). Imperfect Indicative, f id) mod)te, I might id) trotttc, I intended, etc, i^ tDoUte. Imperfect Subjunctive. xij mod^tc Perfect. id) t)abc gcfonnt (tomtcn), id) ^abcgemod)t (mogen), id) \)abt gettjollt (moHcn), I have been able I have liked I have intended, etc. Pluperfect x6) ^ttc gcfonnt (fon- id^ l)attc gemoi^t(mogen), id^ ^attc gcmoitt (moKcn), ncn), I had been able I had liked I had intended, etc. First Future. x6) n)crbc fonnen, I shall id^ merbe mogen, I shall id^ merbe iDoIIen, I shall be able like ' intend, etc. Second Future. id) n^erbc gcfonnt l^abcn, id^ ttjerbe gemod)t^aben, id^ lucrbc gcttjottt ^ben, I I shall have been able I shall have liked shall have intended, etc. * The past participle of the potential verbs is only used to form the compound tenses. t The conjugation of all tenses through the different persons is regular, except that of the present indicative. — 5Y — First Conditional. id) ttJiirbe fonncn, I id) iDiirbc mogen, I id^ tonxht njottcn, I should should be able should like intend, etc. Second Conditional, id) hjiirbe gefonnt ^aben, id) miirbe gemod^t l^aben, id) tuiirbe getuoltt liaben, I 1 should have been 1 should have liked should have intended.^ able etc. Imperative, ■ ' ttjottc, (used redundantly). 2) miiffcn, biirfcn, tDtffcn. Present Infinitive. ntiiffeit, to be obliged biirfen, to be at liberty hjiffcn, to know, to be able. Perfect Infinitive. gemugt l)aben, to have geburft I)abcn, to have gettjugt l^abctt, to have been obliged been at liberty known. Present Participle. iniiffenb (rare), being biirfenb ("rare j, being at UJiffcnb, knowing, obliged liberty Pa^t Participle, gcmugt (miiffen) geburft (biirfen) gcttjugt. Present Indicative, id) mvi% I must id) barf, I may (am at id) njeig, I know liberty) bu mu6t bu barffl bu ujeigt er mug er barf er tueig unr miiffen xo\x burfcn h)tr UJtffcn i^r miigt i^r biirft t^r hjigt fie muffen ftc biiufen fic miffcn. Present Subjunctive, id) miiffc id) biirfc id) njtffc. Imperfect Indicative, id) mngtc, I must (was id) burf te, I was at liberty id) tDUgtc, I knew, obliged) Imperfect Subjunctive, id) miigtc id) biirftc id) h)ii6te. Perfect. id) l^abe gemugt (miiffen), id) l^abe geburft (biirfen), id) \)(xht gcwugt, I have I have been obliged I have been at liberty known. 68 Pluperfect id^ ^atte gemu§t ^muffen), i^ t)atte geburft (biirfen), I had been obliged \6) tperbc miiffen, I shall be obliged id) luerbe gemu6t I)aben, I shall have been ob- liged \6) UJiirbe miiffen, I should be obliged \6) iDiirbe gemugt l^abcn, I should have been obliged I had been at liberty First Future, \6) ttjcrbe biirfen, I shall be at liberty Second t\dure, \6) njerbe gebnrft I)aben, I shall have been at liberty First Conditional. x6) miirbe biirfen, I should be at liberty Second Conditional, \6) ttJiirbe gebnrft Ijaben, I should have been at liberty Imperative^ \^ l)attc gcnjngt, I had known. \6) hjcrbe iDiffen, I shall know. id^ tt>erbc Gemugt ^aben, I shall have known. id^ miirbc tt)iffen, I should know. id^ njiirbe genmgt ^aben, I should have known* njiffc, know. ,^** The verb follen in the present indicative singular is thus conju- gated id) foil, bn foUft, er foH. In all other forms it is regular. It is trans- lated by I am to, and sometimes by I shall; also by it is said that, as: er foil an» get ommen fein, it is said that he has arrived, he is said to have arnved. Rem, Tlie Pluperfect of the English potential mood with could have, might have And should have is generally rendered by t)dtte fonnen, l)dtte fotlen; as: he could (might) have praised, er ^dtte toben fonnen (notmogen); he should have praised, er '^dtte loben foUen. But 'should have in the first person generally cor- responds to the German conditional: / should have praised, if etc., id) tpiirbc gelobt l^abcn, U)enn etc. IX. COMPOUND Verbs. § 81. Compound verbs are either separable or insepar- able, according as their prefixes or words which enter in com- position with them, may or may not be separated in some of their forms. § 82. Inseparable compound verbs are conjugated like ordinary verbs, except that they refuse the augment of the past participle. See§ 63, Rem. 3. They are compounded l)with one of the prefixes ge, be, ent, cr, t)er, ger and miB; 2) with one of the prepositions ^tnter iDiber, biirdf), iiber, um, unter and the ad- — 59 — verbs t)oIt and tDieber. But verbs compounded with burrf)^ iiber, xtui, untcr, DoK and iDteber are sometimes separable*. § 83. Separable compound verbs are those which are compounded with prepositions or adverbs other than those mentioned § 82t. These are the prepositions ab, an, auf, qu^, bci, in (with accus., always taking the form ein), mit, nad), Dor, ob, 511, and the adverbs 'Oa (generally taking the form bar), fort, nieber, tr>cg, juritcf, gufammen, f)er, \}in with the compounds of the last two (I)crab, l]eran,-I)erauf, I)irtab, ^inaiif, einl)cr, um()er, um^in), and many other adverbs and adjectives as fern, fret, lieb, to^, etc. § 84. Those words which form separable compounds with simple verbs, are detached from their verbs in the present and imperfect tenses and the imperative mood, and are placed after them (generally at the end of the sentence), as anfangen: pres. id) fange an; imperf. id) fing an; imper. fange an. The sign ^n of the infinitive is placed between the prefix and the simple verb: anjnfamjen. The augment of the past participle is like- wise inserted between the prefix and the verb: angefangen. PARADIGM. Pres. Infinitive, anfangcn (an,^iifaiigen), to begin. Perf. Infinitive, augefaugen (;ju) ^aben, to have begun* Pres, Participle, aufanc^cnb, beginning. Past Participle, augefangen, begun. Pres. Indicative, id) faili^C an, I begin bu fcingft an, thou beginnest er fangt an, he begins ttitr faugen an, we begin t^r fan(^t an, you begin fie fangen an, they begin. Pres. Suhj. id) fange an, bn fangeft an, etc. Imperf, Ind. \^ fing an, bn fingft an, etc. Imperf. Suhj. id) finge an, bn fingeft an, etc. Perfect id) i)abe angcfangen, bn I)aft angefangen, etc. Pluperfect. id) ^atte angcfangen, bu l)atteft angefangen, etc. Rrst Future. id) n^erbe anfangen, bn wtrft anfangen, etc. Second Future, \6) it)erbe angefangen ^aben, bu mirft angefangen l^aben, etc. * Whether a compound. verb is separable or not, may always be seeu from the lexicons. t There are some verbs, having the appearance of compound verbs, which seem to contradict this rule, as: (icbfofeu, luftmanbeln, offenbaren. Ihe treatment of these few exceptional verbs must be learned from the lexicons. — 60 — First Conditional, \6) hjiirbc anfangen^ bu triirbcfl aitfangcn, etc. Second Conditional, id) wiirbc aiicjefangen l^aben, bu njiirbeft angcfangcn l)aben, etc. Imperative. fange Oil, begin (thou); faitget an, begin (you). Rem. — 1. If a separable compound is in a clause, requiring the transpo- sition of the finite verb to the end of the clause (see § 106,7.10), no separation of the prefix takes place, and the separable compound is treated like an inse- parable compound verb, retaining however the augment, and gu as sign of the infinitive between the prefix and the verb: ttJeitll {ha^) cr ailfangt, if (that) he begins; tvtidjt Xvix onfangeu, which we begin. 2. Many of the particles entering into composition with verbs, are themselves compound. If they are both separable compounds, both are se- parated from the verb: borange^en, to precede; Pres. id) gcl^e ttoran. If the former of the two is inseparable, the 1 itter being separable, the whole verb is INSEPARABLE if the compouud prefix cannot be used as a word by itself: tjerabforgen, to hand over; Pres, id) Derabfotge (since a word uerab does not exist). But bet)orft€^en, to impend; Pres. \6) ftel)C bet) or, I impend (the word bet)or occurring separately as an adverb). — If the former of the two prefixes is separable, and the latter inseparable, the verb is separable, and only the first prefix is separated: borentt)aIten, to keep away; Pres. \6) cntl)a(te t)or, I keep away*. This last class of verbs does not admit of an augment in the participle: id) l^abc Dorent^atten, I have kept away 3. Some verbs have the appearance of separable compounds, but are derived from compound nouns, as frii^ftiicfeil, to breakfast (from grii^ftiicf); lurgroeilen, to cause pastime (from ^urjlDetl); ratl)fd)tagen, to deliberate (from 9latt)fcl)tag), and many others. Such verbs can never be separated (ic^ frii^* ftiicte, etc.). 4. Separable compounds and those verbs derived from compound nouns (Rem. 3.) have their principal accent on the prefix (an'fangeu; bet>or'ftel)en; rat^'fc^tageil). Inseparable compounds have their main accent on the radical syllable of the verb: entttJei'c^en, toottbrtn'gen. Those prefixes which may belong to an inseparable or to a separable verb (§ 82.) have the main accent if the verb is separable, but the accent is on the radical syllable of the verb if the latter is inseparable (iibertoin'bcu, to defeat; but ii'bergel)en, to go over). Those exceptional inseparables which are mentioned page 59t have partly their accent on the prefixes, partly on the verbs. Thus liebtofen and luftluanbeln are accented on the prefix; the verb fro^todfen, to exult, is by some accented on fro!^, by some on lo(f ; the compounds with ntig are generally, but not always accented on the prefix (miB'braud)en, but also migbrau'd^en). This * There are some verbs, especially those beginning with aufer and aViUx, which never occur in those forms, which would require a separation of the particle. Thus we may say: a\% cr auferftanb (when he arose) or tt)eld)e er aibSerfal), (which he selected), if the clause requires a transposition of the verb, in which no separation of the prefix takes place. But if the clause does not admit of transposition, such verbs cannot be employed at all {not: (Si* crftanb Quf; id) crfa^ au8; nor can we say: ^6) auferftanb, etc.). — 61 — class of compounds takes the augment gc in the participle if the accent is on the prefix; if the accent is on the verb, the aupfment is dropped ((]eUeb'!oft, geluft'tt)anbelt; ne^ol)1ocft or frol)locft'; gemtg braud)t or migbraud)!'). The verb offeilbaren, although it has its accent always on the syllable ha, is used both with or without the augment (offenbQrf or geoffenbart'). CHAPTER YL PREPOSITIONS. § 85, Prepositions govern either the genitive, or the da- tive, or the accusative, or both the dative or accusative. jl: § 86. 1. The prepositions governing the genitive are: l^alber (l)alben), for the sake of; jcnfeit, bej^ond; ouJ3er{)a(b, outside of; ftatt (anftatt), instead of; xnnerl)Qlb, within; ungead)tet, notwithstanding; oberljalb, above; unireit (unfcrn), not far from; unter^alb^ below; Dermoge, by means of; !raft, in virtue of; tDcitjreub, during; IdngS (entloug), along; tDcgen, on account of; taut, according to; um— miEen, for the sake of; niittetft (liermttte(ft), by means of; trot3, in spite of; bieSfeit, this side of; S^^f'^^Q^f ^^ consequence of. ^^^ The prepositions ldng§ (enttattg), tro^, Sufolge are also connected with the dative. §a(ber, jufolge (generally) and sometimes ungead)tet are placed after their governing nouns. SBegeu mosty follows its noun. 2. With the dative are construed: au§, out of; nad), after; ouger, outside, except; ndd)ft (j^UUad^P), next to; bei — (see Rem. 2) ; nebft, ) . ,, ... binnen; within; \ammt, \ *^^''^'' '"'^' cntgegen, against; feit, since; gegeniiber, opposite; . toon, from, of; gemag, in accordance with ; S^' ^^' mit, with; JUltoiber, contrary to. entgegcn, gegeniiber, gemdg are generally placed after their nouns. The preposition ob, over, on account of, is now obsolete, except in poetry. 3. The prepositions requiring the accusative are: burd), through, by; ol)ne, without; fur, for; urn, about, around; gcgen, iigainst; ttoiber, against. J^^ The preposition Joilbcr, without, is now obsolete, except in some phrases and in poetry. 4. The prepositions requiring either the dative or the accu sative are: an, at; ubtv, over, above; auf, on, upon; Itntcr, under, beneath, among; Ijintcr, behind; t)or, before; in, in, into; gn)il(f)en, between*. neben, beside; Rem. — 1. The adverb bi§ is frequently connected with, and placed bo fore prepositions expressing motion in space, or progress in time in order tc denote the limit up to which a motion takes place, or to limit the extent o time. Such combinations are bt^ xiad), bi6 ju, bi§ an, bi§ auf, btS in, bi§ Dor, They are generally rendered as/ar as, till, up to or to : 33id nad) iSevtin, as fal as Berlin; bi§ an ben gUig, up to the river; bi§ gu Sci^naditcn, (up) t< Christmas. Before proper names of places, and in some other phrases th( preposition connected with bi^ is often omitted: ^i^ Berlin, as far as Berlin big l)entc, till to-day. 2. There is no general equivalent for the preposition bei in English 1) In local connections bei means 'near by' : (Sin 2)orf bet S3erlin, a village near Berlin; bte ®rf)(acl)t bei @abott)a, the battle of (at) Sadowa. 2) Befon names of persons bei denotes the place where these persons are or live: 5d tvax b e i mcinem iBrnber, I was with (at the house of) my brother; t^ bleib bei 3l)nen, I remain with you; bieS Wav @itte bei ben @ried)en, this was th( custom among the Greeks (in their country). 3) Before nouns expressing EVENTS it denotes their coincidence with the action, (bei fcincr 5Intnnft, < his arrival; bet jener @e(ecjenl)eit, at that occasion), or a relation of cause being generally rcn lered by a participial clause: 33ci bent i]Utcn (5rfotf|C bie fer 9Dhaa§re(^e( trng ev !ein ^ebenfen, nod) tt)eiter gu gcl)cn, this me isure hein^ successful (considering the success of this measure), he did not hesitate to gQ still farther. 3. The preposition feit denotes not only a time-point, represented as th beginning of actions, but also a period of time not completed. In the forme signification it corresponds to since or ever since, in the latter to for: 3d) bil l^ier feit bent erften biefe§ 9)lonat§, I have been here since (ever since) the firs of this month. 3c^ bin (jd)on) jcit brei 3}ionaten tjier, I have been here/a three months. * The meanings which are here assigned to the different preposition are those by which they are generally translated. But often German pre positions must be rendered by English prepositions different from those whicl we have assigned to them in the above lists. Such idiomatic difference must be learned by practice and the lexicons, as for instance: U n t C r 3c manbe§ ^luc^cn fein, to be before ones eyes; an 3emanben ben!en, to think o> somebody;* ftd) n m etma^ brel)Cn, to turn on sc^mething; t> n etiua^ abt)fln C^cn, to depend on somethins:. ^nrd)t t) r 3emanbem, fear (/somebody; mi Semanbem or an 3cmanben t)erf)eirat^et fein, to be married to somebody; rci( on 2RctaUcn, rich in metals, etc., etc. — 63 — 4. Those prepositions that i^overn two cases (No. 4) require the accu- sative: 1) if they imply a motion towards their object; 2) if they denote the placing of something upon an object, or the application of something to a thing; 3) if they indicate a direction or tendency of the mind towards something. Examples: To No» 1 : 3d) Cje^iC in ben ©artcit, I go into (to) the garden. 3d) Wide i^ii in bic ®tabt, I send him into (to) the city, (Sv fteigt anf b a 6 '^adj, he ascends the roof {literally: mounts upon the roof) . (Sin 5lngriff anf ben Jyetnb, an attack upon the enemy . @ie fd)icf en ©efanbtc a n b c n ^onig, they send en voj-s to the king. @tc T^uhm ftd) 'Winter tl)re ^er^ fd)an;;unfjen jnriic!, they withdraw behind their intrenchments. — To No. 2: 3d) ftecfe ©elb i n b t e Xa^djc, I put money into my pocket, 3d) lege ha^ S8nd) anf ben Xi^d), I place the book on the table. 3d) flopfe an bie %\)nrf I knock at the door (apply a knock to it). 3d) bane ein §au§ anf ben $(a^, I build a house on the ground (the house being placed there), (Sr ftii^t fid) anf mid), he leans on me (implying the placing of the body). (Sin @d)lai3 ing ©efid)t, anf bic @d)nlter, a blow in the face, a tap on the shoulder (applied to the face, etc.). 3d) fe^^te mid) neb en il)n, I seated myself beside him. (Sr fe^t fid) nnter ben 53anm, he takes a seat beneath the tree.— To No. 3: (Sv ben!t an mid), he thinks of me. ®ie fdjauten anf b t C @tabt, they looked on the town. %n 3emanben fd^veiben, to write to somebody, U b e r cine (^ad)t jprec^en, to speak of something, 5. if these prepositions are used in other relations, they require the DATIVE. Thus the dative is required if the governing verb denotes rest or being: (Sr Jt)oI)nt in ber @tabt, he lives in the city, (Sr ftel)t ^ inter b c m §au(c, he stands behind the house. (Sr fi^t nnter b e m 53anme, he is sitting beneath the tree. (Sr ift in g r jj c r S5crlegcnl)eit, he is in a great embarassment. 2)er Unterfd)ieb jroijd)en biefer nnb j e n e r (Bad}t ifl nid)t gro6, the difference (being) between this and that thing is not great. When the governing verb expresses motiox, but the preposition does not denote the aim of the motion, the dative, not the accusative, must be used: (Sr ging an b e m SSatbe borbci, he passed by the wood (literally: went past at the wood). (Sr !am nnter ber (Srbe ^ert)or, he came from below the ground, 6. If these prepositions are used in relations of time, they require the DATIVE in answer to the question when, but the accusative in answer to the question how long: 35or ctntgcn ^ag en, several days ago, am {an bcm) gmeiten 2Rai, on the second of May. But: Gr bcfud)te mid^ anf c in i g e Xage, he visited me for several days. After bi§ they always require the accusative: bi3 anf biefen !^ag, up to this day. Uebcr, in relations of time, requires the accusative: Ueber Dicrge^n S^age, in a fortnight. 7. It is often difficult to determine the correct case to be employed after these prepositions when internal relations are spoken of. All depends here on the manner in which such relations are conceived in the German language. This cannot be fully understood unless the different meanings of — 64 — the governing verbs have been made entirely clear. In such instances the use of the correct case must be learned by practice or the lexicons. § 87. Prepositions can generally not be used before the in terrogative pronoun voa^i and the neuter e5 of the personal pro- noun of the third person. Instead of such combinations the German language generally employs adverbs compounded with n)0 (or iDor), for tt)a^3; and adverbs compounded with ba (or bar), instead of e^3: SSomtt (not mit \m^*) befcf)dfti(jt i^r tni}^ with what do you occupy yourselves? — Q6) ^abe mid) b arttt (not in c§) geirrt, I was mistaken in it. Rem. — 1. These combinations with tt)0 and ba are used only with the following prepositions: mtt, nebft, bet, Don, nac^, au§, ^u, burd), fiir, um, gegen, ttJiber and all prepositions governing both the accu^tive and dative. Instead of trecjcit with e§, we say be§rt)egen (on account of it), and instead of iDecjen with \va^: rtte^mcgenf (for what reason) ? 2. The same adverbial combination with tro and the prepositions men- tioned above is frequently used instead of prepositions with relative pro- nouns, as U) r i n , instead of in meld)em, in which; tnoran, instead of an iDeld)em, at which; n)obur(^ instead of burd) n)ctd)en (melc^e, h)eld)eg), etc. But these combinations are inadmissible if the relative pronoun has a persoh as antecedent. § 88. The dative and neuter accusative of the definite ar- ticle is frequently contracted with some prepositions into one word, taking the form of the letter m for the dative, and ^ for the neuter accusative. Thus are especially used : am instead of an bent Dom instead of t)on bent an§ ,, an ba^ gnm „ gu bem tm ,, in bem bnrd)« ,, bnrd) ha^ tn« „ in t>a^ fiir§ ,, fiir ba3 auf^ ,, auf ba^ iibcrm ,, iiber bem ■ betm ,, bet bem libera ,, iiber ba§. The dative feminine of the article is thus contracted with the prepos- ition ju only (gnr instead of gn ber). * Occasionally we meet with the expressions auf n)a§, bon itJaS, mit h)a§, burc^ ma^. But these combinations are considered as faulty if the pre- position governs the dative, and as inelegant if the preposition is connected with the accusative. t The spellino: be^ttjegen and ttjcgtuegen is very frequently met with; but be^njegen and iDeSmegen are more correct. 65 CHAPTER YII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 89. Conjunctions are divided into coordinating and sub- ordinating conjunctions. Tlic coordinating conjunctions are: unb, and beiin, for aha, ] entircbcr ober, either or attetn, V but iDeber nod), neither nor fonbevn, ) ntd^t uur (blojs) foubern aud), not bod), yet, still, but only but also. ober, or Rem» ©onbcrn is only used after sentences or phrases containing a ne- gative: S^t fottt nid)t fpieten, foubern lernen, you must not play but study. See P. C. page 72. The conjunction but, if it does not correct a previous clause, but merely restricts it, is rendered by abet, not by fonbem: 3d) fann bir md)t I)elfen; aber mein iBruber mU e§ tl)mt/I cannot help you, but my brother will [do it]. 5Ittetn and abev are used almost synonymously, but aUein imparts a stronger emphasis to the sentence than abev: 2)U ntac^jl bte§ tt)un, a n ei n erinnere bic^ beine§ 2l5crfpred)en§, you may do this, but re- member your promise. § 90. The subordinating conjunctions are: hai, that nad)bem, after bam it, in order that nial)renb, ] a\^, when, than, as inbem, [■ while \o at^*, as as inbeffen, ) ha, since, as iDte, as; bi3,till tr»et(, because jeitbem, feit, since (ever since) ttjcnn, if, when obgteid), ^ (See P. qgp. 102). njcnn, if, when obgteid), ) Ob, whether (if) obfd)on, \ (gee P Ql^ I a(8 ob (mie njenn), as if obmobL etc. ) * ^^ aU ob (mie njenn), as if obmo^l, etc. ^^^' i before ^ ie....befto, the.... the beoor, j ungeac^tet, although Hem. — 1. Clauses introduced by subordinating conjunctions (or by rela- tive adjectives and adverbs) are called dependent sentences or clauses. They require the finite verb to be at the end of the clause: Sr ift gtiicflid), tt» e i t Cr Jjufviebcn ift, he is happy, because he is contented. The sentence to which the dependent clause is appended, is called the principal sentence. * Here belongs the combination foit>ol)I oi^ (and^), as well. . . .as, both. . . .and, which is mostly used to connect single words or phrasfs with the force of coordinating conjunctions: ®ott)o^l beine, al^ and) nicine greunbe, both your and my friends. @ott)0^l SBergangene^ a(« ^i^^i^if^ifl^^/ *^^ P^^ *s well as the future. — 6Q — t. For the relation of the words roetin, Wann, al€, when, if, see Practi< Course p. 74. For nad^bem and el}e sec P. C. p. 81. For obglei^, objd)on and th other equivalents of although and even if, see P. C. p. 102. For the ellipsis itJenn and ob see P. C. p. 102, Rem. 3. The conjunction ob is sometime omitted in the combination a(§ ob, as if. In this case the verb must be in mediately phxced after al^i (S*r fprad), aU ob er unfd)u(big tvdre, or a I tt) arc er unfd)Ulbtg, he spoke as if he were innocent. 3. In comparative clauses as is rendered either by al^ or by U)te, th former referring to degree and intensity, and the latter to manner: 3Bir fin fo reid^ a ( 6 i^r, we are as rich as you. 2Bir benten \V i e il)r, we are thinkin as you do (in the same manner as). 4. 2(I§ (not tvit) is also used after the combinations of fo with adverbs TIME (fobalb aU, as soon as; fo oft at§, as often as; fo lange aU, as long as In these combinations aU is frequently omitted, and fo with the adverb ( time is used with the force of a subordinating conjunction: @obaIb er nad) bi ©tabt ^uruct!c()rte, as soon as he returned to the city. ®o oft id) biti^ anfe^i as often as I look at you. 5. The comparative conjunction al3 corresponds also to the English tha, after comparatives (P. C, p. 12), and to the conjunction but after the negj tive pronouns: g^temanb a t § id), nobody but I. 9fiid)t§ al§ bieg tDtrb mi geniigeu, nothing but this will satisfy me. 6. The conjunction bag is frequently connected with certain preposition (ftatt, auger, ol)ne) or prepositional adverbs (baburd^, bafiir, barin, baran, etc.] bein.s: generally rendered by an English preposition followed by a participia clause: ® t a tt b a (3 er feinen ^luftrag auSfii^rte, instead of performing hi charge. D I) n e ha^ er e^ 311 merfeu fd)ten, without seeming to notice it 51 u fj e r b a f3 er feine ©efunb^eit Derlor, except that he lost his health (or hesidi losing his health). 2) a b u r d^ b a fj er ftet§ feine iBcrfpred)nnnen I)ielt, b always keeping his promises. 2)aran bafjer ^ter ift, l^abc id) nid^t gebad^i of his being here I did not think. 7. 211^ ^g with the subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect (mostly of modal auxiliary) is used idiomatically after adjectives or adverbs precede by ju (too), corresponding to a mere English infinitive: 3d) Uicig bte^ 3 getDtfi^atSbagic^ ntid) irren !i)nnte, I know this too certainly to be mistaken ^r ii^ar ^jn l)artnadtlg, aU bafjer feinen $(an aufgegeben I)atte, he wa t(^o obstinate to give up his plan. If the subjects in both clauses are different the English sentence must be recast: 2)ie geftung tx^urbe gu l^artnddfi t»ertf)eibigt, at § bag mv fie Ijdtten ne!)men fonnen, the fortress was to bravely defended to be taken by us. d^ ift gU f^dt, a U b a g er nod^ bmmi fijnnte, it is too late /or hirn to come (literally: than tluit he should come). 8. The adverbs fatt^ (in the case that), and UJOfem (provided that) a frequently used with the force of the conjunction n)enn (if): gatt^ e§ morgi regnen fottte, if it should rain to-morrow. Sofern er fein iBerfprcd^en Ijdlt, (provided that) he keeps his promise. — 6Y — 9» The English conjunction unless (except if) is either translated by rDentl ntd)t, rtjofern nidit, auger menu, or by the circumlocution c6 [ei benn bag, or by the subjunctive of the verb placed at the beginning of the clause, and followed by bcttnt I shall depart to-morrow unless he should order (it) otherwise^ id) tDerbe morgeu abreifen, n? e n n er e§ nid)t anber§ bcftimmt; or c § f e i benn, bagereS anber^ beftimmt; or c r b e ftt m in e e § benn anbev«. 10. The adverb and) in connection with preceding relative adjectives or adverbs (ttjo, tDte, luann) or with the adverbs fo fe'^r or with fo and an adjec- tive, is used with the force of a concessive conjunction, similar to the conjunctions obtt)ol)l, ob{d}On, etc. (although). These combinations are rendered in different ways: a) %\x6) after relatives corresponds to the English combinations with ever, soever: 2B e r e8 and) fet, whoever he (it) may be. 23 cr fid^ and) befinbe, whereever he may stay. iBa^ and) (|efd)et)en macj, er njtrb fein SSort ^alten, whatsoever may happen, he will keep his word. h) %\x6) after fo fet)r (tt)ie \t\\X) corresponds to the adverb however, however much : Sir tonnen e§ nic^t tl)un, f o (n)ie) f e I) r mir e§ a u d^ njiinjc^en, we cannot do it however much we may desire it. c) %Vi^ after jo with an adjective or adverb is rendered by however or by as: @ o e I) r t i d) feine ©eftnnnngen and) fein moc^ten, man traute i^m bennod) ntd)t, however honest might have been his sentiments, he was nevertheless not trusted, (go grog anc!^ fein ©influg toax, er lonnte fctne 2Sunfd)e nid)t bnrdjfeljen, great as was his influence, he could not carry out his desires. § 91. If a clause introduced by a subordinating conjunc- tion is placed before the principal sentence, the clause is called PROTASIS (33orberfa^), and the principal sentence, APODOSis (9^a(I}fa^). The apodosis generally has the inverted ORDER of arrangement, in which the finite verb has the first place before the subject of the sentence. If the protavSis be introduced by one of the conjunctions inemi, a(^, ha, todU lt)ie, obg(eid) (and its synonyms) and the combinations with [o (Rem. 10), the apodosis is frequently introduced by th^ adverb fo, which in this connection is not translated in English: Examples: — 3)ag fid) bie§ ereignen n)iirbe, ^atte x6) Icintjft tjermntl^et, that this would happen I had supposed long ago. SBci^renb id) anf bem !?anbe n)ar, brannte me in §an§ in ber @tabt ab, while I was in the country, my house in the city burned down. Senn i()r rnl)i(^ 3Ul)oren trollt, (f o) tT) er be id) end) bie ©riinbe an^einanberfefeen, if you will listen quietly I shall explain to you the reasons. Obn^ot)! bu 9led)t l}a% (fo) miirbcfl bn bod^ n)0^( t^un, bic^ JU magigen, although you are right, you would nevertheless — 68 — do well to restrain yourself. ®o fel^r bii auc^ eUen magfl, (fo) ttjcrbe i bod) fruiter bort jein, al^ bU, however much you may hasten, I shall yet b sooner there than you. Rem. In periods with the combination jc .... beflo (the the), thi clause introduced by je is the dependent clause (protasis), and that with beft theprmcipal sentence (apodosis). Hence the former has the order of de pendent clauses (§ 90, Rem. 1), while the latter has the inverted order : 3 raenigev i^r barttber fpre(f}t, befto beffer n? i r b e 8 fiir eud) fein, the less yoi speak about it, the better will it be for you. CHAPTER VIII. ADVERBS. § 92. All adverbs are derived words, being forme( from any of the other parts of speech. The most import ant class of the adverbs is that which is derived fron ADJECTIVES. Rem. Adverbs are condensations of speech, representing either prepos itional phrases, containing one of the ideas of space, time, manner, intensity CAUSE, or whole clauses. Thus the adverb l^ier (here) denotes at this place: th< adverb VDanil (when), at what time; tPie (how), in what manner ;\t\6)i (easily), m an easy manner; \t\)X (very, very much), in a high degree; tuarum (why), /or wha cause. Other adverbs denote whole clauses, as: 3^^^/ ^^ ^* ^^^^ ^^^^> befaitnt lid), as you (v^e) knoic; l^offeitttid), it may be hoped that; iDQ^rfdjeintid) (probably) it is probable that; fonft (else), if this is not the case, then .... Thus the adverbi [a (yes) and netU (no) denote the affirmation or denial of the whole preceding interrogative sentence. * § 93. Adverbs derived from adjectives imply 1) the idea of a preposition;* 2) the idea of the adjective from which thej are derived; 3) one of the ideas of space, time, manner, in tensity or cause. The adjectives from which adverbs are de- rived are either ordinary or pronominal adjectives. Ordinarj adjectives are used as adverbs in their own crude forms with * Thus the adverbs of manner imply the preposition in (fd^bn, in beautiful manner); adverbs of time imply the preposition at or on (^eiltc, < this day). — 69 — out receiving any ending*: gr \px\(i)t pt, he speaks loell. (gte ^anbeln weife, they act ivisely. ® iefe ©d)raierig!eit ift I e i c^ t er* U'dxtf this difficulty is easily explained. Rem. — 1, Some adverbs add the ending U(^ (English hj) to the adjec- tive: fd)tt)erUc^, hardly; n)al)rUcl), verily; IcDiglid), only, and several others. Other adverbs add the word iDeifc (like the English wise in otherwrn) to the gen. fern, of the adjective, this word being originally the fern, noun ^eijc (manner), as: gtiicflid^emeifc, fortunately; tttcrfti)iirbtcjcrtt)etfe, peculiarly; irtugertoeife (or HiigUc!^) prudently. A few adjectives add the ending t, as: langC, long, a long time; fernC or ferit, far. The adjective gut forms two ad- verbs it)ot)( and gut, both corresponding to the English well, 2. The COMPARATIVES of adjectives are used as adverbs without any further ending, in the same manner as the positives: er lief f d) U e 11 er , he ran more quickly, ^r tDUgte ba^ b e f j e r , he knew that better, 3. The adverbs of superlatives are differently formed for absolute super- latives (denoting a very high degree), and relative superlatives (denoting the highest degree among compared qualities). The adverbs of absolute superlatives are formed: a) Without any ending in the manner of positives. Only a few adverbial superlatives, thus formed, are in common usage, as: freunbUd)ft, most amicably; ^er^lid)ft, most cordially; iuuigft, most tenderly; el)r* erbietigft, most humbly; ergebcuft, (most) respectfully; geljorjamft, (most) obediently. Several adverbs thus formed cannot be trans- lated literally, as: gefcilligft or giitigft,if you please; mi3gtid)ftasmuch as possible; b eftini3g(id}ft, as well as possible; ba(bmi3giici)ft, as soon as possible; tdugft, long ago; dufierft (l}0d}ft), exceedingly. h) A few superlative adverbs add the ending eu^ to the superlative of the adjective, as: befteu^ (in the best manner), fd)oufteu3 (in the handsomest manner), fiul)eften0 (at the earliest), f^jcitfteu^ (at the latest), tt)enigfteu§ (at least). c) Generally the absolute superlative of adverbs is formed by the pre- position auf with the accus. neuter of the adjective superlative: auf^ forgfdlttgfte, in the most accurate manner; auf^ foftbarfte, most ex- pensively. Sr unterfagte bie§ aufS ftrengfte, 'he forbade this in the most positive manner'. Very frequently the absolute superlative adverbs are expressed by circumlocution with superlatives of degree, and the positives of the adverbs: d U J3 e r ft ^cftig, most (extremely) violently, ^r UJarb \)o6)\i milbc beftraft, he was punished most leniently. * Hence it is impossible to distinguish formally a predicative adjective from an adverb in German, The connection alone must show whether a word must be parsed as a predicative adjective or as an adverb. Compare: Die3 ift I e t c^ t (this is easy), and bic« ift t C i d) t get^an (this is easily done), ©r ift iJorftd[)tig, he is. cautious, and cr ^anbelt CorflC^tig, he acts caw^iow^. — 70 — Adverbs of relcative superlatives are formed by am with the dative of the adjective-superlative, the same as predicative superlatives (§ 59): (Sr Ijat btefen ^untt am forijfdltigften bel)anbe(t, he has treated this subject mort accurately (that is: more accurately than the other objects, or: than other persons ) . S)ie§ 9^ec|tment \)(ii bem geinbe am Idngften tuiberftanben, this regiment ha withstood the enemy longest (that is: longer than any other regiment). Rarely the preposition gu is used instead of an: gum minbeftcn, at least. § 94. To the pronominal adjectives correspond pronom* INAL adverbs which, accordingly, are called interrogative, RELATIVE, DEMONSTRATIVE, INDEFINITE and NUMERAL ADVERBS. From possessive pronouns no adverbs are formed. To the interrogatives (mer, UJa^, tDclc^er) correspond the following adverbs: 1) of place: n)0, where; tDol^in, whither n)oI)er, whence; 2) of time: mann, when; 3) of manner anc intensity: Xqk, how (in what manner or degree); 4) of cause jparum, ipe^I)atb, tDe^megcn, why. Rem. — 1. The adverb ttjtc is used in connection with other adverbs U form adverbial expressions of TIME, quantity, degree and manner: Xo'xt of^ how often; ttJie fe^r, how much; Xo'xt hoWi, how soon. SStC is also used, lik< the English how before adjectives as an adverb of intensity (it)ie (^rog, tt)i gut, etc.). Such combinations must often be recast in English: Sin tt)i t^eure^ $ferb ^aben @ie, how dear is the horse you have ? (literally : A hai dear horse have you ?) 2. The adverb lr>0 forms compounds with most prepositions, having th< force of the corresponding English preposition with the interrogative pro noun what (tt)a«), as momtt, mobiivc^, monac^ (with what, by what, afte what). With prepositions beginning with a vowel, tt)0 takes its old an( original form Vrov (UJOtauf, itJOran, tt)Onu). See § 87. § 95. The demonstrative adverbs are mostly formed fron the demonstrative root ha (corresponding to the demonstrative adjective ber), and the ancient demonstrative root hi (corres ponding to the adjective biefer). They are: 1) adverbs place: t}icr, here (at this place); ba (bort), there (at tha place); l)er (toward the place of the speaker); I)in (away fron the place of the speaker), and the coml3inations ba^er or hoxtljC (thence, from there), bal^in or bort^iit (thither), I)ierl)er an^ ]^ierl)iu (hither); 2) adverbs of time: bann, then, and the com pound bama(^, at that time; jel^t, now, at this time; 3) of manne] and intensity: fo, so, thus; 4) of cause: barum, be^^atb, bti WtQtWf therefore, for that reason. — 11 — Rem. — 1. The adverbs \)tx and ^in belong to the most frequent words of the German language, without having any precise English equivalents. They are used either in composition or in close connection with other words. See "p. C. p. 99, Obs. 4: a) In composition with adverbs they take the last place, Ijxn denoting a direction away from the place of the speaker to or towards a place, and ^ec a direction from another place toward that of the speaker. Thus are used h)0^in( whither), ba^in or bort^tu (thither), fernl^in to [into] a distance; tt3oI}er (whence), ba^er or bort^er (thence), fertlljer (from afar). In composition with Ij'itic, however, both !^itt and l)er denote direction toward the speaker, ^ter^er denoting hither (not hence*), and Ijiev^in hither or thither, referring to a place near the speaker. @r fommt b r t l)er or b a Ijer, he comes thence (from there); er gel)t b o r t ^in or b al)in, he goes thither. But: bringc bie§ 1^ i e r ^ C r , bring this hither (to me); lege baS ^ud) l^ierl)in, place the book here (at a spot near the speaker), ^ierl^in is often used in opposition to bort()in, the same as biefer in opposition to jener. b) In com[)Osition with verbs l^er has generally the meaning of l^ier^er (hither), and \)m the meaning of bortl^ill (thither), dv eilte ^er, he hastened hither; er elite I) in, he hastened thither. c) In composition with prepositions l)er and j^in generally take the first place, the accent being on the preposition (l^erau, l^iuauf, fteretn,t ]^inab4 etc). In these compounds, which are generally again com- posed with verbs, the words l)n and l^in are not distinguished in the English translation (see the examples in P. C. p. 100), and merely refer to the place of the speaker, or to that place to which the speaker imagines himself transferred in his narrative. ' lie stepped into the carriage may be rendered; er ftteg in ben SBagcn Ijerein or l^inein. The f<3rmer translation indicates that the speaker is in the carriage or dwells there with his mind; the latter translation in- dicates that the speaker is, or imagines himself to be, outside of the carriage. If the words '^er and l^in follow the preposition with which they are compounded, they have mostly conventional meanings. The word ^er in this combination frequently denotes the absence of precise direction: Qx fd)ritt e i n ^ e r , he walked along; er ging U ttt * f) er , he walked about. The metaphorical meanings of the different compositions of ^er and Ij'm are very different, and must be learned from the lexicon. * The English hence is rendered by t)on ^ter, not by I)ierl)er. f The preposition in with the accusative takes in all compositions the form ein. The preposition in with the dative takes the form innc, which in the verb i^tn)ot)nen is changed into in, but in the noun (Sinnjo^ner into cin. Both forms are inorganic. X %b in compositions corresponds to the English ojf and often to the pre- position oon. 2. 2)a and l^ier (like n)o) form compounds with most prepositions (see § 87), corresponding to an English prepu^ition with the pronoun it or the demonstratives this and that, 2)a (before vowels bar) implies the pronoun it or the demonstrative that; \)\tx implies the demonstrative this: 2)abur(^, hy\ that, hy it, therel/y; {)icrblird), hy this; barttt, in that, in it, therein; pterin, in this. Both ba and i)uv, but especially the former, are frequently used as adverbs of TIME, with the meaning then, and often serve as loose connectives to denote the progress of the narrative: S)a fam t^m feitt iBruber entgegen, then his brother met him. 3. To the adverbs formed from the demonstrative root hi belong the words l^cute (old German hiutu, contracted from hiutagu, at this day), to-day; and l^euer (old German hiuru, contracted from hiujaru, in this year), thisyear^ Here belongs also the word ^eint or Ijint, to-night (old German hinaht), which occurs only in some local dialects. ' 4. To the demonstrative berfctbe corresponds the adverb eben in its different compositions: cbenfo, in the same manner; cbetlba (ebenbaje(bft), at the same place; ebenbal)in, to the same place; ebenbat)cr, from the same place; ebenfallS, likewise, ^ben is also connected with berjelbe and the other demonstrative adjectives, making them more emphatic: eben bevfetbe, eben biefer, eben jener, thm ber (that very man, etc.). The various idiomatic significations of eben must be learned from the lexicon. § 96 » The indefinite adverbs are of very various formation, being either ancient words, or compounds of modern origin. They are best classified according to their connection with the indefinite adjectives (p. 20, 21, 22). a) To the indefinites etntger, ttielc^er and ctnjaS (§ 37.), or to the idea represented by some and any belong the adverbs jc (jemalS), tver^ the compounds of the adverbs \vo, iDannand mc with irgenb, irgenb* lUO*, somewhere, anywhere; irgenb JDann, at some time; irgenbunc, in some manner, somehow, anyhow), and the adverb ttwa (or etWanJ instead of etlDann), denoting indefiniteness in general, and corres-J ponding to about, perhaps, 'say: (gr ift e t tt) a ad)t 3al)ve a(t, he isS about eight years old. §abt i^r e t Ui a gcfd)fafen? did you sleep perhaps ? 9^e()men ^\t einigc $[ unb , e t m a brei ober tjicr, takej some pounds of. . . ., say three or four. b) To the indefinite tein belong the negative adverbs nie, ttieutal^J nimmer (opposed to \t), never; nirgenb; nowhere; nic^t, not; neinJ no; !etne§roecj§, by no means; teinenfattS; in no case. c) To jeber and aHer belong the adverbs iiberatl (aUentl)aiben), ever}!] where; immer (aUejeit, jcbeqeit, ftet§),always, ever; jcbenfall^, at any rate; jebe^mof; attemal, every time. * Even the simple adverb tro is sometimes used as an indefinite adverb,! with the meaning somewJiere. — 73 — d) To toiel belong the adverbs oft, often; puftg, frequently; t)iCi[maI§. many times; fe^r/very, very much, much; ^Vi, too; 311 je^r, too much. e) To Uienicj belong jeltett, seldom, rarely, and to mand)er the adverbs manc^mal, bl^njeilen, jutveikn, sometimes. PtFM. — 1. The root of the adverb jc (old German io) is found in several indefinite adjectives and adverbs, as jeber, uie, tmmer (instead of iemer), ^t is used especially in interrogative and conditional sentences: (gcib il)r je bovt (tctuefen ? were you ever there ? 2Benn er J e iuieberfomtnen foEte, if he should ever return. S5on Je or tjott je^cr denotes 'from times imrnemoriaV . 3c has also a distributive meaning: (gr gab il)nen je t)ier 2^^ater, he gave four dollars to each. 3e liac^bem means according as; je nac^, according to, 3e is also used as a conjunction. See § 90. 2. The indefinite adjectives Diet, tueitt^, tnel)r are also used as adverbs* The English adverb much (very much) is generally translated by fe^r: (Sr be* triibt fid) f e!)r (not Uiet), he is much afflicted. S>tel is used as adverb only if it does not refer to intensity: er gel)t t)tel fpa^terett, he walks much. The adverb me^t with a negative often corresponds to the English longer: ^r tfl n t d) t me ^ r @oIbat, he is no longer a soldier, ©r ^at t e i u e greunbe ni e I) r, he has 7io longer any friends (no friends left). The adverbs gar and red)t have a meaning sfmilar to fe^r, as: Sr tft ein gar red)tlid)er 9Jiann, he is a very honest man; er ift red)tgefrf)eibt, he is very clever. @ar nid)t mcd^ns not at all. The peculiar idiomatic meanings of gar must be learned from the lexicon. § 9Y. The relative adverbs have no peculiar formation of their own. The German language borrows either the interro- gative or the demonstrative adverbs (with ba) for the purpose of relative clauses. Rem.— 1. As relatives of place serve the adverbs UJO, tDot)in, 'mo\)tt, and the compounds of tt)0 with prepositions (§ 94, Rem. 2.): ber Ort*, tvo x6) il)n fa^, the place where (at which) I saw him. S)te ®tabt, tl) l)er er !am, the city from which (whence) he came. ©el)e, ttJO^in bu njitlft, go where (whither) you like. 2)a« §au«, to rtl^ er ttJol)nt, the house in which ho lives. The use of demonstrative adverbs as relatives of place is only poetical : ber 8erg, ba^er (instead of U30l)er) er !am, the mountain from which he came. 2. As relatives of time the German language borrows either the inter- rogative or demonstrative adverbs of place, as: baS 3a^r, VO (or b o) bieS gefc^al), the year in which this happened. The relative adverbs of manner are borrowed from the interrogatives (tDie): bie W, Wie bteS gcfd)a^, ihe manner in which this was done. * Relative clauses, and clauses introduced by conjunctions are in German always separated by commas. — 74 — 3. Relative adverbs are also used in correlation to demonstratives: 3( ftanb ha , tt) o er mic^ ermartete, I stood there where he expected me. ^d) Ijaw kite f 0, U)ie er e^ befdjlofien l}atte, I acted so as he had determined it. I: such connections the demonstratives are frequently omitted, and the rclativ adverbs pass over into conjunctions: 3d) ftanb, \vo er mi(^ ermartete; ic^ l}a; belte, tt) i e er e§ befd)Ioffen l)atte. § 98. Many adverbs that formerly were adjectives, ar( now used only as adverbs, as bafb, soon, gern, ivillingly. Othe adverbs are formed in various ways from nouns, verbs ant prepositions. See the lexicons. Rem. Adverbs not derived from adjectives are generally not susceptibl of comparison. But of some adverbs that formerly were used as adjectivi an irregular comparison has boen preserved. 33alb (soon) forms the com paratives e'^er or frii^er (sooner) and the superlatives am efjeften, am frii^efte; (soonest). @ern (willingly) forms the comparative tieber (more willingly rather) and the superlative am tiebften (most willingly): 3ci} t^ue e§ gem I do it willingly (I like to do it); id) tl)lie e§ H e b e r , 1 rather do it; id) tl)U eS om H e b ft e n , I like most to do it. Dft (often) forms the comparativi i)fter, ofterer (oftener) or ofter§ (with the force of a positive — rather cften) The superlative is rare: om {hVim) ofteften, ofteften, ofterften (dftenest). In stead of it am l)aufigftcn is generally used. It is peculiar that the compara tives ()fter and ijfterer, and (very rarely) the superlative are also used a adjectives. CHAPTER IX. THE MOST IMPORTANT SYNTACTICAL RULES*. § 99. The DEFINITE ARTICLE is often used in German when th English language either uses no article at all, or an indefinite article. Thi is especially the case 1) before abstract nouns, especially if the case couli not be recognized without an article: 2)ie iBorfc^riften b e r 3fieIi(]ion, th commands of religion; bie Uebet b e§ ^rieg«, the evils of war; 2) if concret nouns are used to represent a whole genus or species, as: 2) er SD^enjd) ben!t, @0tt letltt, man proposes and God disposes. 2)ie %\)mt fmb fterblid^, beasts are mortal; 3) if an indefinite noun is followed by an attributive genitive with the indefinite article: 2)er ©efanbte etne« aii^martigen §ofe§ fam einjl in eine fleine beutfd)e ®tabt, an embassador of some foreign court came once to a small German city. The article is frequently not used in German, when the English languai makes use of either the definite or indefinite article: 1) often with nou: * Only those syntactical rules are given here, which for the beginner an most necessary to know in order to introduce him in the reading of German text. — 15 — connected by unb or obcr: (5r bcrfauftc §au8 unb ©artcti, he sold the house and the garden; 2) often before adjectives after prepositions: (Sr auttDortetC tnit gri3f3ter ^Vi\)tf he answered with the greatest calmness; 3) often before predicative nouns: (Sr ift 53urcjer ber S^ereinigten etaaten, he is a citizen of the United States. § 100. AGREEMENT. 1. All adjective pronouns, adjectives and participles used adjectively must agree with their governing nouns in number, gender, and case: (Sin gc* rdumigc§ §au§, a spacious house. 3}lit grower 5lufmer!fam!eit, with great attention. ^otd)Ctt 9)ldnncrtt, to such men. 2)ie vgorgen ttebenbet ©(tern, the cares of loving parents. 2. If adjectives, without a repetition of the article, are placed after their governing nouns*, they are generally left without inflectional endings: 3)ic iBciume, griin unb frifd), the trees, green and fresh ; but bie ^inber, b i e un* fd^utbigClt, the children, the innocent ones. 3. Some adjectives are either altogether indeclinable, or drop occasion- ally, or in some of their forms the inflectional endings. Altogether inde- clinable are a) adjectives in er, formed from the names of cities, as: bcr ^|>a* rijcr griebe, the Parisian peace, Gen. be^ ^arijCt grieben^, etc. h) S)ie ad- jectives tauter and citet, if used in the signification mere, nothing but: CEr fprid)t in tauter 9ldtl)fe{n, he speaks in mere riddles. 3u eitet I?uft unb ^43rad)t, in mere gaiety and splendor, c) Numeral adjectives ending in ertei are indeclinable: 2J2it ntant^erlci iBemertungen, with several remarks. d) Adjectives often drop their strong ending e§ in the nom. or ace. singular of the neuter gender: (Sin neu (instead of neuc§) (3t\ti^, a new law. e) The adjectives ganj and Ijatb, if used without an article, are used without inflectional endings before names of countries and towns: @ot(^en (Stauben ^abe id) in gau^ 3frciet ntd)t gefunben, such a faith I did not find in all Israel. §atb !^onbon ttjiirbc ruiuirt merben, cne half of London would be ruined, f) For niebr, biet, ftienig, see § 41, 42, 44. ff) The pronominal adjectives mand)er, tDctd)cr, fotd}er, frequently drop their inflectionrd endings, and always before the inde- finite article: ntan^ ein (many a), tvcidj eiu (what a), fold) ein (such a). 4. Predicative adjectives are not inflected, except if used with an article (see p. 32.). Predicative nouns, and nouns in apposition always agree with their subjects or governing nouns in case, and generally in numbei also, dx tvav t)crtt)anbt mit 2Bill)eIm, bent ^rin;^en Don Oranien, he was related to William, the prince of Orange. If the predicative noun (or the noun in ap- position) denote a person (§ 6 ), it must take the feminine gender in agree- ment with a feminine subject, provided the noun be capable of taking that ending, ©ic ®efd)id)te ift bie 9iid)tcritt ber ^onige, history is the judge of kings. * The placing of adjectives after their governing nouns is mostly con- fined to poetry or higher style. — t6 — 6. If two or more subjects are connected by imb, the verb is generall| in tbe phiral; but if all the subjects are in the singular, the verb is sometime^ found in the singuhir number, ^avi uub ^^riebrid) f i It b augefoinilien, Charlei and Frederick have arrived. 3n feiuer ©eiPUlt \V a X 2:ob unb l^ebeu, in his power were life and death. 6. By two or more attributive adjectives the number of their governing noun is not affected: 2)ie beutfd)e unb fraugofifdje a r , tu nr b e in bte ®ctat)ercl Derfauft, all of the inhabitants that had escaped the slaughter were sold into slavery. Often absolute adjectives in the neuter singular refer to persons in order to indicate that either of the two sexes is meant. §at nic!^t ein 3 e b e § t»on-euc^ (men and women) fc^on %d)Xl* \\6)Z% erfa^ren ? Has not every one of you already experienced similar things ? 3. Absolute adjectives are placed in the neuter singular to denote things or QUALITIES, both in an abstract and concrete sense: 2)a§ ©r^abcnc unb 'td^ @d)one, the sublime and the beautiful. S)a§ ©roge unb Unertuartetc bc3 ©C^aufptel^, the greatness of the spectacle and the fact that it was imexpected (literally: the great and unexpected of the spectacle). SBenn tt>ir ^(eincS mit ©rogem Uergleid}en, if we compare small with great things. 2)ie§ (bie* je^) nimmt mid) Sunber, this takes me by surprise. 4. All absolute adjectives are inflected either strong or weak, according to the general rules, as if nouns of respectively masculine, feminine or neuter gender were added. § 102. THE THEORY OF THE CASES.* 1. The NOMINATIVE is a) the case of the subject, and of all words that must agree with the subject; b) the case of the predicate-noun. A predicate- * The general English equivalents of the German cases (p. 6) denote the original ideas connected with them. They are only applied when the relations in which the nouns stand to other parts of the sentence are con- ceived in the same way by both languages. Wherever this conception differs, the German cases must be expressed by other equivalents. We give in § 102. the leading differences in the conceptions of both languages. — 78 — nominative is required a. by the verbs fetn, to be; ttJerben, to become; bteibeit, to remain; fd)einen, to seem; l^eigcn, to be called, b. By the passive of those verbs that denote the application of a name to some one (nenuen, to call, fc^elten or fdjtm^fen, to call abusively; taufen, to give a name by baptism, to christen). The English predicate-nominatives after the passives of other verbs (as: to consider, elect, etc.) must, with the corresponding German verbs^be expressed by the preposition gu or fiir: (Sr iDiirbe gum ^rdfibeuteil ern^d^It, he was elected President, ©r tDirb f ii r e t it en @elel)rten ge^atteu, he is con- sidered a scholar, c. The nominative is iised, as in English, with the force of a vocative with or without the interjection o (Oh). 2. The German verbs, except those classes mentioned No. 1, are con- strued either with cases other than the nominative, or with nouns in connection with prepositions. The cases (without prepositions) required by verbs are the GENITIVE, DATIVE and ACCUSATIVE, cach of which may correspond to a mere objective in English or to a prepositional construction. It is presumed tJuit a verb requiring the mere objective in the English language corresponds to a German verb construed with the accusative: ^i) lobe ben (Sv"t)iiler, T praise the scholar; er tobtet f e t n c n ^etub, he kills his enemy. The following rules are mostly exceptions to this principle. a) The genitive is required 1) by many reflexives, as: fid) cinCt @a(^e ontnagcn, to usurp a thing; fid) eincr @ai^e bcbieneit, to make use of a thing; fic^ etncr ^a^t erinnern, to remember a thing; ftd) 3c* TnanbCt§ erbarmen, to take pity on somebody. 2) By many verbs wliich besides an accusative of the direct object require a genitive of the indirect object, as: 3emanbCtt eiticr ^Ci6)t be(d)ulbl(^en, to accuse somebody of a thing; Semanbctl eitic^ S)ieufte8 enttaffen, to remove somebody from an office. 3) The other verbs requiring a genitive are mostly construed also with the accusative: ciltCt (eine) ©ac^e be=» biirfen, to need a thing; einet (etnc) ^a6)Z entbe^ren, to lack a thing; eincr (eine) ^ad^t ermdlinen, to mention a thing. b) The verbs requiring a simple object in the dative mostly con-espond to English verbs requiring the mere objective: 3enianbcm banfen, to thank somebody; 3cmanbcm broken, to threaten somebody; 3e* ntanbcm entf(iel)en, to escape somebody. Thus are construed folcjen, to follow; ge^ord)en, to obey; l^elfen, to help; nii^en, to benefit; ent* fagen, to renounce; lDiberftel)en, to resist; fd^meid^ctn, to flatter, and many others. — Verbs that require two objects generally have one object (the direct) in the accusative, and the other (the indirect) in the dative, as: (gincm etma^ geben, to give (to) somebody something: ©in Cm etn)a§ ertanben, to permit somebody some- thing. This construction comprises verbs denoting the taking away of something from somebody. After such verbs the person from whom something is taken, is almost always placed in the dative, as: ©incm etmaS nel^men, to take something from somebody; (SinCitt ttroa^ ftel)ten or rauben, to steal or rob something from somebody; — 79 — ^incm etroa^ tni^klftn, to withdraw something from somebody. Thus are construed eiltraenben, to purloin; cntrei^en, to snatch away; ob|)fdnben, to distrain; obnotljigen, to force away, and many other verbs exprt-ssing similar ideas. c) The following verbs, taking two objects, require, both of them, to be in the accusative: 1) frageit, to ask, and le^ren, to teach;* 2) those verbs which, in the passive, require a predicate-nominative (No. 1, b, 6); ®ic namttcn il)n hen (§ro6en, they called him the Great. Verbs of considering, selecting, etc., require the prepositions gu or fur. 3. German Adjectives govern either the genitive (as: fd^ig, capable; jc^utbig, guilty; t)erbdd)tig, suspected; U)iil'btg, worthy), or the dative (as: dljItUd), similar; g(eid), equal; na^C, near; nii^(id), useful; gefd^rlid), dan- gerous), or they are construed with prepositions (as: giitig gegen, kind to; rcic^ an, rich in; ftotj auf, proud of; gornig iiber, angry at, etc.). Those that j^overn the genitive mostly correspond to English adjectives construed with of; those that govern the dative mostly answer to English adjectives con- strued with to or for. The accusative after adjectives is used only after a few adjectives in place of the usual genitive, as: 3d) bin il)n (feiner) Io3, I am rid of him. 3d) bin e$ miibe, I am tired of it. 4. A NOUN, dependent on another noun, is placed either in the genitive or connected by a preposition. f The English possessive case dependent on nouns, is either rendered by a German genitive (which may be placed before its noun — the latter losing its article, as in English), or by a compound noun: Jfy brother's children, uteine^ 33ruber§ ^inbet (meine S3ruberfinber) ; my sister's house, meiner ec^raeftei* §aug; a stone's throw, cin @teinrauvf; my night's rest, meine 9'?ad)trul)e. 5. If the different cases neither complete the idea of a noun, nor that of a verb or adjective, they are called adverbial cases. a. The adverbial genitive is of very frequent occurrence, but generally idiomatically confined to certain phrases, as: ^cd)tCt §anb, to the right; meinC^ ^xadjtcn^f according to my opinion; ei* Wax j einC^ * gragen, however, is generally construed with an accusative of the person and a prepositional object (iiber, nad), tDegen). ?el)ren is generally construed with two accusatives, but the object denoting the person who is taught, is not unfrequantly found in the dative (Lessing, Gutzkow, Immer- mann). Tliis is always the case in the passive construction: 2Ji i V (not niirf)) mirb etmag gelcbrt, I am taught something (not id) tt>erbe etiva^ gekt)rt). In poetry, however the accusative is sometimes found in connection with the passive of tefjrcn, ns: 2)a8 fd)Itmmfte, njaS nn« tt)iberfdt)rt, \>a^ tvcvben wit t»om ^ag gc(et)rt (@ott)e). Some grammarians consider tlie dative after teljren to be faulty both in the active and in the passive. f No noim governs a mere dative or accusative. Such constructions as mtr ju ? i e b e (for the love of me) are elliptical, and the dative in these is an adverbial case (see No. 5, b). — 80 — 3 e i ct) e n $ ein ®d)mieb, he was a smith hy trade: gcl)e b c i n C 1 ^ e g e , go away (literally: walk of thy ways) ; um)evnct)tetcr 2)inge, without accomplishing anything (literally: of unperformed things )\ leic^ter 2Jcu^C, without trouble; be^ 2^ag$, by day; be$ D^ad)t$,* by night. b. The ADVERBIAL DATIVE occurs in two relations, 1) as possessive dative; 2) as dative of the interested person. a) The possessive dative takes the place of a possessive adjective or of the genitive (possessive case) of a noun or pronoun. It is used either in place of a possessive, or (rarely) along with it: 9)lit ftarbeu pod tapfere ®bt)ne, two brave f-ons of mine died, ^lyrtt fanf ha^ ^tx^, his heart failed. Sr, fecitt fctli ©liicf ;ierftort trar, he whose happiness was destroyed. 2)er @d)lag eiitftellte &citt ^nabeii ba§ ©efic^t, the blow disfigured the hoy's face. h) The dative of the interested person (mostly a personal pronoun ),. is generally redundant in English, and is used to show that the action has an interest of some kind for the mentioned person (in the dative): 3cf) im^m mtr eiii§ ber ©djluerter, I took out (for myself) one of the swords. (Sr erluavb ftd) l)o{)eu ^ut)m, he acquired (for himself) great glory. 3cl) lobe mittnein eigen §au^, I prefer my own house (literally: I praise to myself). 3)eu!e ^Xt, U)a§ er gefac^t ^at, imagine (for yourself) what he has said. Here belong these constructions: (S§ fd)eint itiir, it seems to me. 2)ie§ ift niit gu grog, this is too large for me. (S§ ift Mitt, al3 ob, I feel as if (see P. C. p 86). The dative mir (sometimes bir) is frequently used (redundantly) to express a general interest of the speaker in another person's act which is either commanded, advised or wished by him: ®e^e intt md)t gU tuett, do not go too far; the ntir implying that it would be unpleasant for the speaker if the r.ddressed person should go too far. 2)u mugt mir fobatb nic^t tt)ieberfommen, you must not come again very soon. This dative is called the ' ethical dative'. c. The ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE cxprcsscs a) the idea of space in con- nection with adverbs of space (especially the compounds with l^in and l)er with the prepositions auf, (xh, an, burd), iiber, untcr, see § 95), as: l)inauf or ^erauf, up; ^inab or ^erab, down; auf unb ah, up and down, to and fro. These adverbs are often connected with the verb, and the accusatiye of space is made dependent on the compound verb: (Urging ben53erg l)inauf, he went up the mountain. (Sr ritt bie®traJ3eii l)inburd), he rode through the streets (literally: he rode the streets through). 2Bir ful)ren b i e iS V ii cf e !)inuber, we drove * A very peculiar expression, 92ac^t being a feminine. Probably „be3 XagS" produced this inorganic form» — 81 — over the bridge*. — h. The accusative of time answers to the question ^how long?\ and stands either alone, or in connection with adverbs of time (lang, l)inburrf), uber): (S§ baucrte ^totx ajJinutcn (or gtuei SJiiuutcu tang), it lasted two minutes, ©r t)ieU ftc^ l)ier 3tt)et 2B d) e n iibcr auf, he staid here for two weeks. ^6) arbeitete c i n e ii 2R u a t l)inburd) an bem SSerfe, I was busy with this work during a moiithf . c. The accusative of measure, weight and value, completes these ideas by a noun expressing the units of measure, etc. with numerals, in answer to the questions: 'how heavy, how long, how much': (g§ trog ctitcit (^CTiiixct (c8 tvax cinctt ©cntnet ]d)tOtx), it weighed a hundred pounds. S)er SSeg tft l)ict SJlctlCtt iang, the road is four miles long. 2)a§ ^n6) foftet cittett ^X^aXct, the book costs a dollar. § 103. THE VOICES OF THE VERB. 1. ^Equivalents of the Passive: a) Reflexive verbs, many of which must be translated "by English passives: S)a6 Icritt ftift Ieid)t, that is easily learned. @r ivtt fld>, he is mistaken. §at fl^ betn §ut gefunben^has your hat been found ? b) Any reflexive verb in connection with laffen takes a passive mean- ing: 3)a^3 Id^t ficft tl)nn, that may be done. 2)cr geinb l^at ftcft fc^lagCtt laffcn, the enemy has been beaten, ^r ^t fid} in ber ®tabt fel^Ctt laffcit, he has been seen in the city. These passive-" reflexives are construed with the preposition t>Otl»like ordinary pass- ives (No. 2.): Sr l)at ft<^ t)on feinem greunbc iiberreben laffCtt, he has been persuaded by his friend. c) The active infinitive, (of transitive verbs) connected with laffen, in the meaning to cause something to he done has a passive force, and is likewise construed with t)On or bnrc^, like ordinary passives: (5r I'd^t etne iBriicfe Ibaucn, he causes a bridge to he huilt. dv licf^ btc §inberniffe burd^ bie ©olbaten (t)on ben ©olbaten) ^intvt^s rdumctt, he caused the obstacles to he removed by the soldiers. d) The active infinitive with gn after the verb fein has a passive mean- ing: 2)ie8 tft nid^t JJU gtaubCtt, that is not to he helieved (cannot be belie ved)» 2)aran tft nid)t JU ^eitf en, that cannot he thought of. * Instead of the accusative of space, the dative with the preposition gu is often used: dx ging g n m iB e r g e l)inanf ; mx fntjren g n r S3 r ii cf c ^tn= iibev. The accusative may also be replaced by the preposition contained in the adverb, placed before the noun in the proper case: Urging auf ben53erg; ritt burd) bie ©trapen; Wix fubren iiber bie ^riicfe. These 'difterent methods produce a slight ditference in the sense which generally cannot be expressed in English. t The accusative of time is also used in answer to the question * when ?' But this a'^cusative is found only in a few phrases, and instead of it the re- gidar form with prepositions (an or in) is mostly used. * When did he arrive ?' ^ m bvitten ^dxx (or b e n bvitten ^axp, (on) the third of March. 3d) fa^ x\}n ben nad^ften (more usually am nad)ften) 2^ag, I saw him next day. — 82 — e) The indefinite substantive pronoun man (§ 22.) is very frequently an equivalent of the passive voice, if the doers of the action are indefinite persons, or if it is not convenient to mention them : ^lan badjtc baran, bicje 2JJa§rcgeIn an^uue^men, it was considered to adopt these measures. Wtan mugte ben ^(an aufgeben, the plan had to be given up. Wtaii iiber^dufte it)n niit ^oramrfen, he was overwhelmed with reproaches. For the double form of the passive with jein and tnerben see P. C. 74:. TY. 2. Personal and Impersonal Passives: a) Only verbs governing an accusative as direct object form a complete passive voice, by changing the accusative into the nominative as passive subject. The active subject in the passive construction is introduced by the preposition Don (by), sometimes by burd) (b) ) : 2)er I^el^rer lobt ben ®d)uler, the teacher praises the pupil. Passive ; 2)er ©djiiler Wivb u o n bent l^e^rer getobt, the pupil is praised by the teacher. Verbs, governing the accusative as diitct object are called TRANSITIVE, and the passive voice formed from these is called the PERSONAL PASSIVE (having the transitive accusative as a subject). The existence of a personal passive is a certain evidence of the active verb being transitive, and of its governing the accusative. b) Verbs not transitive form an impersonal passive, if their idea ad- mits of a person as subject. The impersonal passive exicts only in the infinitive (the governing verb taking the impersonal form), and in the third person singular of all tenses. In its complete form it is introduced by e§ (it), which is left out if it does not begin the sentence. It is translated in various ways: Q^ tOUt^C iiber biefc Semevhmg gcladjt (or: iiber biefe S3emcrfung iDurbe getad)t), this remark was laughed at. §tcr barf ntd)t g c r a n d) t in e r b e n , smoking is not allowed here. ^^ mxb lun ^ntmort (^Cbctcit (or: Um 5lntn3ort n^irb gebeten), an answer is requested. 6§ ift btg gum ^benb gcf dmipft tt>orl>C1t, the battle lasted till evening. (S. § 79.) c) Verbs governing the genitive or dative form an impersonal passive only, in w hich the genitive or dative object remains unchanged, and generally is placed at the beginning of the passive phrase (without e§). Such impersonals may generally be translated by English ordinary passives: gS tvarb meiner Itic^t rael)r bcbutft (or meiner Waxh nid)t melir beburft), I was no longer needed. @§ tDurbe t^m nid)t geglaubt (i^m n)urbenid)t geglanbt), he was not believed. S)cm gerbl)errn tt)Ur&C gcfd)meid)e(t, the general was flattered, ^eittcitt greunbc tann nid)t ^e^olfen wcx^cn, your friend can not be helped. d) Neuter and intransitive verbs often take a reflexive form with the force of an impersonal passive (with or without laff en see No. 1): (5§ ftirbt (14) \djXr)tX mit bofem C^ettJtffen, people die hard with a bad conscience. g§ qcl)i fi^ f)ier gut, here is good walking. §ter — 83 - lagt fi^ nur mit 2)^ut)e fprcd^cn, it is difficult to speak here (one can speak here only with trouble). § 104. TENSES, INFINITIVES, PARTICIPLES. 1. The PRESENT tense has sometimes the force of a future, of a command or of the English present perfect: iBann fommft bit 5Urucf, when are you going to return ? '^\t @d)tt)ebeu riicfen moreen in bie geftuug, the Swedes will enter tlie fortress to-morrow. 3l)V fctltueigt, bi^ man eil(^ ft:acjt, he silent till you are asked. 2)u bleibft I)ier, you miost remain. 3d) uiarte fd^ou lange Ijier, I have waited here for a long time. 2. In lively narration the present is often used with the force of an imperfect, and the perfect with the force of a pluperfect. 51I§ bie§ gejc^a^, ftiirjt er au^ feinem iBerftecf \)tx\)ox, unb I) at feiuen ©egner balb iiber = iudltig t, when this happened, he rushed from his lurking place, and had soon overpowered his antagonist. 3. The IMPERFECT is, like the English past, the proper tense of the narrative. But in stating detached facts belonging to the past, the perfect is oftcner used than the imperfect: 3lm Dergangenen greitag ^ at ber ©enat bie ^crat^imgen iiber "ta^ giuau^geje^ beenbigt (or bcenbigte ber @enat), last Friday the Somite finished the deliberations on the finance-law. , 4. The PERFECT, aside from having the force of the English past tense is employed, like the English present perfect, to indicate past events the results or effects of which exist at the time of the speaker: ^avl 9iitter I) at burd) jeiue @eograpl)ic t?ou %\kn bie 3Bif}enfd)aft ber (Erbfuube gaii^lid^ iim> geftaltet, tJharles Ritter,by his Geography of Asia, has entirely revolutionized geographical science. 2)er 2)cgen I) a t htn ^aifer arm g e m a d) t , the sword has impoverished the emperor. 5. The FUTURE (first and second) is often used of probable events, re- ferring to the present or past time: ^r tt)tr b knten, ha^ bu md)t I)aff !om* men tDOden, he probably thinks that you did not wish to come. S)em ^ater tuirb (fd)on) bafiir gejorgt l)aben, your father has probably taken care for that. 6. The INFINITIVE of any verb, in connection with the neuter article, is used with the force of a noun, corresponding to English substantives or participials in ing: S)a^ @d)reten linb Xoben ber 9)?enge, the shouts (shouting) and raging(s) of the multitude. Such infinitives have no plurals, but are de- clined '(strong) in all cases of the singular. 7. The SUBJECT-INFINITIVE is used either with or without the preposi- tion jii: (Seine 9?eigungen beficgen ift fd^mer (or feine 9leigungen ;ju bcficgen ijl fd)n)er, or e§ ift fd)mer feinc DfJeigungen gn beftegen), it is difficult to conquer one's inclinations. 8. The OBJECT-INFINITIVE^ IS generally preceded by the preposition ^w, and is used after verbs, adjectives or nouns, frequently with the force of the English participial in ing with or without prepositions, and of other forms of expression: 3Sir fangen an, ben ^^(a^ ^ n r d n m e n , we commence to evacu- ate the place. 3Bir f ntjren fort j u j )) i e I e n , we continued playing. (5r luar unfdt)ig gu Jpredjen, he was unable to speak. 2)ie ®emoI)nl)eit gufammen — 84 — 3 u f c t n , the habit of being together. 2)cr getnb Der^lnbcrtc un§, xotxitt t) r ,^ It r il cf e U , the enemy prevented us from advancing any farther. ^6) glaubte, i(}n ^u toerftet)en, I believed I understood him. Sr tDiijjte fid) au§ ber iBerlegenl)eit g u g i e 1} e n, he knew how to extricate himself from the dilemma. 9. Pf-esent infinitives of the active voice with gu, in connection with the verb fein, have a passive meaning, generally with the idea of possibility: S)ic}e SKeinung i ft !aum gu t)ertl)etbiflen, this opinion can hardly he defended (is hardly defensible). 2)aran it) a V md)t gU bcitfeu, this was not to he thought of. 10. Infinitives with gu after the preposition um denote purpose, being rendered in order to: (5r ih,at bte^, 11 tU m tr gU fd^aben, he did this in order to hurt me. 11. The OBJECT-INFINITIVE IS uscd without gu a) after the modal auxil- iaries including laffeu: (Sr barf nid)t in bie ®tabt ! o m m e n , he is not allowed to come to the city: 3t)v itjerbet euren ^or(a^ nid)t burd)fiil}ren fonnen, you will not be able to carry out your purpose. (S§ maq f ein, tVXt iljX jagt, it may he as you say; b) after the verbs ^oren, fe^eu, f listen, fiuben, lerneiT, lel)rcu, l)eif3eib gel}en, fa^ren, Meiben, l)aben, ^elfcn, mad)en: 3c^ Ijbrc il)n ! m m e n , I hear him come, 3Sir fa^en bcii Xxupp f i d) langfam n d ^ e rn , we saw the troop slowly approaching. 5)ie 9^ot^ le^rtc i^n a r b e t* ten, necessity taught him to i^^orZ:. @et)t fd^tafeu! Go to bed (literally: to sleep. See P. C. p. 91.). c) The participle in the compound tenses of the modal auxiliaries and of the verbs laffeii, Ijetgen, mad)en, fe^en> l)elfen, prcn takes in these constructions the form of the present infinitive: ©r l)at nid)t totnmcu tv o U c u (instead of geiX)oIIt),he has not wished (did not wish) to come. 3l)r t)dttct frai)er auf^oren f o H e n (instead of gefoEt), you ought to have stopped sooner. 3c^ I)C4be \\)\\ fpre(^en p r e n (instead of ge^ort), I have heard him talk. See § 80, 9. 12. Those English verbs which require a substantive object along with an infinitive, generally admit a similar construction in German, as: ©r befall nttr gu fommen, he ordered me to come. (gr gtnangben geinb, bic SBaffeu gu ft V ed en , he compelled the enemy to lay down their arms. 2Bir Ijorten 3 e m a n b ( )) r e d) e n , we heard somebody talk. — But the verbs of WISHING, EXPECTING, BELIEVING, DECLARING, CONSIDERING do not admit this construction in German, generally requiring a clause with bag: (El* tDiinfd)tC, \ia% xoxx in ber ®tabt bleiben mbd)ten (not: er n)unfd)te un« in ber @tabt gn bleiben), he wished us to stay in the city. 3Bir glaubtcn, b a 6 crunfercr 2)^einnng f e t , we believed him to be of our opinion. 13. Instead of construing the passives of these verbs (of wishing, etc.) with infinitives, the German language generally employs an impersonal con- struction followed by bag: He ivas believed to be in danger, c § njurbe gegtaubt (man glanbte), bag cr in @efal)r f ei. 14. The English infinitives employed in indirect statements after in- terrogative adverbs or. pronouns, .and after so as, must be rendered by com- — 85 — plete sentences, so as, being translated by fo ha^: I was doubtful what to do, 3d) tuar in ^mijel, m a § gu tt)un f e i. — We were so near the battery as to be exposed to the guns, tt)tr waxcn bcr ^atterie f o no^e, t>a^ wiv ben ^anoneu au^g e| et^t iraren. 15. German participles are used in the following instances: a) With the force of adjectives, as: 3lnjiel)enbe Srjal^Iunc^cn, interesting tales, ^lad^ UoHbrad)ter Arbeit, after the labor had been accomplished (literally: after the accomplished labor). Here belongs the present participle preceded by gu, which is often called the future participle OF THE PASSIVE, and is rendered either by a passive infinitive, or by a relative clause with a passive verb: (Sine fpciter ^n beantujortcnbe gracje, a question to be answered at a later time. 2)ie(e ni^t JU nberfef)enbe il^aU \(XdjC, this fact which ought not to be overlooked. All these participles must be inflected like attributive adjectives, b) Participles are used (without inflection) if an action is represented as ACCOMPANYING the action expressed by the main verb, or as being closely connected with it, as: (gr ging fort, bie SBorte beS ilJJanneg iibcrbenlenb, he went away reflecting on the words of the man. But it is inadmissible thus to employ the participles of any auxiliary (modal or other). English parti- cipial constructions of this kind are generally changed into complete sen- tences: Having spoken thus he went away, nad)benierfogef!|)ro(^cn l^atte, ging er l)inmeg (not; jo gefprod)en it)abenb). English expressions with the auxiliary participle '^ew^', and many of those with 'having' that correspond to German verbs conjugated with fein (§ 69), may be generally rendered by the past participle of the main verb, as: 5Bon biefem 35ort)aben nnterric^tct, riiftete evfid) anf ben ^ampb ^^^^^ informed of this design, he prepared for the conflict. — 3n ber (£tabt angefommen, ertunbigte id^ mid) jogleid^ nad) t!^m, having arrived at the city, I immediately inquired for him. c) Past participles are used to complete the verb fommcn with the force of English present participles, and verbs of receiving with the force of a noun in apposition: ^r !am g el a n f e n (geritten, etc.), he came running (riding, etc.). 3ci) l)abe cS gefd)en!t betommen (er^arten), I received it as apresent. Sometimes past participles (even in connection with reflexive pronouns) are used with the force of imperatives: 3(ufgcpaJ3t ! pay attention ! ')Sl\XX \ i d) brat) g e it) e ^ r t , only defend yourselves bravely ! 16. Aside from these instances, English participial constructions can generally not be expressed by means of German participles. The most usual German equivalents of English participial expressions are: a) infinitives, either in the form of substantives (No. 6), or preceded by gu; b) complete CLAUSES introduced by bag, inben!,ba, nad)bem; c) finite verbs connected with the preceding sentence by means of the conjunction unb. Clauses with bag, and infinitives with gu are mostly used to render those participial constructions in which a participle in ing is preceded by a prepos- ition. In these constructions the English preposition is regularly expressed by a prepositional adverb compounded with ba (§ 95, 2): By giving this advice. b ab ur d^ , b cr g cr (man, xd^, etc.) btefen fftatlf gab (gtebt, etc.) [literally: 5y this that he gave]. Be insisted vpon seeing him, er beftanb barauf i^n gll fe^en (literally: wjoon ^Ais to see him). Examples: By ieacldng others^ we instruct ourselves, burci) hd^ ?ei}ren 5(nbrer untcrridjten wir m\^ felbft (or b a b u r d) , b a \\ tuir 5lubere Iet)i-en, or illbem tDir "^nbere Iet)ren). — 1 exjjoctcd no reward /or c?e//i'm;?^ iiim from this condition, id) cnuartcte leinen Jo^n b a f ii r , \io.^ id) i()u au§ biefer ?age rettete (or gerettct ^attc, or rctten tuiirbe, according to the connection) — I oc- cupied myself ?r?erl)anbhntgen. — I could not lend him those books, needing them for my own use, id) fonnte it)m biefe iBiid^er nid)t leil)en, "ba ( i nb em ) id) tl)rer gnm eigenen @ebraud)e bebnrfte. — Knowing that I would have your assistance, I engnged in the work, \i a id) muOte,* 'bCi^ id) 3l)ven S3eiftanb l)aben triirbe, ubernat)m id) bie 2(rbeit. — I told him all this, adding that he wa^ @e|"e^ nid)t beftdttgen ti) e r b e, it was expected that the President would not confirm the hiw. 2)ie iBenievtmig, baJ3 ev betl Srief nie gefe()eu ^ b e , tuai* untt)al)r, the remark that he had never seen the letter was untrue. 4. The subjunctive is used, in clauses introduced by ha^, if the action is represented as necessary, expedient or desirable: d^ tft erforbcrltd), ba^ bie^ g e f d) e I) c , it is necessary that this should he done, d^ ift unfer Sntereffe, hai bte^ @efe^ gednbcrt m C r b e , it is our interest that this law should be changed. If such and similar sentences contain a fact that has actually happened, the indicative must be used even if in English the potential should for a virtuous son, to honor the grey hair of your head. 2)iefer iBor* fd)lag njurbe uermorfen, ha er mit bem 3$ort^eiIe ber ©tabt iinDereinbar f ei, this proposition was rejected since it vms held that it was incompatible with the interest of the city. 5. The conjunction bag mny be omitted, which is almost alwa)^s the case in long quotations. Sentences in which the conjunction ha^ is thus understood are arranijed in the common order (§ 106. 5. 8 ). Gr bef)ailp* tcte, ber S3rief f e i i I) m nie eingc^diibigt trorbeu, he asserted (that) the letter had never been handed to him. 6. As to the TENSES of the subjunctive, a distinction must be made ■whether the principal verb is in a past tense or not. If the principal verb is in a past tense, three ca.ses must be distinguished: a J if the stated action has happened at the time of the statement, the present or imperfect is used. 'J'he imperfect is always used if in the plur.\l of tlie present the subjunctive could not be distinguished from the indicative. (Sv fagte, ha^ feine (^o^nc nod) in ^Berlin feien (or mdren), but: er fagte, ba^ feine @ol)ne fid) in ^erftn be* fdnben (not bcfinbeil), he said that his sons ivere in Berlin. b) If the stated action has happened before the statement, the perfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive is used: (gr fagte, b'ag er bein 53nd) bor gmet Sal)ren »erIoren 1^ a b e or 1^ d 1 1 e , he said tUat he had lost your book two years ago. c) If the stated action had not yet happened at the, time of the statement, either the future subjunctive or the conditional is used in the clause; dx l)Offte, ha^ bn feinem Sunjc^e geniigcn n? e r b e ft or tt) ii v b e ft , he hoped that you would aatisfy his wish. See Pr. C. p. 65. If the principal verb is in a present tense, the subjunctive of the clause is m the present if the stated action is coincident with the time of the prin- cipal verb: (Sr njdl)Ut, bag bu abiuefenb jeieft, he supposes that you are absent. If the stated action has happened before the time of the principal verb, the subjunctive is in the perfect: (2r be^an)3tet, ba^ bn ben 53rief er* 1^ a (t en I) a be ft , he asserts that you received the letter. If the stated fiction lies in the future, the subjunctive is generally not used. After verbs of wish- ing the subjunctive present of mbgen (Utoge) is employed. — 89 — be emplo3^ed: I regret that this should have happened, xdj hehaVLVt, ba^ fl6) bte§ ereigiiet t)at (not ^abe or ^aben foUte). The tense of this subjunctive generally agrees with the tense of the principal verb. 5. The subjunctive is required after the conjunctions bamit (or ba§ if it has the meaning 'm order that ), (x\^ ob (as if), al^ \ia^, if preceded by adjec- tives with ^\i (too). See §90, 7. 2r elite nad) bem "^iai^t, bamit i^m DfJiemanb i u= u r ! m m e (or gutjorfdme, or jnuorfommen !oune), he hastened to the place in ordiT that nobody might anticipate him. ©r iDar git eifrig, a l§ hd,^ er bie Uiiterbrec^un'g bemerft I) d 1 1 e (or l)dtte bemerteu foflen), he was too zealous to notice the interruption (literally: than that he should have noticed the interruption). 2)amtt has its subjunctive in the present or imperfect; the subjunctive after al^ ob is treated according to the rules of the indirect subjunctive (No. 3), and aU ta^ generally requires the imperfect if the principal verb is a present, and the pluperfect if it is a past. 6. The subjunctive (imperfect or pluperfect) is used (optionally with the indicative) in relative clauses if the principal sentence contains a nega- tion which is restricted by the relative clause: 3d) !enne 9^iiemanben, ber bie§ D e V f U d) t I) d tt e (or l)at), I do not know anybody that tri£d this. (Sr t)at 9^id)t^ ermittein tonnen, wa^ beineu 5(nfpriid)en e ii t g e g e u ft dn b e (or eut= gec|euftet)t), he could not ascertain anything contrary to thy claims (that might be opposed to thy claims). 7. The subjunctive (optionally with the indicative) is used after general concessive clauses, introduced by ttjag aud), iuer and), tDO aud), etc. (See § 90, 10). 8. The subjunctive (in the same tenses as required by the indirecc subjunctive No. 3) is used in connection with benu in the meaning unless. (See § 90, 9). 9. Conditional sentences corresponding to reality require the indicative: If this BE so, menn bie^ fo ift (not fei)» But hypothetical sentences (that is those which do not correspond to reality) require the following construction: a) The conditional clause (introduced by n^enu, i/J has its verb in the subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect.* b) The principal sentence has its verb either in the conditional (which is more usual), or in the imperfect or pluperfect of the main verb or of a modal auxiliary (foniien, biivfen, miiffeit, etc.). See Pr. C. p. 65. 2Beun ev fo I) a u b e 1 1 e (or ^aubeln woUtt), m ii r b e er angefe^euer fein (or iDdre er angefe()cuer), if he would act thus, he should be more respected. 2)ie^ b ii r f t e (miirbe) fid) md)t ereignet ^aben, it)cmt bu ^ier gemefen it) d r e ft , this would not have happened if you had been here. For the omission of tt)cnn see l\ C. p. 102. 10. The conditional clause is frequently replaced by single words (fonjl, haib, beinal)e, etc.), by phrases or infinitives, and sometimes entirely under- * Some writers use here often the conditional. But it is conbidered faulty. — 90 — stood: 2)icfc ^reifc tv'dxm fonft fiir iDoWett gcljalten tDorbcn, these prices would have h^i^.n formerly considered cheap (i. e, if we lived in former times). 3d) tuare b e i n a I) e gefaUen, 1 7iearhj. had fa len (L e] if I had not been f ivored by fortune or accident). Ueber ben ^oqug eiiie^ biefer SDHimer g u ft r e i t c n, It) are imangemeffen, to dispute on the preference of either of these men u'Ofdd be inexpedient (^i. e. if we would dispute). ®ute ©eifter tDlirbe id) Ueben, ffood i^hosts I would love (i, e. the ghosts if they were good). S)U f U t e ft 3ioimermanu it)erben, you should turn a carpenter (L e, if you were wise). § 106. ORDER OF WORDS. 1. Order of Attributes. Adjectives are generally placed before their nouns, even if they are accompanied by adjuncts: (Sin mit grower 2}^ut)e er- rungener 'Sieg, a viotory obtained with great difficulty. Genitives are placed either before or after their nouns; in the former instance the governing noun drops its article: Tleim^ i8ruber§ ^inb, or ba^ ^inb meine^ ^rubers. 2. Adje(^tives have their adjuncts generally before them: 2)er 3Jlann ift be§ §affc§ Uiiirbtg, the man is worthy of hatred. 3. Among the adjuncts of verbs the personal pronouns stand first, then follow the case-objects, and last the adverbial adjuncts. 4. The verb is placed differently according to the three orders of ar- rangement: a) common order; b) inverted order; c) dependent order. 5. The common order takes place if the sentence is not introduced by a subordinating conjunction (§ 90.) or a relative, and begins with the sub- ject or its attributes. 6. The inverted order takes place if the verb or one of its adjuncts opens the sentence, which is the case in direct questions and for the sake of emphasis. 7. The dependent order takes place in sentences introduced by rela- tive adjectives or adverbs, by subordinating conjunctions, and in indirect questions. Seethe foot-note (No. 2.) on pige 87. 8. In the common order the finite verb (auxiliary, or simple tense of the verb) stands immediately after the subject and its adjuncts, and the infini- tives and participles occupy the last place, so that all adjuncts of the verb stand between the finite verb and the infinitive or participle. If the finite verb is a separable compound the prefix stands at the end of the sentence. But infinitives with ^nmay follow the prefix of the finite verb: ©rojse iBegeben^eiten ereignen fid) oft unerwartet. S)er iBerbred)er ift au^ bem ©efdngnig entjprnngen. S)ie ®onne gcl)t urn fec^^ lU)r anf. S)ie '^onne ift nm ad)t U^v untergegangen. Sr fdngt on fid) ju fiii'd)ten, or: ei* fdngt fid) gn fiirc^ten an. 9. In the inverted order tlie finite verb is placed before the subject and its adjuncts, the arrangement being in all other respects the same as in the common order. — 91 — Oft ereignen pft) grogc 58egcbenl)etten uncrmartct. ^^ i ft e i u 35 e r b r e d) e u au^ bem (^^efangntg eutfprungen. Uiii fed)« Ul)r g e I) t b i e @ o ii n e auf . Urn ad) t Ut)r tft hie (Sonne nntergcgangcn. g a n g t e r an fid) gu f urd)ten ? 10. In the dependent order the finite verb is placed after all other ■words of the sentence. SS c i ( groye ^cgeben^eiten fid^ oft nnermartet ereignen. 2)er ^evbred)er, b c r au^3 bem (^efdngniffe entjprungen t ft. ©^ ift grut)(ing ober §erbft, \v e n n bie ®onne um jed)§ Ut)r a n f g el^ t. (Sr ^at mid) gefragt, tu a nn bu gnrii(ftel)ren nj i r ft? Exceptions: a) The auxiliary in the dependent order is frequently omitted : 9^ad)bem er bic§ met)rfad) njieber^ott (tiattt), nat)m er 5(bfd)ieb. b) Those verbs whose participles take the form of an infinitive, have their auxiliaries before the object-infinitive (without gn): 2)a er unfern 3?orfd)(ag nid^t I) a t anne^men tooUtn, fmb voxx nn* oerric^tetei* ©ac^e fortgegangen. 92 — List of Strong Yerbs. REMARKS. 1. Forms in ordinary type are those alone in nse. 2. Forms in full faced type indicate that weak forms are also found, but that the strong form is preferable. 3. Forms in parenthesis are less usual than the weak or the regular strong forms. 4. Forms in Roman characters are only poetical. 5. No compounds are given. Verbs foimd in composition only, are given under the first letter of the root, with a hyphen prefixed to it. 7^" The irregular weak verbs are appended in a separate list. Infinitive. Present Indie- Imper- Imperfeet ative Sing. alive. Indicative. badfen, bake bcicfft, bcicft buf »bd'ren (^bierft, =biert) -bar Only gebdren, bear (bring forth). beifeen, bite bi§ bergen, hide birgft, birgt birg barg berften, burst (birfleft,birft) (birft) bavfl (borft) beugst,beugt bog beutst, beut beut hot banb bat blafeft, btafet blieg Mieb bli« As transitive only of weak conjugation. braten, roast bratft, Wdi (bvtct) bred)cn, break bvi(^ft, brid}t bric^ brad) 'bei^en -Me^ Only gcbetl)en, thrive, ^berben =btrbft,-birbt -birb ^barb Only Uerberben, perish, spoil. As transitive (spoil, destroy), weak biegen, bend bieten, offer binben, bind bitten, beg blafen, blow bleiben, sttiy bleid)en, bleach Imperfect Past Sahjumtive . ParticipU, Bute gebacfcn -bore *boren biffe gebiffcn bdrge geborgeu (biirge) (bdrfte) geborflen borfte bbgc gebogeu. bi3te geboten bdnbe gebunben bate gebeteu bdefe geblafeu blicbe geblicbeu m^t geblid)en (briete) gebraten brdd)e gebrod)en -bie^e >bte^en (::bdrbe) ^borben =burbe or STRONG, 93 Infinitive, bingen, engage brefc^en, thrash brifcl)jt, bri)(t)t ^v^^briegen -dreussest -dreusst Only tjcrbriegen, vex. bringen, urge "-effcn, eat iffeft, i§t fal)ren, drive fallen, fall fatten, fold Present Indie- Imper- Imperfed Imperfect Past alive Sing, ative. Indicative. Subjunctive. Participle. bang (biinge) gebungen (bung) brifd^ brafc^ brd|cf)e gebrojc^en (brofcf)) brojct)e ^brog ^broffe ^broffeti fat)rft, fci^rt fut)r fdlift, fdUt fie( WEAK brang brange gebntngen ig q6 age gegeffen fnl)rc gefal}ren fiek gefallen WEAK Jjcfttltcn (in- transitive) "^fangen, catch fdngft, fdngt fing (ficng) finge gefangen Thus anfangen, l)egin; empfangen, receive and other compounds. fed)ten, fight (fiditeft), ft^t ft(ftt fod|t forf)te gefodjten .fcl)(cu 4ief)Ift,=ne^lt 4^^ -fa^t (=fdt)k) .fo^)fen Thus befel)Ien, command; empfet)ten, recommend, and several further compounds of these, ge^len, fail, is weak. "^--pnben, find fanb fdnbe gefunben fterf)ten, hraid flitfetjt, flirit flit^t ftod}t ftod)te fieflori)ten -fleigen .,•••• =ftt5 =Me ^fliffen Only befteigen, take pain?, flicgen, fly fleugst,fleugt fleug flog ffbgc gcftogen fiiet)en, flee fleuchst, flench ftol) flii^e geflot)en flench t fliegen, flow fleussest, fleuss ffog floffe geftoffen fleusst fragcn,:)sk (frdgft, friigt) (frug) (fruge) (f^tagen is better conjugated weak throughout.) freffcn, eat (of friffeft, frigt frig frog frdgc beasts) frteren, freeze gd^ren, ferment or gdren gcben, give f ror f rorc ..... 9oit(0or) 0bjrc (gore) giebft (gibft) gieb(gib) gob gdbe giebt (gibt) ge()en, go ...... ging ginge (gieng) (gienge) gotten, be valued gittft, gilt gilt golt golte (gd(tc) gcfreffen gefroren gcgoftrcn (ge* goren) gegeben gegongen gegoUcn — 94 -- Infinitive. Present Indie -Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past alive Sing. ative. Indicative. Subjunctivt . Participle- -geffen -giffeft, =giet -gi6 .ga6 .gd6e 'Qeffeu Only uergcffen, forget. giegen, pour geussest, geusst geuss gog 9offc gegoffen »ginnen *gann *gannc »gbnne -gonnen Only begtnnen, begin. gleic^en, resemble 0lid| Bli*c Bcgliftcit gleiten, glide %m glitte Bcglitten glimmen, gleam glomm glbmmc gcglommen graben, dig grdbft, grabt grub grube gegraben greifen, seize griff Sriffe gegriffen l^alten, hold I)dttft, l)dtt !)ielt ^telte gebolten t)angen, pngen, IjQugft, l^dngl ^ing I)inge ge^angcn hang (in trans.) (^ieng) (l)ienge) The transitive pngen, hang, generally conjugates weak. l^aucn, beat $tc6 l^tcbe gel}aueit I}eben, raise l)ob (^ub) l^obe (^iibe) geljoben l)ciJ3en, call, be ^ieg ftteBe geljeigen called I)etfen, help m\^r mt ^iif ^atf ]^mfe(plfe) qeljolfen feifen, chide («ff) (!tffc) (getiffen) :=tiejen or 4iiren »for .fore =!oren Only erfieje n or crfiircn, single out. Ilimmen, climb flomm flbmrne geflommen Ilingeu, sound !fang fldnge gethingen fneifen, tnetpcn, Imff,fm^p fniffe, gcfniffen, ge= pinch fnippe tntppen tommeit, come (!ommfl, fommt) fam !dme gefommen tried)en, creep kreuchst, kreucht kreuch lxo6) h:ocf)c gcfro(i)cn laben, load Itttjft, Ittbt Ittb liitie gelaben laffen, let Idffeft, tdgt lieg liefec gelaffen laufeu, run Idufft, Iduft lief Uefc gelaiifen leiben, suffer Utt litte gelitten Ieit)en, lend lie^ Iiel)c gdtel}en lefen, read Uefeft, Ueft ae« laS Idfe gctefen liegcn, lie (down) lag Idgc gelegen 4ieren ^lor -lore 4oren Only tjerlieren, lose. 4ingen 4ang *tdnge •lungcn Only gctingcn, succeed, and tntgUngen, fail. — 95 — Tnfinitivt. Present Tndic- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past ative Sing, ative. Inclicative. Subjunctive. Participle, Iofdf)cn, extinguish lift^efl, lifi^t lifdj lofi^ Ibf^c ^clofc^en In transitive meanings always weak; in intransitive nearly always strong. (ugett, lie (tell a lie) mal)len, grind nieiben, shun melteu, milk nteffen, measure nc{)men, take leugst, leugt leug (og logc gelogen WEAK mteb (milffl, tnitft) (mot!) miffeft, rnigt mig mag ntmmft, nimm nal)m nimmt -na8 Only gcncfcn, recover one's health. -nicgcn -neusscst, -neuss :=no§ -neusst Only genie J3en, eat, enjoy. WEAK gemal)len nttebe gemieben (motfe) Oemolfen ntagc gemeffen nal)mc genommen =neen *noffc ^nefen «=noffen pfeifen, whistle PPff ^ftffe gepfiffen pflegen, cherish (Pftog) (pfloge) (gepflogen) In some phrases the strong forms are more i usual than the weak one pftegen, be wont, conjugates weak only. preifen, praise pries priefe gepriefen qnetten, gush quittft, quint • quill quott quottc gequottcn, forth (swollen) quetten, make swell, conjugates WEAK. rad^cn, revenge roch rcjche fiCtO^Ctt • V^rat^cn, advise ^reiben, rub tatlfl, tdt^ xm rict^e gerat^en rieb riebe gerieben reifeen, tear n6 riffe geriffen reiten, ride ritt ritte gerittcn riec^en, smell reuchst, reucht reuch xo^ rod)c geroc^cn ringen, wrestle rang range (riinge) gerungen rinnen, run (flow) rann ronne geronnen (rdnne) rnfen, call tief tiefe gerufen jdjen, salt WEAK WEAK pcfalgctt janfen, drink fauf^fduft toff \m gefoffeu (of beastsand drunkards) laugen, suck fog fbge gcfogen ifhriffen, create fcl)uf fdliife gejdiaffen 1 l^affen in t)crfcf)affcn, procure, and in the meaninK 'work' is wbak. I' fd Icn, isound f4oa fdlbEe gcfi^oflett — 96 — Infinitive. Present Indie- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past alive Sing, ' aiive. Indicative. Subjunctive. Participle. =fd)ief)t Only gcfdje^en, happen. fd^ciben, part, sever fd^ieb fci)iebc gcfd)tebcn fcl)einen, seem fd)ien jd^ienc gefc^ienen fd)elten, scold fdjiltft, fc^itt fijilt \6)oXt fd)b(te gefdioltcn (fd)oIt) (fd)a(te) fci)eren, shear (f(i)ierfl, (fti)ici*) fi^or Miirc gef^otctt jc^iert) fcf)ipben, shove fd^ob fcI)obe gcfd^oben fdiiegyx, shoot fci^og fc^offc gc]'d)offen fd)inbcn, flay fd)anb jd)unbe gejd}unben (fd)unb) (fd)anbe) fd)rQfeu, sleep Wlaffl, fd^taft jc^Iief fd}(iefe gefd)tafcu fd)lagen, strike jd)fdgft,fd)ldgt id)tug fc^liige gefc^lagcn ratf)fc^lagctt, deliberate, conjugates weak. fd)Ieid)en, slink fd^tid) S&i{\&\t gefd)tid^en [d)teifen, whet jd^liff jdiUffe gef^Uffen In some senses it conjugates weak. fd)Iei§en, slit ft^Hft fi^liffc geWiffen fd)tie6en, shut schleussest, schleuss jd^Iog jd^Ioffc gcfd)(offen schleusst fd)Ungen, sling fd&lang fd)tange gefd)lungen (fd)lunge) fdimeigcn, throw fdimig fd)mif|e gcfd)miffeu i^meljen, melt frj^miljcfl, fr^miJj itftmoli jr^miiljc gefr^moljcn Usually WEAK in transitive meaning. fd)nauben, pant fcftnoB fi^itoBc gefil^noBcn fd)neiben, cut fd)nitt jc^iutte gejd)iutten id)rauben, screw fd^rob f(^ri)bc gcfd)tobcn 4d)rcc!en, be -|d)ridfl, ^jd)vide =fd)raf -^d)rd!e ^id)rocfeii terrified ^fc^ridt (^d)rarf) (-jdjrarfc) Only in compounds (crfd^rcdfcn, au jfc^rcden, etc.). In transitive meaning weak. fd)rciben, write fd^rieb fd)nebe gcfd)rieben jd)reien, cry jd^ric \6)x\tt gcjd)viecn jd^retten, stride jdjrttt fdjrtttc gefd)ntten fc^roten, prind schriet geff^rotett id)iDdrcn, ulcerate (fd)tt)ierfl, |d)tt)or fd)morc gefcftrooreu (d)n)iert) (fdjmur) (|d)H)iii*e) fc^ttjcigcn, be silent |d)Wteg jc^iuicgc gcfd^luicgcu 91 Infinitwt. Present Indie- Imper- Iviperfed Imperfect Past ative Sing, alive. Indicative, Subjunctive, Participle, fditDcHcn, swell fdimiUft, fd^mill fd^hjott jdjtDoUc gefc^wollen In transitive meanings weak. fd)ii>immen, swim fdittjanim ()d)roomm) fd)tDtnben, vanish jd)lt)anb fd^mingcn, swing fd^mang fd)tt)oren, swear : fd)tt)or or fd)it>ur fel)en, see f\c\)% fie^t fie^ fa^ jein, be bin, bift, ifl jet tt)ax fieben, boil fott fmgen, sing fang (sung) ftnfcn, sink fanf(sunk) ^ fmnen, meditate fonn fi^en, sit fa6 jpalten, split weak i^eien, spit • fjiic jpinnen, spin jpamt fpleigen, slit f|jli§ fpred)en, speak fprid^ft,f^nd)t fprid^ fprad^ f^riejjen, sprout spreussest, spreuss jprog spreusst fpringen, spring fprang fted)en, prick ftid)ftjtid)t ftid) ftad) ftecfen, stick (fticfft, ftidt) (fticf) ftaf (ftacf) flet)en, stand ftaub (ftunb) ftc^Ien, steal pie^ift, ftie^U ftie^t ftal)t (fteftle) fteigen, step up fticg ftevbcn, die ftirbft, ftirbt ftiib ftavb ftieben, disperse * Ilob ftinfen, stink ftanf ftogen, thrust ftofeefl, ftbfet ftieg n-.;4,*„^ stroke fivid^ fd^ttjommc geid)n)ommen (jd)mdmme) fdjWiinbe gejd)n3unbcn (fcftmcinbe) fd)tt)unge gefditrnngcn (id)n)dnge) jc^morc 01 gefd^worcn fdiroiirc fal)e gefeljen tv'dxt gcnjcfen mtc gefotten fangc gefungen (sunge) fantc(fun!c)gefunfcn fonne gefonncn O'dnne) fafie gefcffen WEAK gcflioUeii fliicc geftiieen fponne gefponncn (fpdnnc) \mt fiefjiliffctt fprdd)e gefprod)cn fproffc gefproffen fprdngc gefprungen ftdd)e geftod^en fIttfcCftddtc; ftiinbc or gcftanbcn ftdnbe ftot)Ie gefloI)lcn mm fticgc gcfiiegcn ftiirbc gcftoibcn (ftdrbc) ftobc gcflobcn fldnfc geflunfen (ftiinfc) ftiegc gcftofeen flridjc gcflridjen — 98 — Infinitive. flrciten, struggle t^un, do tragen, carry treffen, hit treiben, drive treten, step triefen.- drip trinfen, drink trugen, deceive Present Indie- Imper- Imperfect Imperfect Past aiive Sing, ative. Indicative, Subjunctive. Participle, ftritt ftrittc geftrittcn tragft, trdgt trug triffft, trifft triff trof trieb trittft, tritt tritt trat treufst, treuft treuf iroff trant treug trog treugst, treiigt I, toac^ft n)U(f)3 tpog tl)dte get^an triige getragen trdfc getroffcn triebe getviebcn trdte getretcn trbffc (getroffcn) trdufe getruntcn (truntc) troge getrogen n)U(^fe gen)ad)fcn mbgc geiuogen n)ad)fen, grow iDdgen, tt>iegen, weigh iDdgen has transitive meaning and is conjugated either strong or weak. wafdjen, wash tt)dfd)cfl, toufd^ tt)ufd)e gcmajt^en todfc^t njeben, weave toob toobe gelooben *tt>egen ^rtjog *tt)oge ^mogen Only betDcgen, move, which in some senses is conjugated strong, in others weak. tt>ei(^en, yield hjid) tt)td)c gett)td)cn tt)cifen, show njte§ njiejc gemiejen ipcrben, woo tt)trbfl, tt)irbt n)irb njarb rourbc gettjorben ( tt)d vbc) tt)erben, become koirfl, to'nb marb or njurbe njiivbc getDorbcn roerfeu, throw h)irffi, n)irft iuirf h)arf njiirfc (njdrfe) geiDorfen iDtnben, wind hjanb h)dnbc gettjunbcn ^njiunen *tt)ann -mdnnc >tt)oitnen Only geminncn, win. gcil^cn, accuse Sie^ gie^c gqtc^cn gie^cn, draw zeuchst, zeucht zeuch gog hm gejogen smingcn, force gmang smdngc gcjmungcn i — 99 — Irregular Weak Verbs. Infinitive. Pres, Ind. Sing. Imperf. Imperf. Past Participle. Indicative . Subjunctive brcrtnen, bum reg. brannte bvenntc gebrannt brm(ieil, bring reg. brad)tc brad)te gebrad^t bau(i)ten (impers.) e8 'i>m^i e« bdud^tc eg bdurf)te gebdud)t think benten, think reg. bac^tc badjtc gebad^t biirfen, be allowed barf, barfft, barf burftc burftc geburft (biirfen) ^abcn, have ^aft, ^at ^attc ^dttc gel)abt tcnnen, know reg. lanntc !enntc (fdnnte) getannt fonnen, be able !ann, lannft, !ann fonntc fijnnte gcfonnt (fonncn) moqen, like mag, magft, mag mod)tc modjtt gemoc^t (mogcn) miiffen, be obliged mug, mugt, mug mu6te miigte gemngt (miifjen) neunen, call reg. nanntc nenntc (ndnnte) genannt jcnben, send reg. fanbtc (fenbete) fenbete gefanbt or gefenbet foUeit, be obliged foU, follf!, foU reg. reg. gefottt (jotten) ttjenbcn, turn reg. hjanbtc tuenbetc genjanbt or gctDen- (menbetc) bet njtffcn, know hjcig, tuctgt^njcig umfetc njiietc gettjugt (tt)tffen) iPoUcn, be willing tt)iU, tuiUft, toitt tuoUtc woUtc gewoUt (tt)oUen) — 100 INDEX. 4^- The Roman figures refer io the Courses, I, denoting the Practical, II, the Theoretical Course. The English figures refer to the pages. 21, pronunciation I, 2; a changed in- to a in strong verbs I, 90. See vowels. a h , prepos., used only in compounds II, 71. abcr, place of I, 97; coord, con- junction II, 65; difference from jonbern I, 72; II, 65; difference from allein II, 65. accentuation I, 7; on which syllable the accent is placed I, 7; in compound words, ib,; in com- pound verbs II, 60. accusative, answers to the objec- tive case without preposition II, 3; case of the direct object I, 15; II, 78; when it has the same form as the nominative I, 15; ace. singular of adjective pronouns formed bv the ending en I. 15; dropping ot the c in the ending I, 15; ace. of per- sonal pronouns precedes the dative I, 54; verbs with two accusatives II, 79; no noun governs an accus- ative II, 79; accusative of space II, 80; ace. of time, measure, weight, and value II, 81; verbs that govern the objective in English may gen- erally be rendered by verbs govern- ing the accusative II, 78. a6)t X g c , a week I, 60. adjectives II, 13; adjectives and adj. pronouns agree in gender with thi ir nouns I, 13; II, 13. 75; pre- dicative adj. not declined I, 39; II, 13; weak declension of adj. I, 39; II, 14; II, 27. 28; weak and strong declension of adj. I, 40; II, 14; strong declension of adj. 1,41; II, 14. 28 29; adj. used as adverbs I, 72; II, 68. 69; adj. generally pre- ceded by their adjuncts I, 53; placed before their governing nouns together with their adjuncts I, 105; when their nouns are understood II, 13; placed after their nouns, they do not agree with them II, 75; indeclinable adj. II, 75; absolute adi. denoting persons are placed in the masculine gender, denot- ing things in the neuter gender II, 77; what pronominal adjec- tives may be used absolutely II, 77; inflection of absolute adjec- tives II, 77; adj. governing the genitive II, 79; adj. governing tlie dative mostly correspond trt English adj. with to or for II, 79; adj. generally not construed with the accusative II, 79. — 101 adverbs, how formed I, 72; II, 68. 69; their force and function in the sentence II, 68; derived from adjectives II, 68; comparison of adv. II, 69. 74; pronominal adv. II, 70 foil. after, conjunction, translated by nac^bem I, 81. agreement, II, 75 foil. all, when translated by gan^ II, 22. a n e l It , coordinating conjunction II, 65; difiference from abcr II, 65. all cr, declined I, 32; II, 21; alleS, used of persons II, 21. 77. aWt^t it, indefinite adverb, II, 72. al^, when, I, 47; I, 74; subordinat- ing conjunction II , 65 ; al§, as II, 66; ol§, than II, 66; it requires the verb to be at the end I, 76; aU ob II, 65; stands with the subjunctive II, 89; ob omitted in aU ob II, 66; al^ omitted II, 66; aU, distin- guished from njte II, 66; al^ hci% idiomatically used after jit II, 66; requires the subjunctive in this connection II, 89. although, how translated I, 102. a n , preposition, when it governs the accusative, and when the dative I, 93; II, 62. a n b e r , declines strong or weak I, 48; II, 23. a n ft a 1 1 , preposition with gen. II. 61. any, when not translated II, 20. apod OS is and protasis, I, 59; IL 67. J apposition, nouns in app., how |: they agree II, 75. P b a t b , adverb, compared II, 74. S3ar, declined II, 5. S3 C b i C n t e , difference from 2)tcncr and ^nec^t I, 76. before, conjunction, translated by c^c or betjor I, 81. a r g C r tl , personal and impersonal use of the verb I, 87. arrangement of sentences, op- en ed by objects, adverbs or preposi- tions I, 72; arr. of clauses in which the participles of modal auxiliaries have the form of infinitives 1, 108; arr. of sentences which have com- pound verbs as predicates II, 60. See order of words. article, repetition of I, 9, 15; de- finite art. I, 9. 14. 19; 11, 3; inde- finite art. I, 10. 15. 18. 20; II, 3; different usage of articles in German and English II, 74. 75. as, how translated I, 13; II, 66. at before nouns of places, how rendered I, 29. aud) in connection with interrog- atives idiomatically used in a con- cessive sense II, 67; subjunctive in such clauses II, 89. augment, when used in the past participle I, 71; II, 53; augment of compound verbs II, 60. a U 8 , preposition governing the da- tive II, 61. aVL^tX, preposition with the dative II, 61; augerroenn, used as conjunc- tion, except if, unless II, 67. au§crl)alb, preposition with the genitive II, 61 auxiliaries of the compound tenses I, 99; II, 38; verbs with the auxiliary Jetn II, 39; njcrben as aux.II, 39; 1,74. 77. 80. B. bci, preposition with dative I, 24; II, 61. 62. b e t b e d and b e i b e distinguished II, 26. bctrubcn, fid), used personally, and impersonally I, 87. 102 — b C t) r , subordinating conjunction II. 65. b in n c n , preposition with dative II, 61. bis, till, prepositional adverb I, 60; in connection with prepositions, II, 62; how translated and construed I, 94; II, 62; subordinating con- junction II, 65. btSttJCilcn, sometimes, indefinite ad- verb II, 73. b I e i b e n, construed with a predicate- nominative II, 78; conjugated with| fein I, 99. e« bU^t, I, 86. both, liow rendered II, 26 b r e n n c n , imperfect of I, 58; II, 35; j subjunctive imperfect I, 62; II, 35. b r i n 9 e n, imperfect of I, 58; II, 35; I subjunctive imperfect I, 62; II, 35,] but, when translated by fonbern I I, 72. by, preposition, bow translated I, j 21. 74. 94. d, consonant, used only in foreign words I, 4. cases, theory of II, 77 foil; when the general equivalents of cases can not be employed II, 77, note; what is meant by adverbial cases II, 79. (J ^ , pronunciation I, 4. cities, gender of 1, 29. clock, rendering of the phrases with, 1,95. 96. comparatives, formed I, 32; II, 30; change their radical vowels I, 32; II, 30; comparative of adverbs II, 69. 74. comparison of adjectives 11,30; irregular comp. II, 31; of adverbs II, 74. compound verbs, see verbs; comp, nouns, see nouns, conditional mood, conjuga- tion of I, 64; formation 2, 39; cond. mood in hypothetical clauses I, 65; II, 89. conditional sentences, gen- erally require the indicative II, 89; when they must have the verb] in the subjunctive or conditional,] see hypothdical clauses; cond. clauses ] understood I, 65; II, 89. 90. conjugation, strong and weak, | preface V, note; model of conjuga- tion of weak verbs II, 34; of strong! verbs II, 37. 38; irregular conj. of I weak verbs I, 58; II, 35; of strong verbs II, 35 foil. c o nj u n c t i o n 8, II, 65 foil.; clauses | introduced by subordinate conjunc- tions require the verb to be at the| end II, 65. consonants pronounced I, 4 foil. I to continue, when translated by j fovtje^en, and when by fortfaljrcnj I, 110. correlative adjectives I, 26; cor-j rel. adverbs II, 74. could, translated by fonntc I, 65;l in clauses introduced by that I, 65;1 English potential pluperfect with covM, how translated I, 108. countries, gender of I, 29. b a , adverb I, 23; adverb of time and loose connective II, 72; relative ad- verb II, 73; demonstrative adverb II, 74; combined with prepositions I, 98; II, 64. 72; when these combin-j ations must be used I, 99; ba, con| junction (since) II, 65; td, since, re quires the verb to be at the end, 1, 5^ J 103 — b a m a 1 6 , adverb of time, II, 70. b a m i t , in order that, subordinating conjunction II, 65; subjunctive after bamit II, 89. b a a f en , with dative II, 78. b a n n , adverb of time, II, 70, b a r U m , adverb of cause II, 70. t)a^ ift, that is I, 39; baS finb, thei/ are I, 40. \>a^, WaQ I, 26; II, 19. ha^, subordinating conjunction II, 65; clauses introduced by ha^ re- quire the verb at the end I, 54; with subjunctive I, 62; II, 88. 89; ba6 omitted I, 63; II, 88; in con- nection with prepositions (ftatt, aiu %tV, o{)ne) and prepositional ad- verbs (baburd), etc.) II, 66. Clauses with ha^ preceded by a preposi- tional adverb, compounded with hd, are equivalents to English partici- pial constructions II, 86. dative, how rendered II, 3; for- mation I, 19; when the dative drops the ending e II, 7; generally precedes the accusative I, 19; dat. of per.sonal pronouns generally fol- lows the accusative I, 64; verbs governing the dative II, 78; verbs requiring two ol jects generally have the direct object in the accu- sative, and the indirect in the da- tive II, 78; no noun governs a da- tive II, 79; adjectives with dative II, 79; dative after prepositions II, 61. 62; adverbial dative is either possessive or the dative of the in- terested person II, 80; ethical da- tive II, 80. declension, strong and weak, pref ice V, note; decl. of nouns I, 14. 17. 19. 30. 71; II, 5; of nouns in er, e(, en I, 19. 33; II, 7; of nouns in c I, 34; II, 6; weak de- clension of nouns II, 5; scheme of weak declension II, 6; of nouns in e with genitives in cn8 II, 6; scheme of strong declension II, 6; nouns that soften the radical vowel in de- clension II, 7. 8; feminine nouns of the strong declension II, 7; nouns strong in the singular, and weak in the plural II, 9; declension of proper names I, 28; II, 9 foil.; de- clension of the definite article, I, 19; II, 3; of the indefinite article I, 20; II, 3; of possessives I, 20; II, 24; of pronominal adjectives I, 14. 17. 18. 19. 31; II, 15 fjll.; of ordinary adjectives I, 39. 40. 44; II, 27 foil.; mixed declension II, 29; declension cf comparatives and superlatives II, 31; of adjectives whose nouns are imderstood I, 40; of cardinal and ordinal numerals I, 42; II, 26. b C i n , possessive adjective II, 23. b C i n c r , genitive of bu II, 23. demonstratives I, 9. 12. 18.31; II, 17; they agree with their nouns I, 13; djmonstrative adverbs II, 70; their roots /a and ha II, 70. b C n t C n , formation of imperfect I, 58; II, 35; subjunctive imperfect I, 62; II, 35. b C n n , for, coordinating conjunction II, 65; idiomatically used with a subjunctive (e8 |ei benn) in the meaning unless, II, 67. 89. b e r , hit, ha^, article I, 9. 14. 19; II, 3; relative pronoun" II, 15. 16; its difference from tvcldjCX II, 16, notej ber as demonstrative II, 17. 18; in the plural used instead of biejent* gen, bic II, 19; ber instead of bcr- jeniflc II, 19. beret, genitive ])lural of the demon- strative ber, used instead of beren II, 19. berienigc, ber (n)et(f)er); ber, njet* d)er I, 26. 27; II, 17. 18. — 104 b C r f C I b e , demonstrative pronoun 11, 17. 18. b c ^t) a I b, b e 8 m e g e u, demonstrat- ive adverbs of cause II, 70; whether to spell befe or bc^ II, 64. be ft in connection with je II, 65. t>idi, accusative of bu II, 11; used as reflexive II, 12. bt C f C r , demonstrative adjective, de- clined I, 14. 17. 19; II, 14. 17; bic= |e3 contracted into bte§ II, 14. b i e § f e i t , preposition with geni- tive II, 61. diminutives, how formed I, 102. diphthongs, pronunciation of 1,3. bir, dative of bu II, 11; used re- flexively II, 12. b d^ , coordinating conjunction II, i 65; bod), bennoc^, adverbs, not I translated in the apodosis after the ] equivalents of aUhaiigh I, 102. e§ bo inter t I, 86. b r e i , cardinal numeral, when in- j fleeted II, 26. broken, with dative II, 78. b U , pers. pronoun, declined II, 11. b U r d) , preposition with accusative \ II, 61; exponent of the passive agent I, 74; in compound verbs, II, 58. biirfcn, modal auxiliary, con- jugated I, 107; II, 57; peculiari- ties of biirfen II, 55. b ii r ft C U , used personally and im- personally I, 87. S, vowel, pronunciation I, 2; when dropped in the declension of nouns II, 7; when dropped or retained in the conjugation of verbs I, 50. 90. 91; not dropped in the subjunctive I, 62; when dropped intheim{>erat- ive of strong verbs I, 90; II, 36; changed into i in the present and imperative of strong verbs I, 90. each other, how translated I, 83. cben, adverb, corresponding to the adjective bevfelbe It, 72; used in connection with pronouns II, 72. Cl)e, before, subordinating conjunc- tion II, 65; requires the verb to be at the end I, 81. cin, indefinite article II, 3; declines strong or weak I, 48; II, 20. 23. 26. cin, indefinite pronominal adjec- tive (some, any), II, 20; used sub- stantively II, 20; instead of the obliqu3 cases of man II, 12. 13; eiii, numer il II, 25; when the form eiit^ must be used II, 26. c i n a n b e r , each other, I, 83. c i n b i t b e n , fid), has the reflexive pronoun in the dative I, 83. e i U i g e r , indefinite adjective II, 20; translated by same or any II, 21- e i t e i , meaning nothing but is inde- clinable II. 75. C t e 1 11 , fic^, personally and imper- smaliy used I, 87. emphatic f o r m of the English verb, how expressed I, 19. e n t g c g e It , preposition with dative II, 61. e 11 1 i a 11 g , preposition with dative II, 61. e It t f a g e u , governs dative II, 78. entmeber — obcr, coordinating conjunction II, 65. c r , 1 i e , e § , personal pronoun I, 45; declined II, 11. erft, not till I, 94. e ^ , impers' ►nal pronoun, omitted I, 34. 87; II, 54. e 1 1 i c^ e r , instead of eiiiiger II, 21. e 1 10 a , indefinite adverb, meaning of II, 72. 105 cttuaS, substantive pronoun I, 23; II, 13; used adjectively II, 20. cud), dative and accusative plural of bu II, 11; used reflexively II, 12. cuer, genitive plural of bull. 11; possessive adjective II, 23. everything, rendered by OTeS II, 21. f a 1 1 §, used as conjunction instead of iuenu, if (in the case that) II, 66. feminine nouns, indeclinable in the singular I, 17; feminine per- sonal nouns in in I, 102; II, 4; they double the n in the plural II, 6; feminine gender of derivatives II, 4. a f e w , translated by einigc or etlid^c II, 22; not a few translated by nid)t njenigc or mand)e II, 22. f 1 g e n , conjugated with fein I, 99; governs the dative II, 78. fractions I, 46; II, 27; mixed fractions, how translated I, 56. f I* a g e n , construction wiih double accusative II, 79. grau, graulcin,as titles, trans- lated I, 46. f r e U C n , fld^, personal and imper- sonal use of I, 87. frier en, differently translated I, 86; personally, and impersonally used I, 86. fiir, preposition with accusative I, 15; II, 61. fiird^ten, to he afraid, when used with a reflexive pronoun, and when without I, 89. g ii r ft , declension of II, 5. future tense, how formed I, 60; subjunctive of the future I, 64; both futures used of probable pre- sent or past events II, 83. ®, letter, different pronunciation of I, 5. g a n ;; , when not declined II, 75. gar, adverb of intensity, its mean- ing II, 73. g c , see augment. g e g e n , preposition with the accusa- tive II, 61. gcgeuiiber, preposition with the dative II, 61. g C !^ e n , irregularly conjugated I, 91; II, 37. get)or(^en, governs the dative II, 78. g e It n g c n , conjugated with fein I, 99. g e m d 6 , preposition with the dative II, 61. gender of nouns in general II, 4; of persons and things I, 9; II, 4; of countries and cities I, 29; II, 5; gender denoted by the ending in several derivatives I, 102; II, 4; natural gender of nouns II, 4; no common gender in German II, 4; gender of diminutives II, 4; gender of compound nouns II, 5; nouns with two genders II, 5; pronomi- nal subjects followed by a predicate noun, generally placed in the neuter gender II, 76; the neuters WXt^ and tt»a§ used of persons II, 77; neuter gender applied to indicate persons of either sex II, 77. genitive, how formed I, 17; how translated II, 3; genitive of nouns I, 71; when the vowel c in the ending c^ is dropped II, 7; genitive jn cn3 of nouns II, 6; genitive pre- ceding its governing noun cor- responds to the English possessive case I, 73; genitive singular of 106 ~ adjectives generally assumes the weak inflection II, 29; genitive governed by prepositions II, 61; genitive after verbs II, 78; after ad- jectives II, 79; most of the simple verbs governing a genitive, also construed with an accusative II, 78; genitive after nouns II, 79; ad verbial genitive II, 79. gcrn, adverb, how compared II, 74. @ r a f , declension of II, 5. H. Ijabcn, io have, the present conju- gated I, 13; imperfect I, 48; is an irregular verb II, 35; paradigm of n, 40; what verbs require ^aben as an auxiliary I, 99; II, 38.39. 89; 2ufl l)aben I, 49. ^alb, numeral II, 27; when not declined II, 75. 5 a I b e r, preposition with the geni- tive II, 61. ^ e i n t, to-night, used in local dialects II, 72. § e i 6 e^n, to be called I, 28; construed with a predicate-nominative II, 78. §et b, declined II, 5. ]^ e I f e n , governs the dative II, 78. ^cr, particle II, 71; combined with prepositions I, 98; with adverbs II, 70; meaning of l^er in these con- nections I, 99; diflerence from l^in I, 99; II, 70. §crr, declined II, 5; §err, grau, graulcin as titles I, 46. I) e U e r , adverb of time, in this yeaVy II, 72. I) e U t C , adverb of time, io-day, II, 72. h i , demonstrative root II, 70. 72. !^ i e r , demonstrative adverb of placa II, 70; in composition with prepo- sitions II, 72. ^ in , particle II, 71; combined with prepositions and adverbs I, 98; II, 70; difference from l)erl, 99; II, 70. \\XiitX , preposition with dative and accusative II, 61. §ir t, declined II, 6. however (much), tuenn oud) nod^ fo I, 103. ]^ U n g C r n , used personally and im- personally I, 86. hypothetical clauses require the finite verb to be in the sub- junctive I, 64. 65; the verb in the principal sentence of such clauses is in the conditional or the sub- junctive imperfect or pluperfect I, 65; II, 89. 3, vowel, pronunciation I, 2. ic!^, pers. pronoun, declined II, 11; used as noun II, 11. if, translated by luetttt or ob I, 74; e ven if, how translated I, 102. il^m, dative singular of cril, 11. i ]^ n , accusative singular of er II, 11. il) n en , dative plural of er II, 12. i^r, how translated I, 10; dative fem. sing, of er (fie, e§) II, 11; poss- essive adjective CAer, ihtir) II, 23. i :^ r e r , genitive plural of er (fic, c8) II, 11. 12. t m nt C r , indefinite adverb II, 72. imperative drops the ending e in certain strong verbs I, 90; II, 36; imper. passive formed with the auxiliary fcin II, 50. imperfect of fcin I, 47; cf Ijabcn I, 48; of weak verbs I, 58; II, 33; when the e in the ending etc is dropped or retained I, 58; II, 33; — lOY irregular imperfect of bringen, ben- fen, nennen, jenben, etc., of tDoUen, fonn^n, miiffen I, 58; II, 35; im- perfect passive I, 77; the imperfect is the tense of the narrative II, 83. impersonal expressions, more numerous in German than in Eng- lish I, 87; impersonal fonn may be given to almost all sentences I, 87; when preferred to the personal form I, 87; impersonal verbs I, 86; II, 54 foil ; impersonal passive II, 64, 82; reflexive impersonals II, 54. 55; impersonal passives of verbs of believing, saying, etc., followed by bag, correspond to English per- sonal constructions II, 84. in, preposition with dative or ac- cusative I, 24. 93; IF, 62; in com- position takes the form ein, *if gov- erning the accusative II, 71. indefinite pronouns II, 12. 20; indefinite adverbs II, 70. 72. inbcm, inbcHctt subordinating conjunctions II, 65. infinitive, termination of I, 50; II, 32; with gn I, 50; place of the inf. in the sentence I, 50; inf. with gu in compound verbs I, 72; inf. without gu idiomatically rendered I, 91; used as a neuter noun I, 105; II, 47. 83; inf. after ol)nc I, 109 after nm I, 72; inf. of transitive verbs after tafjen has a passive mean- ing II, 81; active inf. with gu after fein has a passive meaning II, 81. 82. 83; subject-infinitive is used with or without gu II, 83; object-infinitive is generally preceded by the preposi- tion gull, 83. 84; verbs requiring the object-infinitive without gu II, 84; the English construction of the ob- ject-infinitive in connection with a substantive object after verbs cf wishing,expecting,believing,declar- ing, considering is not used in Ger- man II, 84; the English infinitive after so as must be rendered by finite verbs after fo bag II, 85. t n n e V I) a I b , preposition with gen- itive II, 61. inseparable compound verbs, see verbs. interrogative adjectives de- clined I, 24. 31; interr. substantive pronouns declined I, 23; II, 10 foil.; interrogative adverbs II, 70. inversion of the apodosis I, 58. i r (^ e n b in combination with in- definite pronouns II, 13. 20. 21; in combination with relative ad- verbs II, 72. i t , how rendered I, 23, J, (Consonant.) J a f affirmative particle I, 45. Je, jcntalS, indefinite adverbs of time II, 72; indefinite adjectives and aossessives; used predicatively II, 24. mcincr, bcr meinigc, possessive adj., substantively used I, 43. 44; II, 24; ta^ SD^einigc, !^cini9e, etc., my, they, etc. property II, 25; bic 2)Ieinigcn, 2)einigen, etc. my, thy, etc. friends II, 25. meincr, genitive of id) II, 11. 2Jienfd), declined II, 5; distin- guished from Tlann I, 37. mid), accusative singular of td^ II, 11; reflexively used II, 12. might, translated by fonntc I, 65; by moc^tc I, 65. mine, how to translate I, 43; II, 24 foil. mir, dative singular of ic^ II, 11; as a reflexive II, 12. m i 6 1 i n g e n , conjugated with fcin I, 99. m i t , preposition governing the dat- ive I, 24; II, 61. — 109 — m i 1 1 C t (l , preposition governing the genitive II, 61. m d) t C , how translated I, 65. modal auxiliaries II, 54; their participles take the forms of infini- tives I, 108; II, 35; their peculiar- ities in conjugation II, 55. m g e n , conjugated I, 107; II, 55 f'jlL; meaning of I, 108; peculiar- ities of conjugation II, 55. moods of the verb II, 32. Mr., Miss, Mrs., how translated I, 46. much, many, II, 22; the adverb much generally translated by \t])\ II, 73. must with negatives translated by biirfen I, 108. tniiffen, conjugated I, 54; II, 57; imperfect, how formed and rendered I, 58; peculiarities in conjugation 11,55; miiStc, how rendered I, 65. N. nQ.6) f preposition with the dative II, 61; before names of plares I, 29. n a (^ b C m , after, subordinating con- junction II, 65; requires the verb to be at the end I, 81. 11 d d^ ft , preposition with dative II, 61. 9Z a r r , how to decline II, 5. n e b e n , preposition with dative or accusative I, 93; il, 62. n e b ft , preposition with dative II, 61. n C I) ni C n , to take, governs the dative of the person from whom something is taken II, 78. n e i n , adverb I, 45; nature of II, 72. II e It n C n , formation of the imper- fect I, 58; II, 35; subjunctive im- perfect I, 62; II, 35; in the active construed with two accusatives II, 79; in the passive requires a predi cate-nominative II, 78. II I d)t , indefinite adverb II, 72; 11 id) t itur — fonbcrn auc^, used as coordinating conjunctions II, 65. II i d) t 8 , indefinite substantive pro- noun I, 23; II, 13. 11 ie, nicmoU, indefinite adverbs II, 72. 5'^ i C m a n b , indefinite substantive pronoun I, 23; II, 12; declined II, 13. 11 i r (J C It b , indefinite adverb of place II, 72. It d^ \i\6) i , not ydl, \i:\ Txo 6) t'xxi* mat, once more I, 60. nomin ati ve II, 3; case of the subject and predicate II, 77; when a predicate-nominative is required II, 78; English predicate-nominat- ives after verbs of considering, electing, etc., generally rendered by the preposition ju or fiir II, 78; nominative with the force of a vocative II, 78. n o u n s II, 4 foil. ; declined I, 14. 17. 19. 30; plurals of nouns formed by the ending cr I, 32; by the end- ing eit I, 34; when nouns denoting measurement or weight are not in- flected I, 38; II, 76; how predicate- nouns, and nouns in apposition agree with their governing words II, 75. numerals 1,34; cardinals 11, 25; when they are inflected II, 26; or- dinals I, 42; II, 26; numeral ad- verbs II, 26; II, 70. It ii ^ e It , governs a dative II, 78. oB, whether, if, subordinating con- junction II, 65; with subjunctive I, 63; II, 88; translated by i/I, 74; separated or dropped in the com- — no — pound conjunctions obglcid^, ob* fdjou, obtt30l)l I, 102. b C r I) a I b , preposition with the genitive II, 61. b g ( e i d), O b f d) O n, and the subor- dinating conjunctions synonymous to it I, 102; II, 65; they require the verb to be at the end I, 102. objective c.ise, German equiv- tilent of II, 3; English verbs gov- erning the objective case generally rendered by German verbs with the accusative II, 78; when ren- dered by the dative I, 50; II, 78. p c c u p y , to, how translated I, 76. £) C^ § , inflection of II, 5. obcr, coordinating conjunction II, 65. of, English preposition, translated by the genitive II, 3; when trans- lated by the preposition toon, and when by the genitive I, 21. 28; not translated after nouns of measure- ment and weight I, 38; not trans- lated after fractions I, 46; in what other instances it is not translated, I, 42; II, 78. officer, how to translate I, 86. oft, indefinite adverb of time II, 73; comparison of II, 74. I) U e , preposition with the accusa- tive II, 61; followed by an infini- tive I, 109. one another, how translated I, 83. order of words II, 90.91. See Arrangement. participle, present, how formed I, 105; past participle, how formed I, 70. 71; without augment in in- separable compounds, and in verbs with the ending iveu I, 71; II, 33; past participles of strong verbs have the ending en I, 71; past participles of the modal auxiliaries and some other verbs ((affen, I)oren, fcl)en, IjtU feu, l^ei{3en) often take the form of infinitives I, 108; II, 65; future par- ticiple of the passive with ;;ii, used attributively II, 85; participles de- clined and compared I, 105; II, 48. 85; place of the past participle I, 14; II, 90; participles and their adjuncts placed before their gov- erning nouns I, 105; II, 90; past participles after bmmcu with the force of a present participle II, 85; past participles with the force of an imperative II, 85 ; participles with the force of adjectives II, 85; in- stances in which the German lan- guage admits of participial con- structions II, 85. 86; participial constructions cannot be formed by means of auxiliaries II. 85; parti- cipial constructions generally used to express an accompanying action II, 85; German equivalents for English participial constructions II, 85. 86; past participles after verbs of receiving II, 85. parts o f s p e e c h II, 3. passive v o i c e II, 48. 81; present indicative of the passive conjugated I, 74; imperfect indicative and sub- junctive I, 77; perfect and pluper- fect indicative and subjunctive I, 80; complete paradigm of the pas- sive II, 49 foil. The passive voice formed by the auxiliary njcvbeu or fciitl, 74.' 77; II, 48; place of the participle of the auxiliary in the passive tenses II, 48; tiie passive agent (with by) expressed by toon or burc^ I; 74; II, 82; impersonal — Ill passive II, 54. 82; German equiv- alents of the passive voice II, 81; what verbs admit of a complete passive voice II, 82. people, how translated I, 86- perfect indicative and subjunctive, how formed I, 62; II, 38; of the passive I, 80; German perfect tense usoi with the force of the English past tense I, 81; especially in de- tached statements II, 83; has the force of the English present-per- fect II, 83. )) f I C 9 e n with the infinitive, how translated I, 109. pluperfect indicative and sub- junctivc conjugated I, 62; of the passive I, 80; the exceptional plu- perfect „ic^ ^attc gelobt ge^abt" II, 46. plural of nouns I, 30. 32. 34; of feminine nouns I, 59; plurals in cr I, 32; II, 7. 8; irrej?ular plurals II, 9; plurals in g II, 9; plurals of proper names II, 10; plural of the finite verb, when the subject con- sists of two nouns connected by unb II, 75. possessive case, English, how translated into German I, 73; II, 3; the English possessive case rendered either by a genitive or by a com- pound noun II, 79. possessive pronominal adjectives I, 20. 11. 16; II, 23. 24. 43; de- clined like the indefinite article I, 18.20; plural of I, 31; possessives of the third person used for address II, 23; possessives used predicat- ively II, 24; substantively I, 43; .II, 24. 25; ber meine, bcr mcinigc, meincr II, 25; possessive pronouns have a double agreement II, 76. potential mood, English, with could or might how translated I, 65; II, 58; potential with should ot would after the conjunction fhat^ how translated I, 65; the English poten- tial pluperfect with should (ought to), could and would, how translated I, 80. 108; II, 58. potential verbs II, 35. 55. prefixes of separable compound verbs placed at the end I, 68; II, 59; they are often placed before the infinitive with gu I, 69; when they are not separated from the verb I, 69; II, 60; prefixes partly separable, partly inseparable I, 69; II, 59; compound prefixes II, 60. prepositions II, 61; with genit- ive, dative, and accusative I, 93; II, 61 ; requiring the dative or ac- cusative II, 62; I, 93; II, 63; con- tracted with the article I, 93. 100; II, 64; often translated by preposi- tions differing fiom their original meanings I, 93. 94; II, 62; prepo- sitions in connection with the ad- verbs ttJo, ba, I)cr, Ijin, ^ier I, 98. 99; II, 64. 71. 72. present indicative of the regular verb in the active voice I, 56; present subjunctive I, 62; present indie, of the passive I, 74; present subjunctive of the passive I, 77; present tense with the force of the English perfect I, 54; with the force of an English past tense II, 83; with the force of a future II, 83; with the force of an imperative II, 83. pronouns, personal I, 45. 49. 51; II, 10 foil.; place of I, 50; pronouns of the second person used only in relations of intimacy II, 12; pro- nouns of the third person in polite conversation used instead of the pronouns of the second person I, 11; II, 12; indefinite substantive pronouns II, 12; indefinite prono- minal adjectives II, 20; used sub- — 112 — stantively II, 20; adjective pro- pron unci at ion I, 2 foil, nouns agree with their governing proper names, declension of I, words II, 75. See relatives^ demon- 28; II, 9 foil. stratives, possessives, reflexives^ interro- protasis and apodosis I, 59; II, gcUives 67. r e d^ t , adverb of intensity, how to translate it II, 73. 91 e d) t ^ a b e n, to be right I, 13. reciprocal pronouns, rendered by reflexives I, 83. reflexive pronouns, their form and use I, 52; II, 12. reflexive verbs, definition of II, 51; paradigms of I, 83; II, 52; how translated into English I, 83; English neuter verbs that have also an active meaning, generally rendered by German reflexives II, 61; reflexive verbs have generally the reflexive pronoun in the accus- ative I, 83; II, 52; ordinary transit- ive verbs may become reflexive II, 51; proper reflexives If, 51 foil.; they have no piist pnticiples II, 52; refloxive impersonals II, 54. 55. 82; reflexive verbs in connect- ion with laffcu have a passive mean- ing II, 81; reflexive verbs with or without laffen have often a passive meaning II, 81; reflexive verbs governing the genitive II, 78. eg regnet, I, 86. relative pronouns, declined ' I, 25. 31; agreement with their antecedents I, 25. 31; 11,76; ex- amples of relative ccmstructions II, 17; clauses introduced by relatives have the finite verb at the end I, 25; II, 65; if the antecedent of a relative is a p'jrsonal pronoun of the first or second person, either the finite verb is placed in the third person, or the antecedent must be repeated II, 76; relative adverbs II, 70- 73; in cor- relation to demonstratives II, 74; subjunctive in relative clauses II, 89; clauses introduced by relatives must be separated by commas II, 73. r e n tt e n , imperfect indicative, how formed I, 58; II, 35; imperfect sub- junctive I, 62; II, 35. to rise, translated by aufflel^CIt or aufge^en I, 68. @, f, 8, when these characters for the German sound of s are used I. 6. § {az) final, changed into ff after a short vowel when an ending is added to the word I, 32 (foot- note); II, 6. f a in m t , preposition with the dative II, 61. f c^ e i n e n , connected with a predi- cate-nominative II. 78. f d) c U e n , j d) t m p f c ii in the pass- ive, construed with a predicate- nominative II, 78; in the active they require two accusatives II, 79. \d)mt\^t\Xi f governs the dative II, 78; has the reflexive pronoun in the dative I, 83. f c^ m e r 3 e n , impersonally used I, 87. eg fennel t, I, 86. f C ^ r , the adverb of tjtet II, 73. fein, irregular verb II, 36; para- digm of II, 41 foil.; present indi- cative conjugated I, 8; imperfect I, 47; perfect I, 46; pluperfect I, 62; 113 subjunctive of present and imper- fect I, 62; of perfect and pluperfect 1, 62; used impersonally (e§ ift mir) I, 86; used as auxiliary of the ac- tive voice instead of l^aben I, 99; II, 39; used as auxiliary of the passive instead of tuerben I, 74. 77; II, 48; takes feiu as an auxiliary in the perfect II, 39. j C i tt , possessive adjective of the third person, see possessive pronomi- nal adjectives. J e i n c r, genitive of cr II, 11 ; genitive and dative feminine of fcilt 1, 18. 20. feit, since, preposition with the dat- ive I, 34; II, 61; use of feit II, 62; subordinating conjunction II, 65. f C i t b e m subordinating conjunction, synonym of Jcit II, 65. self, compounds with self correspond either to felbft, or to German re- flexives I, 83. f C 1 1 e n , indefinite adverb of time II, 73. f C n b C n , imperfect indicative I, 58; 11, 35; imperfect subjunctive I, 62; 11,35 sentences, dependent, require the finite verb to be at the end II, 65. separable compound verbs, see verbs. shall, corresponds to the auxiliary ruerbcn II, 39; when it must be translated by joHeu I, 60. }id), dative and accusative singular and plural of the reflexive pronoun of the third person I. 52; II, 12. fie, personal pronoun of the third person, either nominative or ac- cusative singular feminine, or nom- inative or accusative of the plural of all genders I, 45; II, 11. 12; if spelled with a capital, it has the meaning of a pronoun of the second person, in singular or plural I, II. jo (so, thus), adverb of manner and intensity II, 70; fo in the apodosis not translated I, 59; II, 67; I, 102; fo, translated by as in the first part of a comparison I, 13; fo followed by andjf idiomatically used in a concessive sense II, 67. f — a I § {as — as), subordinating con- junctions II, 65; the fo often com- bined with adverbs of time (fobatb, fo oft etc.), in which case the fol- lowing alS may be omitted II, 66. fold)er, fotc^ ein, demonstrative adjective II, 17. f n e n , translated by shall I, 60; peculiarities of conjugation II, 55. 58. some, when not translated II, 20 foil. f n b e r , obsolete preposition with accusative II, 61. f n b e r n , coordinating conjunction II, 65; when 6m< must be translated by it I, 72; II, 65; nid)t nur — foit* bern aitrf) II, 65. fomol)! — atS aud), have the force of coordinating conjunctions II, 65. P a 1 1 , instead, preposition with gen- itive II, 61. ft e I) e n , to stand, irregular strong verb I, 91; II, 37. ft c t § , indefinite adverb of time, synonym to immer II, 72. subj cot, placed in the nominative II, 77; when placed after the verb I, 72; II, 90; for subject-infinitive see infinitive. subj uncti ve formation of I, 62; of the passive I, 77; of the future I, 64; of fonnen, tniiffen, l^aben, feiit I, 62; subjunctive of indirect state- ment II, 87. 88; after tiCk^ and bamit I, 62; 11,87,88; in relative clauses II, 89; in general concessive clauses II, 89; tenses of the subjunctive I, 63, 80; II, 88; subjunctive after verbs of asking and doubting fol- 114 — lowed by ob I, 63. 64. 65; II, 88; subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect in hypothetical clauses I, 65; 11, 89; present subjunctive in impera- tive sentences II, 87; subjunctive imperfect or pluperfect in exclama- tory sentences II, 87. substantives, German, written with capital initials I, 9. superlative, how formed I, 22; II, 30; irregular II, 31; predicative superlative with am II, 30; agree- ment of the predicative superlative in connection with the article 11,30; absolute and relative superlatives II, 69; adverbial superlative II, 69. syllabication I, 7. C« tagt I, 86. t a U f C n , construed with a double accusative II, 79; in the passive with a predicate-nominative II, 78. t e n s e s of the verb, simple and com- pound II, 32; formation of com- pound tenses II, 38; use of the tenses of the subjunctive II, 88 foil. than, how translated II, 66. that, rendered by i>a^ or bieS I, 56; by jener 1, 12; by berjenigel, 26. 27; by ha^ I, 54; II, 65; by ber, bic, baS II, 16; that which, how translated I, 94. there is. e^ ift; there are, e5 fmb I, S4; e« gibt I, 36. XljOX f declension of II, 5. t ^ u n , irregular strong verb I, 91; II, 57; how distinguished from ntac^en I, 49. till, translated I, 60. 94; not till, crft I, 94. time of the day I, 95. 96. t i 1 1 e s I, 46. to and for before names of places rendered by nad^ I, 29; to, how translated I, 94. transitiveverbs are those which govern the accusative as direct ob- ject II, 82. t r ^ , preposition with the genitive II, 61. U. fiber, preposition with the accusat- ive or dative I, 93; II, 62. ii b e r a 1 1 , indefinite adverb of place II, 72. U m , preposition with the accusative II, 61; with the infinitive and ju, translated in order that I, 72; um — tritlen, compound preposition with the genitive II, 61. Utlb, and, coordinating conjunction II, 65. un g e a d^ t e t , in spite of, preposition with genitive II, 61; ungead)tct, al- though, subordinating conjunction II, 65. unless, translated by ttJOf cnt nid^t, auger njenn, trenn nic^t, e« fei benn bag II, 67. Unrcdjtl^aben, to be wrong I, 13. nn^, U8, dative and accusative plural of id^; used reflexively II,. 12. unfer, possessive adjective I, 11; II, 23; genitive plural of td^ II, 11. U It t e r , preposition with dative or accusative I, 93; II, 62. untcr^alb, preposition with gen- itive II, 61. u n m e 1 1 , preposition with dative II, 61. RETURN TO the circulation desk of any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY BIdg. 400, Richmond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS • 2-month loans may be renewed by calling (510)642-6753 • 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF • Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date. DUE AS STAMPED BELOW ^fP 7 2001 12,000(11/95)